When Israel Does This, Part 2 – 1994, May

When Israel Does This, Part 2 - 1994, May

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

WHEN ISRAEL DOES THIS-CONTINUED

IN OUR APRIL ISSUE, WE STARTED A MESSAGE TITLED “WHEN ISRAEL DOES THIS,” USING MICAH 7:11-17 AS OUR TEXT SCRIPTURE, WHICH DEALS WITH WHAT ISRAEL WILL DO TO FULFILL THESE VARIOUS PROPHECIES SET FORTH IN THE MESSAGE “LOOKING THROUGH WINDOWS OF PROPHECY;” AND WE HAD JUST READ FOUR VERSES FROM THE 12TH CHAPTER OF ZECHARIAH; SO THAT IS WHERE WE WILL CONTINUE ON FROM.

In Zechariah 12:2, God says, “Behold, I will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling unto all the people round about, when they shall be in the siege both against Judah and against Jerusalem.” Naturally those that are round about are the Arabs. They are the one’s doing all the fussing and scrapping with the Jews. No sooner did they sign this peace thing with Israel about the Gaza Strip and the Jericho territory, Arafat said, the Jew don’t know it yet; but they will leave Jerusalem also. I just thought to myself, That is what you say. The Bible tells us who will be leaving; and it will not be the Jews. I cannot project any certain time that God has determined for the Jews to start rebuilding the old city of Jerusalem; but the time between now and then is all the time they have, to continue with their negotiating. One thing you cannot help but notice though, is that everything just seems to get worse. For every individual that is in favor of negotiating a peace settlement between the Jews and the PLO, there are ever so many against it; so where does that leave the whole process? No doubt it will just get worse, and worse until finally either some Arab or Arabs make the wrong move, and that will be (as they say) the straw that breaks the camel’s back. As that hour approaches, the governors of Judah are no longer going to be Peres and Rabin. We have a prophecy that goes right in here to show that. If I am looking at this right, and if God has it timed, there is a certain way He is going to trigger this whole thing. That is when the city of Jerusalem becomes an international issue for the whole world to get involved in. The Arabs will foster it of course; and that is why it will become a cup of trembling. Not only will God make Jerusalem a cup of trembling to those Arabs, the next verse says He will make Jerusalem a burdensome stone for all people: and all that burden themselves with it shall be cut in pieces, though all the people of the earth be gathered together against it. That word is describing a negotiating process. That is exactly, we can say, is when U.N. no doubt will want to try to enter into it, just like they have argued back and forth for the last two and half years over Bosnia. Those of the U.N., think it is going to be the final closing thing to the world’s problems. They are not. I have to say, God is destined to tear that thing all to pieces sometime in the future. When you read that verse, a burdensome stone, and when you really think of a burdensome stone, you not only think of a stone that is heavy, but it is the way it is made. It is unhandy to get hold of. It is not an easy thing to get your arms around. It is not an easy thing to lift out of its place. God has made it that way. That is why when it begins to enter an international negotiating process, God says though all the nations of the earth be gathered together against Jerusalem, (not in a military way, but in a negotiating way) they will be cut in pieces. That is the U.N. body. God said, I will cut them to pieces. That is not firing shots. No. I cannot help but believe we are going to see hours of confusion hit the international scene where we will see diplomats from various nations stick their head in, sound off, only to walk out angry, saying, I will never return. We have so many prophecies here to look at, to thrill our hearts, it is hard to know which one to look at next.

A PREVIEW OF THE MILLENNIUM

Let us go ahead and turn to Isaiah 11. In Isaiah 11, we find a prophecy describing how God has allowed that prophet to see the Millennium. That is why when you start reading down through there, it tells how He will judge. It tells how the cow and bear shall feed together. “The wolf also shall dwell with the lamb, and the leopard shall lie down with the kid; and the calf and the young lion and the fatling together; and a little child shall lead them. And the cow and the bear shall feed; their young ones shall lie down together: (That is looking at the Millennium first.) and the lion shall eat straw like the ox.” There is one thing sure, Regardless of how many lions you put in the zoo now and try to educate him, they are not going to eat straw, because the lion’s stomach has not yet been changed. You might try it, but it would probably starve him to death. “And the sucking child shall play on the hole of the asp, and the weaned child shall put his hand on the cockatrice’s den. (We are still looking at the Millennium.) They shall not hurt nor destroy in all my holy mountain: for the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea.” That gives a little fore view of what will follow all the various encounters the Jews are to go through as this age of grace comes to an end. God has not overlooked one single detail: It is all in here somewhere if we can just get it all put together properly.

REVERTING BACK TO THE PRESENT HOUR

Verse 10, of Isaiah 11 brings you back to the fore view of what transpires before the world goes into that Millennial hour. “And in that day there shall be a root of Jesse, (This is talking about the Messiah.) which shall stand for an ensign of the people; to it shall the Gentiles seek: and His rest shall be glorious. And it shall come to pass in that day, that the Lord shall set His hand again the second time to recover the remnant of His people, (See? He puts the Millennium first. Now he starts going back over the process approaching it.) which shall be left, from Assyria, and from Egypt, and from Pathros, and from Cush, and from Elam, and from Shinar, and from Hamath, and from the islands of the sea. And He shall set up an ensign for the nations, and shall assemble the outcasts of Israel, and gather together the dispersed of Judah from the four corners of the earth. The envy also of Ephraim shall depart, and the adversaries of Judah shall be cut off: Ephraim shall not envy Judah, and Judah shall not vex Ephraim. (Showing that in the process of restoring the nation, both elements are going to be back in the land, reunited. Verse 14 tells exactly what they did in the Six Day War.) But they shall fly upon the shoulders of the Philistines toward the west; (They have already done that. Can you see it? But we are not in the Millennium yet; so just watch what He does.) they shall spoil them of the east together: (They did not do it then: this is still ahead of them. The east is across the Jordan River.) they shall lay their hand upon Edom and Moab; and the children of Ammon shall obey them.” They still have not come to that yet. Where are those Edomites, the Moabites, and the Ammonites? They are in the country of Jordan. They are in that other part of Zephaniah verses 8-11. They stopped over here short of that in 1967; so this is still ahead of them. They shall destroy the Moabites, the Edomites and the Ammonites. We have four prophecies that tell what Israel will do to those people across the river; so let us go right back to Numbers for a further view. Here is where it speaks (Numbers 24.) of what Balaam has said to Balak, Come here, I will show you what these people will do to your people in the latter days. (Verse 17) Balaam says, “I shall see him, but not now: I shall behold him, but not nigh: there shall come a Star out of Jacob, and a Sceptre shall rise out of Israel, and shall smite the corners of Moab, and destroy all the children of Sheth. And Edom shall be a possession, Sier also shall be a possession for his enemies; and Israel shall do valiantly.” This is linking all these prophecies together; because the focal point is the Moabites, the Edomites, and the Ammonites. That part of the land beyond Jordan today, (which was never a country called Jordan in ancient times) certain tribes of the Israeli people must have; because the areas of the land across the Jordan River were not occupied by the Moabites, the Edomites and the Ammonites, the children of Israel lived over there. That is why it speaks back here in this prophecy we read, about how they will move into Gilead, because Israel has got to have it. Israel has got to have the other side of the Jordan River in order to fulfill these prophecies against these people and to make room for the last wave of immigrants to enter and take up their possession to set the stage for the last days. That is why if we can see the picture that unfolds here, all of these are tied to the last days. I remember when Bro. Govender preached that message titled “The Latter Days of the Last Days:” That is what these prophecies are pertaining to: the latter days of the last days. They are prophecies that deal strictly with the supernatural. Here in Numbers 24, Israel will do valiantly. That is when the miraculous power of God will be witnessed. That is why Micah 7 comes right in here: It speaks of the miraculous power of God that will be displayed when He begins to wrap up these end time events; so notice verses 15-17, as we read together. (Micah 7:15-17) “According to the days of thy coming out of the land of Egypt will I shew unto him marvellous things. (things like the Red sea having a dry path for them to escape through, and the many other miracles of that 40 years journey) (16) The nations shall see and be confounded at all their might: they shall lay their hand upon their mouth, (That is a gesture of awe.) their ears shall be deaf. (17) They shall lick the dust like a serpent, they shall move out of their holes like worms of the earth: they shall be afraid of the Lord our God, and shall fear because of thee.” When God begins to show His miraculous power on behalf of the Israeli people the way so many of these prophecies speak of, it will put fear in the heart’s of those who have been their oppressors for so long: That is what all of this adds up to. As we begin to see what these various prophecies pertain to, then we can tie them together for these last days, Numbers 24, Zephaniah 8 through 11, Jeremiah 48, and 47, all about the same thing. Then we can see how all this has to come about by one miraculous sweep of the Israeli military forces, when Jerusalem is the focal point. In other words, until God is ready to show His hand, these leaders will just go ahead and fuss with each other, each one expressing his or her own thoughts about what it will take to bring about a condition of peace in the Middle East. Man will say, how soon? But when God is ready to move, He will be ready to let Israel escort those PLO people across the land, back to the land their ancestors came from, so the Jews can have the land God gave to their forefathers. We also have a prophecy I had never even thought about as being part of this picture until recently, when I was reading it again. It is in Obadiah. It just closes this thing. It lets you see exactly why God has His eye on Moab, on the Edomites and the Ammonites. It is because of how He saw them conduct themselves back in the 6th century, when the Babylonians first came to take the Jews captive and there were a few Jews that managed to escape. They would flee across the valley hoping to find refuge among their half brothers, (you might say) only to be captured and turned back over to the Babylonians, or to be held captive for some high ransom. It tells about it all in Obadiah. In that prophecy, God speaks of all three of them, I have watched you when you stood in the crossway and would not let my people escape, nor would you offer sanctuary to them. In other words, You would not extend a hand of mercy or even allow them to unmolested by you. Therefore God says, I have remembered all of this. Just think, saints, For 2600 years God has remembered what the Moabites did, what the Edomites, and the Ammonites; and He is going to bring them to account for it. There is no doubt in my mind, that this time factor is getting very close. Every day they grind away on this process in the Middle East, trying to bring it to some kind of resolution; and I just keep saying, Lord, how much longer before they start picking on Jerusalem? Once they start picking on Jerusalem, then I have to feel like God’s finger is beginning to point to the climax of these prophecies. When He does turn Israel loose, they will make a sweep that will cause people around the world to stand in awe. If I had a map up here and you could see the layout of Israel, and of the Jordan area she will cross over and take, it would give you a better understanding of all of this; but we are limited in some of what we would like to do. However Israel will not be crossing over there to kill all of those people. No. When it says He (meaning Israel) will destroy the Moabites, that in reality means Israel will take hold of them in such a way that they will never again be allowed again to multiply and become a powerful, hostile force against Israel. There is no doubt though, that when Israel does this, still off to the east of all of that you will still have old mad man Hussein, (as I call him) and he will certainly feel that he must take up the cause against Israel; and Israel will know that. Therefore if this thing is as close as it looks like it is, I cannot help but believe Israel will not stop with just the Jordan area. She will not stop until she has reached the Euphrates River. You might ask me why; and here is my answer: It is because if Israel was to make a move today to attack Jordan, there is no doubt that the old mad man is just waiting for the opportunity, hoping for a chance, militarily, to come against Israel with his forces. That is why I have to believe that when God does turn Israel loose to do this, and God shows His miraculous power on their behalf, He will not let Israel stop until she has gone all the way to the Euphrates River and put everything across the Jordan River to rest. It is the only way she can do what it says in Zephaniah, He will destroy all the gods of the earth in that day. They have to destroy that Islamic belief. That turns them around to fulfill what is said in Isaiah 63. Brothers and sisters: God has all of this laid out so beautifully: if we will just purge our mind’s of all former ideas we have held by tradition and allow the Spirit of God to show us how it really is. Praise His name!

WHEN ISRAEL SPOILS THEM OF THE EAST

Let us go back to Isaiah 11, to continue on with our look at these prophecies. There is no doubt in my mind, that when these prophecies we are looking at for the end of the age do begin to be fulfilled, it will all wrap up in very short order. It will not string out over a twenty year period of time. While we understand that there are many prophecies dealing with the same period of time, yet everything from the starting of that certain point will come about miraculously. As we said earlier, From back here in 1939 when God started dealing with the Jews in Europe, it has been a long period of time. It has been a struggle. A lot of Jews lost their lives from 1939 on through the war years. Then the birth of the nation came about in 1948, and think of how they struggled through the war of 1967, and what they have been subjected to since then. Almost 27 years have come and gone since that war of 1967; and now it looks like there is a stalemate in the progression of events leading up to the next prophesied events; but no doubt this stalemate is the period that can launch Israel right into the era of the miraculous; and I believe it is going to be very soon now. As we have pointed out before, All of this has to be kept within the generation that saw the hand of God begin to move to restore Israel; so whether you figure it from 1939, or 1948, that generation cannot be stretched very far beyond the year 2000 A.D. The generation Jesus spoke of in Matthew 24, that cannot pass away until all these things be fulfilled, is the very generation that watched Israel returned to statehood after all those other Jews had been slaughtered in WW2. Well we read the verses of Isaiah 11, that actually put the Millennium in the forefront; and therefore from verse 14, where we are going to begin reading now, it reverts backward to the conditions that will transpire prior to the Millennium coming into focus. Let us notice how precise these little prophecies are. “But they shall fly upon the shoulders of the Philistines toward the west.” According to Zechariah 10 we find that was accomplished in the war of 1967. Zephaniah 2:3-7, that was fulfilled, where they fly upon the shoulders of the Philistines to the west. They took the Gaza Strip. Keep in mind these prophecies we are reading are not prophecies related to different intervals of time: They are all dealing with the same thing. Each prophecy shows how God let that prophet in the hour the prophecy was written, see the picture. The picture then becomes a specific thing as to how God brings it about. Therefore the first thing this prophecy brings in, is how Israel will take the Gaza Strip. Then notice the rest of the verse. “They shall spoil them of the east together.” That means when you go to Zephaniah 2:8-11, you find the prophecy concerning how God will deal with Moab and Ammon, which is exactly what we were just speaking of. When Israel crosses the Jordan to actually spoil them of the east, and take possession of the land now known as Jordan, that is when that verse goes into complete fulfillment and application. “They shall lay their hand upon Edom and Moab; and the children of Ammon shall obey them.” I believe we should all understand that by now. That is what Numbers 24 pertains to, where Balaam prophesied coming through the wilderness, when he said to Balak, Come here and I will show you what these people will do to your people in the latter days. Right there is where God caused Balaam to prophesy that the Edomites, the Moabites, the Ammonites would in the last days fall subject to Israel. It is very important that we see how these prophecies paint the picture if we expect to keep abreast of where time has progressed to; because we are living in that time factor right now, when we can expect to see these prophecies fulfilled without it being a surprise to us. The unbelieving people of the world will be surprised, or I should say shocked, when Israel begins to excel; but we who have followed these prophecies will only rejoice. Not because of any misfortune that comes to others, but because of the accuracy of every prophecy God has spoken concerning these things. Furthermore we do know for sure, that these prophecies are not pertaining to something that will take place way over here in the Millennium. The reason I put this sketched map up here, is to try and show you the relationship of these other areas to the present land of Israel. Right in here (pointing to map) is the land of Israel. Right across here is the land of Jordan; but looking on eastward, you see Saudi Arabia. If we had a Bible map, it would make it much clearer to you why Israel must fulfill these prophecies; because those old Bible maps show where the twelve tribes of Israel originally dwelt when they finished the wilderness journey and settled in the promised land. She must have all of the land given to Abraham and his heirs; and the only way she is going to get it, is for some condition to arise that will justify her taking it by force; and the only way she can take it all by force, is for the hand of God to cause her to perform miraculous feats. That is why it says in Numbers, “And they shall do valiantly.” That means it is a military thing. Let us finish reading the rest. “And the Lord shall utterly destroy the tongue of the Egyptian sea; and with his mighty wind shall he shake his hand over the river, and shall smite it in the seven streams.” If you look at a map of the Nile River, where it comes into the delta, facing the Mediterranean, you can get this picture; but we need to understand something: There have been natural forces, (we will say, for the last twelve years) going on in the eastern areas of north Africa, from the Sudan, Ethiopia, eastern Kenya, down into Somalia, running down the eastern coast of Africa all the way into South Africa, that have made a difference. The Nile River flows northward; and for a long period of time, at least twelve years or more we have heard of the various droughts that keep hitting in those eastern countries of north Africa and along the eastern coastal areas. What is it doing? It is affecting the watershed; because the Nile drains out of the northern plateau regions that extend back into Ethiopia and Sudan. That is the watershed area of the Nile. It is true, since Egypt built that big dam that Russia helped her to build, called the Aswan Dam, she can control the flow of this water. But keep in mind, you can only control the flow of water in a massive river like that as long as you have water that falls in the watershed area at various times. But once that stops completely, sooner or later all that water you have been controlling is no longer there. When the day comes they have to shut off every dam for the sake of fresh water to the people, so this means that eventually there is no water that reaches the delta to go into the Mediterranean. Can you understand that? We have two prophecies where God speaks of that day, so let us continue to reading here, in Isaiah 11:15. “And with His mighty wind shall He shake His hand over the river, and shall smite it in the seven streams, (that is the delta area) and make men go over dryshod.” The 16th verse is applicable somewhere yet in front of us. It is not behind us. God has done some extraordinary things in bringing the Jew back home to fulfill these various prophecies and get them in place; but from now onward (we will say) is where the pressure comes. It is how God begins to show His hand. Notice this verse, “And there shall be an highway for the remnant of His people, which shall be left, from Assyria; like as it was to Israel in the day that He came up out of the land of Egypt.” Common sense will tell you when Moses led the children of Israel out of Egypt, there was no highway out there in the wilderness; so what kind of highway is it talking about? It means the route of the miraculous, the way of the miraculous. To me, this is why God has narrowed this time factor down to a few short years before we reach the week of Daniel. This is where when He begins to show His hand; and when He starts it, He will never let up until it is all over. That is why when the era of the miraculous starts, it will take this that somewhere out here in the world, and in some of those scattered mid east territories there is a few hundred Jews here and there still somehow or other kept there; but as the era of the miraculous starts, then those territories like Yemen, and Syria, which has kept several thousands of Jews shut up, and would not let them go home, God is going to miraculously make a way for them to be released and come quickly back to fulfill this picture. This is why as I look at the overall following of Bro. Branham, and please believe me, I am not talking about him personally: I am talking about the followers who have set for almost thirty years and read book after book after book until they have almost memorized every word of them; I realize that those people cannot possibly know how and where to fit in these prophecies. Not one of those books will refer you to one of these prophecies and show you how it will be set in motion and fulfill the picture for the last days. Too many of them have been left with this idea, God is going to come and the rapture take place, phooey with the rest, what do I care about what else takes place? That is absolutely a detrimental attitude for any human being to take toward the word of God. God does not even have to show mercy to a person who wants to take His word and treat it like that. What Bro. Branham brought to this age was a message to wake us up and get us looking forward to the hour and time we could recognize the hand of God bringing us back to scriptural, spiritual truth, in order that we might be put in the right relationship with God, our heavenly Father. As you look at all of this you realize, that does not change the picture written in the scriptures as to how Israel will come toward this point. If we can see ourselves as being the Church the word of God speaks of, and see Israel as she is moving forward to that hour we have been speaking of, we have to understand that when we coordinate the two together, the Church and Israel, they are running parallel toward a strategic time factor. As time moves quickly for Israel to face that week then when we look at the Gentile Church and how she should be moving into her final revelation of how to acquaint herself with Him for the rapture, which is just before the great tribulation in the week of Daniel. Just do not try to make the rapture take place 5 or 10 years before the week starts. That is not in harmony with the whole plan of God. Otherwise Paul would not have said concerning the coming of the Lord, in Thessalonians, and our gathering together unto Him, he wanted them to know that day shall not come except there come a falling away first and the man of sin be revealed. That certainly does not even suggest that the Church will go through any part of the great tribulation; but it does let us know the Church will still be here when it becomes known who the antichrist, or man of sin really is. The world leaders will be compelled by circumstances to initiate the era of this evil prince by allowing him to take the oversight of world affairs; and that should be the very thing that points the Church to the reality of what is taking place. She will know something is about to happen; and she will know what it is. That very incident is what activates the seventieth week of Daniel: Three and a half years of false peace, and then three and a half years of great tribulation. I cannot tell you exactly how much the Church will see take place before she takes her flight; but I can assure you she will be gone before the middle of that week comes. It is only the foolish virgins from among what is looked upon as the Gentile Church that will have to go into the darkest of that dark hour and give their lives in martyrdom to seal their testimony of faith in Jesus Christ. That is a result of playing around with every kind of idea and failing to be clothed in the revealed word of God until the hour when the door of revelation is closed to them. According to the parable, they come knocking; but that door is already closed to them. As for the fulfillment of these prophecies we have been looking at, they cannot be fulfilled until God has created a situation in the government of Israel that gets rid of this silly idea Rabin and Peres has been participating in, thinking they can compromise with the PLO, give up territory, and live in peace with the Arabs. In the plan of God there is no such thing as negotiation. God is not going to negotiate with anyone. God said, I shall do this, and He will. He is not going to compromise with the devil. I will say this though, God will give carnal man an opportunity to do certain things: just to prove to carnal man that he (the natural minded man) will always choose to do the wrong thing; and never the right thing. Then when man has proved himself always to do the wrong thing, God comes on the scene and does it right. As He does it, He is magnified before people whose attention He gets. At the same time, those who do not yield their attention toward God will only become angrier than they were already. However if you think God cares how many millions of people get angry at what He does you have another thought coming: He is not going to shed one tear over any of that. People left alive on this earth until that time will either submit to the will of God or they will be treated just like trash that is good for nothing but burning. What this Bible portrays for us is the plan and purpose of God; and it was all settled in His great mind before He ever created anything.

THE KIND OF MEN GOD USES

We are looking at how God is going to deal strategically with the Middle East on behalf of the Jews in these last days. He has already caused them to take the land of the Philistines, but in order for them to subdue those of the east, there has got to come about a change in the Israeli government. Peres and Rabin are in no frame of mind to take more territory in any direction. All they want to do is compromise, and give into world pressure. That is why it looks like everything is questionable right now. But if we believe all these things are true, then we know God has a time factor somewhere in front of us, whether it is in the next half year, or a year, or a year and half. God is going to let some Arab or any element of Israeli people make a fatal mistake which is going to throw everything into a disruptive state. This is going to force the nation of Israel either to have an election or to choose some kind of new leadership. Once that new leadership is chosen, I believe the God of heaven is going to say, Alright, I have let various leaders through the years of time as Israel has slowly reached this point do as they saw fit to do; but now it is time to move forward and get on with what has to be done. You have had an up and down, see-saw situation in your government: Some wanting to give up, some wanting to hold on to what you have, and others wanting to move on; and now it is time for all of you to move forward together. Saints: if I am looking at the scriptures right, it is time for all of that see-sawing to stop. Let us go back to Zechariah 12. We have shown you already how in verses 2 and 3 God said He would make Jerusalem a cup of trembling and a burdensome stone and so forth; and we want to see how all of this ties in with Micah 7:11-17. These things help us determine how close we are to the renovating and rebuilding of the city of Jerusalem, and the temple, which is all described in the two chapters of Isaiah. Here in Zechariah 12, to me, is the focal point and condition that God sets forth for all of this to come about. Through the first three verses, especially verses 2 and 3 of Zechariah 12, He makes Jerusalem a cup of trembling to some people. You see that. That is how the Arabs will look at Jerusalem. They want it to be their city. But verse 3 makes it a burdensome stone to all them that get involved with it: That is the international, diplomatic scene. Now we come to verse 4, to see how God looks at Jerusalem when the hour has come for their walls to be built. “In that day, saith the Lord, I will smite every horse with astonishment, and his rider with madness: (He is actually saying, no matter what Israel’s hostile enemy forces will be, which will be the Arabs for that period of time, He will smite every one with madness.) and I will open mine eyes upon the house of Judah, (Judah we realize is the first major tribe that was to come back, to start this gradual process of the restoration of the nation. That is why in chapter 10 it speaks of the order of it.) and will smite every horse of the people with blindness.” In other words that tells us no matter how many Arabs are armed with modern equipment, their hostility is not going to succeed against Judah when the hour has arrived for God to send them forth victorious. Then verse 5 tells us what kind of leadership Israel will have to have in that hour in order for this to be brought about. “And the governors of Judah shall say in their heart, The inhabitants of Jerusalem shall be my strength in the Lord of hosts their God.” Naturally that has to be explained: At first glance it does not seem to make sense. First off as we look at Isaiah 49, which is in front of us somewhere just in a short time factor, Isaiah 49 tells us out there somewhere is an element of a certain type Jew. They are of the tribe of Judah, but they are basically of the lineage of David. Those were the early inhabitants and occupants of this ancient city of Jerusalem. King David took it; and it was mainly his relatives that occupied it. We have to keep in mind, he had several wives which brought forth several children. King Solomon followed him and he had many wives, did he not? Therefore you have to realize that eventually the occupants of the city of Jerusalem became mainly the descendants of many generations of King David’s descendants. That is why in ancient times it was also referred to as the city of David. He took it. Therefore his descendants occupied it, lived in it. In the last days, for that to be done, it means the city of Jerusalem has to come into a time frame where God deals strategically with that city. In the 1967 war, the Israeli army took the old city; and that did fulfill the prophecy of Jesus how that Jerusalem shall be trodden down of the Gentiles until the time of the Gentiles be fulfilled; but even though the prophecy was fulfilled in 1967, three fourths of the old city is still inhabited by Arabs. That means there is no way that city right now can be projected into the Millennium under that social structure. It has got to be a city that is occupied by the descendants of King David, who are also out of the tribe of Judah. Therefore for twenty some years this thing has been hanging there like that: In other words, with Arabs living there. At the same time the Arabs in the Gaza Strip, and in the areas of Jericho, are now demanding of the Israeli governors, that all these immigrants Jews in those newly settled areas be moved out. Then these Arabs in the old city that have seen immigrants come in, we will say in the suburban areas and build new quarters, they are saying the same thing: The Jews have got to get out of Jerusalem. To me that sets the focal point. That is the ultimatum. That is what makes Jerusalem a cup of trembling. Because it means prophecy has come to the time when God’s finger is pointing toward Jerusalem. He is going to set the agenda, the conditions, and here is where we can say His miraculous hand will go to work first. He sets the agenda Himself: He does not leave that in the hands of mortal men: You can see that as we read down through these verses. “In that day will I make the governors of Judah like an hearth of fire.” It has never been like that yet. You know it. They did have a good man in leadership in the 1967 war; but we have to realize he did not stay in office forever. Therefore as we look at this prophecy, we see how God is looking at the time factor. When it is time for the miraculous to go into force and these prophecies drop one after another, right into place, there has to be men in places of governmental leadership that are willing to move with God instead of with other world leaders. This sets the agenda for what we see here. “In that day will I make the governors of Judah like an hearth of fire among the wood, and like a torch of fire in a sheaf; and they shall devour all the people round about, (That is talking about Arabs, Palestinian Arabs.) on the right hand and on the left: and Jerusalem shall be inhabited again in her own place, even in Jerusalem.” By who? Jews of course. That fulfills Isaiah 49. Now watch how verse 7 gives you a backward view. “The Lord also shall save the tents of Judah first.” To understand what that verse means we have to realize what Judah did do in 1967. She took the Gaza strip just as it was prophesied in Zephaniah 2:3-7. Then she took the area of Jericho. All of that territory from the Jordan River over the Judaean mountains to the Mediterranean is the ancient territory of Judah. When God says, that He will establish the tents of Judah first, that should be easily understood to mean that the tribe of Judah, which is going to be the war tribe, the beginning tribe, will be the beginning process of the restoration and gradual rebuilding of this nation. He will start this process with Judah first. Therefore He is going to give her her territorial place of habitation. He has done it and now the Arabs are saying, But you have got to give up some of it. As we read this, do you think our western world leaders are reading this Bible? Not at all. It means nothing to them. However if their whole process of peace negotiation goes wrong, then you and I who are Christians, ought to say, Thank You Lord: You have given us a word of promise. Let us follow this on through. “The Lord also shall save the tents of Judah first, (Why? What is the importance of them being first?) that the glory of the house of David and the glory of the inhabitants of Jerusalem do not magnify themselves against Judah.” So to sum that all up, it means this, God knew He will give that tribe their place of habitation first, because they are going to be the war people: They are going to be the people who have to do the fighting and put up with twenty some years of fussing. Do you catch the point? If He would have given this particular kingly element of Judaean Jews the right to come back and live in Jerusalem first, can you not see how carnal man likes to brag? I live in Jerusalem! You live out in that little back woods place. I know where you come from! Keep in mind, you have to understand the natural reaction of carnal earthly people such as we are. You get New York people. Oh, you’re from Tennessee. What part? Oh, way down there where they say You all, back in the sticks. That is how natural minded creatures magnify themselves. I’m from New York! The big apple city! That is what God was talking about in that one verse. He does not want the city people, because of their lineage connection, to be able to brag and boast over the Judaean people that are going to be the ones that have to move out here and put up with twenty some years of Arab hostility, living behind chain link fences, as it says in Ezekiel 36. That is what they have been doing since the Six Day War. By now we ought to begin to see the picture. Knowing what the next issue is, that they want Judah to get out of this territory, I just have to say, Judah is not going to budge one inch. It may look like it. There may be certain things done that makes it look like prophecy is moving backward; but you rest assured, God knows exactly what He is doing. The hour God wants it to go the right way, something is going to happen that will blow things sky high in the Middle East. I believe with all my heart, it is going to cause Israel to have some kind of election that will change their leadership. Then all those Jews that have been put under pressure, and fear they are going to have to give up and get out of these territories where they have risked their lives to live in, will have a chance again. They risk the lives of their children to move out there in those territorial places and build those villages and put up those chain link fences and suffer the consequence of the hostility, being invaded at night, and having mortar shells dropped in their midst. Do you think those Jews are going to feel at ease when their own government leaders breathe down their neck and say, Come on, you have to get out of here. That is why we have hundreds of Jews living in Israel today in these rebuilt villages which have been fulfilling prophecy of how they would come back in the last days, they would rebuild the desolate place and the ruined place. The desolate place would also be tilled. She has been doing that for twenty some years, only to be faced with a bunch of leaders right now that want to sell out to the Arab cause. As I look at this I have to say, Brothers and sisters, get ready to watch the show. Something is going to blow; and when it does you are going to see the miraculous hand of God intervene on behalf of the Jewish people. As these prophecies begin to unfold, one right after another, the world is going to have to watch the miraculous hand of God. Israel is going to do valiantly; but it will be because they have a great and powerful God fighting for them. Once she enters that era of time, the Israeli governors will never again turn their heads to say, Yes, we will do this or that for the Arabs. The leaders of Israel will truly be dedicated to the Israeli cause; and that of course, will be to do the things these prophecies say she will do. Of course I realize, that once Israel has gained the land she is supposed to have and passed through that era, and she is in the process of rebuilding and doing the things the Bible says she will do, here comes the antichrist. Remember this though, the fact that the Jewish leaders will sign a covenant with the antichrist to be in effect from that hour on, does not change these prophecies one bit. All of this is written in the scriptures; and we already know what is going to happen. Therefore as we finish this up, and we see how the governors of Judah will be like a torch of fire in that day, we can take these thoughts and turn to Isaiah 19, where it picks up the picture again and tells us how God will look upon that hour of time. As Israel enters that hour of time that she takes this east country, she is doing it to bring the Moabites, the Edomites and the Ammonites under her control. It will bring the country of Jordan to an end. In ancient times there never was a country of Jordan. Those tribal people were over there, but those people functioned independently within their own identity. At the same time, across the Jordan, there were territories that still belonged to part of the ten tribes of Israel. Your old Bible maps will show you that.

WHAT PLACE EGYPT IS DESTINED TO HAVE IN THE FUTURE

As we move into these last days for Israel to be completely restored, getting ready for the week of Daniel, Israel has got to have all of her territory; so let us see how God is going to deal in a strategic way and use Judah in that hour. “The burden of Egypt. Behold, the Lord rideth upon a swift cloud, and shall come into Egypt: and the idols of Egypt shall be moved at his presence, and the heart of Egypt shall melt in the midst of it. And I will set the Egyptians against the Egyptians: and they shall fight every one against his brother, and every one against his neighbour; city against city, and kingdom against kingdom.” To make this short, let us go to verse 5. We read in Isaiah 11 how the tongue of the Egyptian sea would dry up, so notice this verse. “And the waters shall fail from the sea, and the river shall be wasted and dried up.” Another prophecy that is speaking about the mouth of the Nile. “And they shall turn the rivers far away; and the brooks of defense shall be emptied and dried up: the reeds and flags shall wither.” It comes right on down through there and tells you about the lakes, the fishermen and such like. Let us just move on down to verse 15 now. “Neither shall there be any work for Egypt, which the head or tail, branch or rush, may do. In that day shall Egypt be like unto women: (Now this is looking beyond 1967. In 1967 they had a Nasser, right? He was the one that led the Arab forces, saying, We will destroy this Jewish state. There will be no such thing. But they took a licking. Then again the Egyptians took a licking in 1973. This is looking beyond all of that.) and it shall be afraid and fear because of the shaking of the hand of the Lord of hosts, which He shaketh over it. And the land of Judah shall be a terror unto Egypt, (That cannot be until Zechariah 12, the governors in leadership. It goes together. The land of Judah cannot be something that people are afraid of until there are governors sitting at the top of it ready to say, You will do so and so, or else.) every one that maketh mention thereof shall be afraid in himself, because of the counsel of the Lord of hosts, which He hath determined against it.” Now as we read the rest of this prophecy, keep in mind, on one hand God is dealing a blow of judgment against that Egyptian nation. But at the same time He is doing it to get rid of a spirit of hostility that is fostered by certain Egyptian people who have harbored this Islamic religious spirit; and we have to understand this Islamic religion that started approximately 627 A.D. is to Judaism an anti religion, just as Catholicism is an anti religion to true Christianity. Islam is hostile to Judaism, just as Catholicism is hostile to what you and I stand for. When we realize in Zephaniah 2, verses 11, when Israel in that hour is to make her crossing into Jordan and conquer the Moabites, the Edomites and the Ammonites, right there in that area and right on down into Arabia is where that Islamic spirit rose up to start with. So this is why God has to deal with these people in this fashion. Because He is going to put that old Islamic religion to sleep. Therefore He has to judge it drastically to some of the people. That is why it is like this to Egypt. But when you read on here, you see something else. “In that day shall five cities in the land of Egypt speak the language of Canaan.” Which will be Hebrew. That does not mean five cities in the land of Egypt want to speak the dialect of the old Canaanites who God used Israel to drive out of there. You have got to realize, as God uses Judah to do this thing in an hour of the miraculous, yes it is going to bring a drastic judgment effect on some Egyptian politicians and military men. But it is also going to cause the simple and honest in heart Egyptian to recognize that the hand of God is with the Judaean people. “In that day shall there be an altar to the Lord in the midst of the land of Egypt, (Can you find that now? No. As long as Egypt is under that Islamic spell they are not about to build an altar to the same God the Jews look to.) and a pillar at the border thereof to the Lord.” That should show us what is causing that to be like that. It is because Israel is moving into the era that it takes the miraculous hand of God to bring these things to pass. To some He is bringing judgment. At the same time He is bringing judgment to some people, others will have their eyes opened. I just have to say, Praise God! He knows what He is doing. You can come right on down through there and it will tell you exactly why: just notice, “And it shall be for a sign and for a witness unto the Lord of hosts in the land of Egypt: for they shall cry unto the Lord because of the oppressors, (Politicians, old Islamic fundamentalists who want to create a holy war, and Egypt has had some of these episodes in the past few months.) and He shall send them a Saviour, (which means the knowledge of the Messiah to be) and a great one, and He shall deliver them. And the Lord shall be known to Egypt, and the Egyptians shall know the Lord in that day, (This takes it right on into the Millennium) and shall do sacrifice and oblation; yea, they shall vow a vow unto the Lord, and perform it. And the Lord shall smite Egypt: He shall smite and heal it.” First He smites it with judgment, puts her in her place, strips them of the old Islamic religion and gives her the knowledge of the true God of Israel. God is doing two things at once. We have too many other scriptures here, so you will just have to read the rest of it. It tells about a highway. Keep in mind, the highway here is a literal highway. That is why I read from the Jerusalem Post, it has been approximately two and one half months now, Israel has sent to Egypt, maps of the Sinai. While they owned all the Sinai all the way to the Red Sea, before they gave up some of it. They explored, scientists and archaeologists, they discovered where certain deposits of mineral rights are. We will say potash and all that kind of things. She sent that to Egypt. Why? Because between the two countries, there is already plans for Egypt to bring a gas line into Israel, hooking up the gas lines, as well as electric lines. Then the future is, that there be a giant highway, like a super highway, like an interstate, all the way from Egypt to Israel. In the Jerusalem Post, it states that there is also plans for Syria. Even though Syria is a hostile nation against the Jewish state, yet on the other hand, monetary wise, and political wise, they are negotiating the process of building a super highway from Damascus into northern Israel. Think of it saints: even before there is a Millennium. Yet it tells you in the Bible that there will be a highway out of Egypt into Israel, and a highway into Syria that links these three nations together. You can read in the rest of this how God looks upon it.

JEWS IN BABYLON SINGING SONGS

Let us go to Babylon for a look at what the Jews have endured. We will take a look at the 137th Psalm. This picture becomes a beautiful thing. What is this 137th Psalm? It is a psalm of the Jews that have been taken from Judah by the last forces of King Nebuchadnezzar. They have been taken to Babylon. Most of them have been put in the fields to work as slaves. But the inspiration fell upon someone; and here is the results. “By the rivers of Babylon, there we sat down, yea, we wept, when we remembered Zion.” This psalm was not written 1000 B.C. This was not David’s psalm. This was written by someone sitting along the rivers of Babylon, someone that remembered when they were carried away. He picked up as the anointing struck him, there by the rivers of Babylon, the Euphrates. “We hanged our harps upon the willows in the midst thereof. (Listen to this.) For there they that carried us away captive required of us a song; and they that wasted us required of us mirth, saying, Sing us one of the songs of Zion.” Stick around. I believe Israel is going to sing one of those songs one of these days, and jump up and down and rejoice, because they will not be seeing Pharaoh at the Red Sea: They will be seeing the hand of their God performing the miraculous. “How shall we sing the Lord’s song in a strange land? If I forget thee, O Jerusalem, let my right hand forger her cunning. If I do not remember thee, let my tongue cleave to the roof of my mouth; if I prefer not Jerusalem above my chief joy. (Now listen to this next verse.) Remember, O Lord, the children of Edom in the day of Jerusalem; who said, Rase it! Rase it! even to the foundation thereof.” Whoever these Jews were, especially the one inspired under the anointing to come forth with this prophetic song, I believe in his mind he could remember how that bunch of Edomites would stand on the opposite hills watching the siege, jumping up and down, laughing, just waiting until it was all over so they could move in: Sort of like you see sometimes in these nature films, a lion will go out and kill a wild beast, and the hyenas are looking around. They want to get a bite of that carcass, but the lions are at the table. When the lions have finished, their tummies are full, they lick their chops and begin one by one to move away, they leave a carcass. Now the hyenas can come in. Other beasts will come in. That is exactly what the Edomites were doing. They stood on the opposite hills watching the siege, jumping up and down with great joy: It won’t be long until this land will be ours. They have been living there for two thousand years: getting more all the time. However while they have been living there, God would not let them till the land to very much advantage. When they till it, it does not grow much. On the other hand, when the Jews tills it, it grows bumper crops: because God said of old, when He would scatter the Jews, Then my land will rest. When it rested, it looked desolate. Just picture these Jews sitting there, slaves, servants in Babylon, being taunted: Sing us a song, entertain us. Well we are living in the 20th century. Let the world say that in 1998, or 1999: They are liable to get a song they do not want to listen to. It might be a song a lot greater than when Miriam led the daughters of Israel along the banks of the Red Sea, jumping up and down for joy, beating the tambourines and singing of how their God had destroyed the mighty in the waters, took away his wheels, took away his chariots and destroyed his horsemen. It is all in the Psalms. We do not know what psalms the Jews are likely to come out with when this miraculous hour begins to fall upon the world. Notice that verse says, Remember, O Lord, the children of Edom in the day of Jerusalem. That means when Jerusalem is to be restored and brought back from the many centuries of its desolate, run down, stinking state. God said, now is the time for her walls to be built. That is why Micah says in the days that thy walls are to be built, then will I do thus and so. To do that, we can say this, This is scriptural proof that of all these Arabs originally came out of Saudi Arabia, in the area of Midan, the area where Mohammad the prophet rose up in 627 A.D., and came on with his revelation, and by the time we come to the 10th and 11th century, Mohammad’s teaching had been spread through all this part of the world, even over into Africa, across the Mediterranean, into Greece, as we enter the era called the Crusades. That is why the European Crusaders went to the Middle East, to try to take the Bible land away from the Moslems. But in this we see, they sang of the prophecy, Remember the children of Edom. You are going to be spectators and watch the show. As I said, we stood here when that six day war was in progress; and Bro. Mayfield brought a radio and set it right over there so we could all hear what was being broadcast. When that six day war was going on, every few minutes a program was interrupted, bringing you the latest news from the Middle East. Word has just come through, Israel has taken another strategic point, on and on and on. On that sixth day the word came through, it is all over. The Jewish soldiers are standing at the Red Sea jumping up and down. Hallelujah! Looking at the Egyptians as they were going back to Cairo. Soldiers were at the western wall, jumping up and down, never again will this be like this. Down came the Jordanian flag and up went the Star of David, the first time it had been able to fly full mast without having to stand there with another one of different nations above it. That fulfilled the words of Jesus you read about in Luke, and Jerusalem shall be trodden down of the Gentiles until the time of the Gentiles be fulfilled. In June 1967 it was fulfilled. Yet there is certain aspects of it that have not been fulfilled yet. That is this, it is not yet been rebuilt. The Jews for some reason or other knew that if they tried to do anything while the Mosque of Omar is still standing there they would have the whole world coming down on them: You can’t do that: That is a holy place. Well the hour is fast approaching when that thing will be torn down; and when it is, however it comes about, just know for sure that the Arabs will never get a chance to rebuild it. The Jewish temple will soon stand where that first temple stood. However quick that is, I have to say, Whether it is because the Israeli leaders have a complete revolutionary bust up in their society, their government goes all to pieces, which necessitates another election, this situation going on there right now could actually bring the Israeli government to chaos. Something will have to happen, to get the Jewish leaders moving in the right direction because these prophecies cannot fail. If eventually there are more Jews that are anti peace, the way the leaders have went at it, In other words going anti prophecy, God could have allowed that to stir up the fervor of the zealous Jews who are ready to die, to see that not one inch of ground is sacrificed. It may take that; but if that is what it does take, rest assured it is God’s hand guiding the diplomatic process or procedure. The outcome is, God will see to it that the right kind of leaders go into office; and it will pick up, and in that day then, and it has never been yet, the governors of Judah shall be a terror to them round about. It means this whole entire Middle East world is suddenly going to become frightened. They cannot help but become frightened. Bro. Jackson, I don’t believe that. Stick around then: You will not have to wait very long to find out for sure. Do not forget, when you read in Numbers that Joshua sent the three spies over to spy out that city of Jericho, they slipped in during the daylight hours and somehow or other they ended up at Rahab the harlot’s house. They started asking her questions. Would you tell us, could you describe to us how did you people feel here in Jericho when you heard about our fathers and our people when we crossed the Red Sea several years ago? I can hear Rahab say to those men, Oh, there was nothing like it. When that news reached us, there was a bunch of camel traders from Ethiopia came passing through here. They stopped here and stayed for a week. They told us there was a bunch of people on the way. They do not plant gardens, they said. They left Egypt. They have quail to eat at night, and they have manna to eat at morning. The God of that bunch of people destroyed the whole Egyptian army. Saints, I am just trying to dramatize the setting of that event. They got this information somehow. You know they did not have ABC, CBS and NBC back then. All they had was caravans of camel traders who carried the news. Who else was interested in this episode? Who was even concerned about it? Anyhow she said, Our heart’s did melt within us. Listen to me brothers and sisters, When the fear of God comes upon a people and their hearts melt, they begin to shake and sweat. The world is going to get another opportunity to go through that same kind of feeling before very much longer. That is why it says in Micah, (5:15) “And I will execute vengeance in anger and fury upon the heathen, such as they have not heard.” However the word heathen, is not pointing to that bush man of Africa coming out of an adobe mud hut. No saints, Look at this bunch of educated big shots that can put spacecraft on the moon, if you want to see modern day heathen the way God sees them. Watch him come out of his subway tunnels. He is trying to find as deep a hole as he can to get away from the hand of God. He is scared. I have to say, God is going to laugh at this modern bunch of Americans, who have been given an opportunity by God to exemplify Him in centuries past, (and there were those that did respect and honor Him) but have now turned to science for their answers, instead of looking in the Bible. At one time we were a nation that did honor God. It did not matter whether we had muzzle loading rifles, obsolete swords, or what, as long as our people were praying people they were God fearing people, and were people that respected God’s moral laws, they may not have known as much as people know now; but at least they put the Creator first in everything and He blessed their endeavors. It affected societies to the extent that for centuries our nation was preserved. God lifted us from muzzle loading rifles, to become a nation that invented some of the most sophisticated kill power the world has ever heard of. When I think of those helicopters that were used in the Gulf War, I have to stand in awe at what God has allowed mankind to achieve in this generation. They could locate those enemy forces no matter how they tried to hide themselves. I remember this one helicopter crew had spotted a bunker that four hundred and some odd men were in; and they dropped some pamphlets down to them, saying, Come out and surrender and we will not hurt you; but if you do not come out we will blow you to pieces, something like that. It was just a hunk of iron hanging out there in the air; but it had a rocket hanging under it that was capable of doing exactly that; and a guiding system that was capable of sending that thing right through their front door. I tell you, If God watched over our efforts then, to see that our mechanisms worked like they were expected to, then what do you expect Him to do when Israel has some of those same things, and they have modified them to make them even more suitable for desert warfare? God will magnify all of their efforts ten times over. No wonder Numbers said He shall do valiantly. Where? In the desert, in warfare. But when that time comes they will have politicians in the Knesset that will not hesitate to give the military men the go ahead, saying, It is your war: fight it; and may God bless you. Bro. Jackson, you make it sound ferocious. It is! Just stick around awhile and you will see first hand. This Bible is going to talk to you. There are things coming out of this book that is going to make religious leaders swallow their Adam’s apple, so to speak; because they have reduced God to a level where in their mind’s they can only see Him as a loving God that will not hurt anyone. Well I have news for such people: He is still a God of wrath: when it comes to protecting His chosen people from their oppressors. That is why I have said, Just the fact that you may know Hebrew and Greek, does not necessarily teach you anything: unless that happens to be your dialect. No matter what dialect you speak, if you do not allow the Spirit of God to speak to you out of His book your worldly knowledge is vain. In the end, it is only the purpose of God that will be important. Every other thing will be burned up.

THREE TRIBES FACE THE SAME FATE

Let us go to Jeremiah 48, for our next reading. In Ezekiel 35, that prophet spoke of the judgment of Mt. Seir, which we know is the Edomites; but here in this prophecy by Jeremiah, which was given at the time of the siege, Jeremiah could see what all these Arab tribes across the river had done; and how they looked upon the situation. Jeremiah could see how the Edomites, the Moabites and the Ammonites were conducting themselves. Therefore he put all three of these Arab tribes in the same lineup. Start in the 46th verse of the 48th chapter. “Woe be unto thee, O Moab! the people of Chemosh perisheth: for thy sons are taken captives, and thy daughters captives. Yet will I bring again the captivity of Moab in the latter days, saith the Lord. Thus far is the judgment of Moab.” That goes right along with Numbers 24 and all these others we have read. In the 49th chapter we cross over to the Ammonites, so notice what it says. “Concerning the Ammonites, thus saith the Lord; Hath Israel no sons? hath he no heir? why then doth their king inherit Gad, (Hallelujah! That is a territory right over here where the tribe of Gad existed. It is on this side of the river.) and his people dwell in his cities? Therefore, behold, the days come, saith the Lord, that I will cause an alarm of war to be heard in Rabbah of the Ammonites; and it shall be a desolate heap, and her daughters shall be burned with fire: then shall Israel be heir unto them that were his heirs, saith the Lord.” I could go on and read it all; but you can read the rest of it later, and you should; but now we want to go to what is written about Edom, starting in verse 7. “Concerning Edom, thus saith the Lord of hosts; Is wisdom no more in Teman? is counsel perished from the prudent? is their wisdom vanished? Flee ye, turn back, dwell deep, O inhabitants of Dedan; for I will bring the calamity of Esau upon him, the time that I will visit him. If grapegatherers come to thee, would they not leave some gleaning grapes? if thieves by night, they will destroy till they have enough. But I have made Esau bare, I have uncovered his secret places, and he shall not be able to hide himself: his seed is spoiled, and his brethren, and his neighbours, and he is not.” What does that all add up to? God has a dislike for this bunch of Arabs, no matter what the world at large may say about it. That is why it is their descendants from this side that live over here today that is creating all the trouble, causing all the fussing and squabbling. The rest of the world is saying to the Jews, But you have to live peaceably with the Arabs: they were here first: It is really their land. You have to be willing to share it with them. It is not their land! They were not there first! God (that owns everything) gave all of that land to Abraham and his descendants that would come through Isaac, the promised seed; and those Arabs are trespassers in the sight of God. When the time comes for Israel to once again have it all, God will have no mercy on anyone who resists them. They are not going to share it with the Arabs after that. God is just being merciful to the world right now: He has let the world have their say so. That is why when we go to Zechariah 12, and read of what it will be like when the miraculous is in effect, God says, In that day I will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling. Meaning the time has come, Jerusalem is going to become a focal point. Oh yes. We are going to decide who lives in it, who inhabits it, who is going to control it and whose city it is. As we have pointed out, right now three fourths of its inhabitants are Arabs. They are wanting all the Jews to get out and leave it to them: They have already said so. No sooner did they sign that thing last fall and Arafat’s lieutenant said, The Jews may not know it; but they are going to get out of Jerusalem. When I read that, I said, So you say: But God has said something different about that, and I will take His word for it. In that day I will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling. A cup of trembling to who? To them round about: Those who have terrorized the Jews for the last forty some years. In other words, You bunch of Arabs, come on: Come on and get crazy, get blood thirsty. Get yourself worked up just like they did in Mt. Carmel, when Elijah said, Go ahead and call upon your god first. I give you the first opportunity. In other words, you draw first. Go on, draw. They cut their hands, they slashed themselves, they drank and screamed and cried until almost sunset. In my opinion, they were already hoarse. Not one thing had happened. Finally Elijah said, Fill four barrels with water and pour it upon the sacrifice. Then he had them do it twice more, until everything on and around the altar was soaking wet: Then he called upon the great God that had led him this far; and fire came down and consumed everything on the altar, even the stones. Elijah did not have to slash his wrists nor jump up and down on the altar: He just simply uttered a few words of prayer to the God that was able to hear such a prayer and the rest was soon to be history. I have to tell you, God will always give the opposition an opportunity to do whatever is in their heart’s to do: Then He does whatever it takes to move His plan and purpose forward. Let us again notice the 12th chapter of Zechariah, concerning another category of people. Verse 2, which we just spoke of, declares that God will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling unto all the people round about; but let us read a couple more verses with that verse and get the whole picture. (2) “Behold, I will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling unto all the people round about, when they shall be in the siege both against Judah and against Jerusalem. (3) And in that day will I make Jerusalem a burdensome stone for all people: all that burden themselves with it shall be cut in pieces, though all the people of the earth be gathered together against it. (4) In that day, saith the Lord, I will smite every horse with astonishment, and his rider with madness: and I will open mine eyes upon the house of Judah, and will smite every horse of the people with blindness.” That covers all those who become involved with the affairs of Israel through a process on the diplomatic table. That is the U.N. When the U.N. starts sticking their nose in, to try to help out this bunch of Arabs over here, to get their problems solved, then there is going to be trouble. I sometimes like to say, There is going to be trouble in the chicken house. I can actually say it in a humorous way, because it is so much like Elijah, up there on Mt. Carmel saying, Go on, scream a little louder: Maybe your god has gone to sleep, or maybe he is on a journey somewhere. When the hour has come, God begins to talk to western leaders, Come on, come on, what do you say we ought to do with Jerusalem? Come on, make a suggestion. God said, though the whole world, though all the nations of the earth be gathered together against it, that is not all the world’s armies looking at her: It is all the world’s diplomatic secretaries and heads of state sending their peace envoys over there, trying to solve the Middle East problem. God says, Come on, what do you say Britain, come on France, the Netherlands, Germany, come on, cast your lot, cast your vote. Then God said, Though all the nations of the earth be gathered together against Jerusalem, I will break them to pieces. If any of you can remember how it was back there in the 1967 war Israel fought with the Arabs, it will give you a little insight on how it will be again very soon. That was twenty some years ago; and I realize some of you young folks were not even born then; but you can still go dig out some of the old Newspapers, or other records of history and read about it. Anyhow your hour is coming. You will see first hand, how God causes Israel to excel and do valiantly in battle. I pray that we will all have our eyes open and our ears unstopped. When God brings Israel into that interval of time, I believe from the time that verse sets in motion wherein the miraculous begins to be displayed, until that week of Daniel goes into effect, time is not going to be very long. I believe the little bride of Jesus Christ is also going to be dealt with by the Spirit of God from the standpoint of the miraculous. It is the way the Spirit of God is taking the people, putting them together, dressing them up and getting them ready to leave this world, that makes it even more evident that the time is short. It will not take very long time wise, for the fulfillment of these prophecies we have been looking at; and when they are fulfilled, that will not leave much to be fulfilled before Jesus comes for His bride Church. We cannot shorten the time for the total fulfillment of Ezekiel 38 and 39; but even still, seven years is not very long. I would say we are looking at a scope of time of not more than about ten years. People jump to all kinds of conclusions when you speak of a time factor for something like this; but saints, there is no reason for alarm: just as long as we do not try to pin it down to a day and hour and go contrary to the written word of God. We are simply looking at what God Himself has given us to look at. What we are looking at, to me, is absolutely a Biblical yardstick of measurement of time, that God, through His grace, has gave to us as human individuals to look at, and be guided by. If we cannot understand what the Bible says concerning the closing out of the time we are living in, and how to look at a generation, and a season of time in relationship to certain prophecies that are dropping in place, then it would not do us one bit of good to expect God to speak to us in a prophetical manner by the thunders. If we cannot understand that which is written, how would we understand something that is not yet written? May God be praised! He is the time keeper.

WE CAN ONLY SEE WHAT GOD SHOWS US

In the light of what has happened in the Middle East, especially the signing of this peace agreement with the PLO, a lot of people are made to believe this will affect prophecy of the scriptures: In other words hinder God. No saints. Nothing is going to hinder God: He has a time frame for everything that has been written in prophecy large and small. I personally, have not felt that any of this delays anything God has purposed to do. He just allows mankind to have an opportunity to try to work out some things their way, so that when their efforts fail, they have no justifiable reason to blame Him. Prophecy is not jeopardized: You can count on that. From one standpoint it sort of looked like it would be; but from another standpoint we have to realize God has it all in His hand and He knows what He is doing. Let us go back and once again read our main text for this message. Micah 7:11-17, is what we started with. To me, the hour we are living in stands out so vividly, because it lets us know there is a point in time when God becomes concerned about a specific thing; and that is the old city of Jerusalem and the temple. It starts in the 11th verse like this, “In the day that thy walls are to be built, (meaning Jerusalem and the temple) in that day shall the decree be far removed. (Meaning what God has spoken in ancient times concerning the Jews, how He would scatter them to the ends of the world, but in the last days He would gather them back, but now as He is bringing them back, there has to be a point in time where their chastisement and His dealing with them in severity definitely comes to an end. He then starts dealing with them in a blessing fashion.) (12) In that day also he shall come even to thee from Assyria, and from the fortified cities, and from the fortress even to the river, and from sea to sea, and from mountain to mountain. (Meaning every Jew that God has His eye on, no matter where they are, nor how remote and isolated the places may be, God has their name, and their number; and He knows exactly when and how to bring them home.) (13) Notwithstanding the land shall be desolate because of them that dwell therein, for the fruit of their doings. (This verse lets us know that God is speaking in behalf of the Arab people: how they have treated the land.) (14) Feed thy people with thy rod, the flock of thine heritage, which dwell solitarily in the wood, in the midst of Carmel: let them feed in Bashan and Gilead, as in the days of old. (15) According to the days of thy coming out of the land of Egypt (God is giving us a background, showing us that He intends to do something in a specific manner.) will I shew unto him marvelous things. (16) The nations (That is us.) shall see and be confounded at all their might: they shall lay their hand upon their mouth, their ears shall be deaf. (17) They shall lick the dust like a serpent, they shall move out of their holes like worms of the earth: they shall be afraid of the Lord our God, and shall fear because of thee.” Saints, that is a promise, it is a prophecy, and it cannot fail. As we look at that promise, then we can ask ourselves this question, In the light of what we are going to read, are we really close to this hour? As we preached this same message, giving it another title, Looking Through Windows of Prophecy, to the end, we realize from the year 1939 when WW2 was set in motion, that began the dealings of God with a people in Europe to the eventual purpose of bringing them back into the land. Many years have come and gone since then; but when we reach here, we have to realize, from here on is the era of the miraculous; and it will remain so right on into the week of Daniel. Once the miraculous starts, everything will move right along until the whole picture is complete. There will be no more long intervals in between events like it has been in the past. God has reserved this until the end because right here, is where He begins to reveal His power, to the intent that there are certain things in the world of human society that God wants to accomplish in peoples personal attitude’s as to how they look at God. When we live in an hour of atheism, with professors of all kinds of high tech ideas, and high minded scientists, whose minds are locked up in scientific findings and all that kind of things, you would have to think the world has completely forgotten about God: lost all contact with Him altogether. Yet God has a way of getting attention. I read in the Jerusalem Post, that Prime Minister Yitzhak Rabin has vehemently denounced a call by Jewish rabbis, (Three national rabbis, have announced to all IDF soldiers, meaning Israeli Defense Forces, that they should not take any active part in seeking to oust any Jew from the settlements in any of these negotiated areas. He is the guy that promoted this peace plan; So he has denounced a call by these rabbis for IDF soldiers to disobey any orders given them to evacuate Jewish settlers from Hebron, or elsewhere, terming it political incitement. These three leading rabbis from the national religious camp reiterated a ruling issued last year instructing soldiers on how to act if they received orders to evacuate Jewish settlers. You must refuse it like you would refuse an order to eat pork. There is a lot more to it. This whole thing will definitely all hinge around Jerusalem. That is the spot all of this points to. I also have a Jewish paper evidently printed in the Louisville area. This is about the Jerusalem problem. The U.N. has endorsed another resolution, and in this article, the Jewish organizations from the world over are condemning the United States for even standing in the U.N. and allowing this thing to go through. The mayor of Jerusalem, members of congress and nearly every major American Jewish organization have weighed in with immediate criticism of U.N. Security Council resolution 280. Jerusalem’s mayor sent a letter to President Clinton expressing shock and disappointment that the U.S. government did not veto the U.N. resolution. The letter which was released on Sunday stated, This resolution which is intended to entice the PLO back to the negotiating table, will in fact create serious obstacles in the peace process by raising false and unrealistic expectations on the part of the Palestinians regarding the future of Jerusalem. The people of Israel will refuse to support any move that raises doubts as to the status of Jerusalem, as the united capital of the state of Israel. It goes on and, there is a lengthy article concerning the whole thing. There are many more different leaders speaking out against this. In here it says, When you try to move the Jewish settlements, then the Jews will be coming off the walls at you, from every angle. Reading that, makes you feel like we could be getting close to something. Keep in mind, it is not just keeping the Gaza Strip, it is not just keeping the Jericho area. That is not the final point. That is just a beginning thing the PLO’s are trying to use, because they feel like if they get Israel to consent to that, then they have a right to demand that the Jews also get out of Jerusalem. Why? Because Jerusalem is the focal point. These other areas are just stepping stones to what the PLO’s are really after. In other words they know, If Israel would not give up Jericho and Gaza, they would certainly not give up Jerusalem; but if they can put the pressure on and create enough disturbance to get the leaders of Israel to negotiate, and agree to this first proposal, that will give them an opportunity to put the pressure on for other compromises also. That is why I have to believe, that when this thing has all come to its final determination the Jews will be keeping these areas also. In the light of what we are using for our text, we have to come to the conclusion that all of this is just setting the stage for greater things yet to come. Remember, God has said, According to the days of thy coming out of Egypt, Thus and so. Meaning what? Well for one thing, It points to former days of the miraculous power of God working on behalf of fulfilling His promise to Abraham. It was days of disappointments, trials, severe pressure and tests and all such like; but through each one of these episodes there was the miraculous. The miraculous was the means by how Israel was brought another step forward in their journey toward the land of promise. In this likewise, since we are living in the last days, and the whole world is watching this scene, God has it all programmed to attract maximum attention from the world at large. God has watched how the world has gone in the past number of years while He has been slowly restoring a little element of people back to one of the smallest spots on earth, a place no larger than the state of Vermont. In the eyes of the world that is just a small speck; but when we look into the scriptures and see how God has promised that the twelve tribes of Israel would all be brought back and inhabit the land according to their former estates, it becomes very large in the eyes of those who believe God will fulfill all that He has promised. It excites me: because I know what will soon follow all of that; and that is what I am waiting for: the chance to be with Jesus. Therefore let us look at this, realizing that we are moving toward the consummation of this present age. We know the world, as the end approaches, will initiate a time we refer to as the seventieth week of Daniel. In that week, the last half of it which is 3 1/2 years, there will be a time of trouble such as the world has never known before, called “the great tribulation. It is going to be a time of trouble such as the world has never had before and never will have again after it. We also believe that as we are approaching that period of time spoken of in Hosea 6:2, that says, After two days He will revive us, and we have to believe that these two days, which are two thousand years, are also running parallel to calendar time and will come together somewhere around 2000 A.D., which is just ahead of us. According to our best calculations, Hosea 6:2 runs out just about four and one half years beyond the year 2000. That is why I said, We are looking at a span of time of about ten years, or maybe twelve years if we want to stretch it: to a drastic change from what we have known in the past. Why do you say that Bro. Jackson? Because even though I am persuaded that God means for the bride Church to know the season for this change, I am never going to be guilty of trying to pin it down to an exact time: Not even any certain month. I know we have people in this world that will say, Well if you can get within a month Bro. Jackson, surely we ought to be able to get within a week. Listen to what I am saying, Why should we even try? I am just thankful to be allowed to see that we are living in a season that according to the scriptures, lets me know Jesus is soon coming. We are living in a generation that Jesus said would see the end of all these prophecies we have been looking at. There is no guess work about, if we believe this Bible is truly the inspired word of God. Through the past number of years there has been so many people set dates and times for certain events, and none of them have been vindicated; and the people who set those dates are still here and do not even make any attempt to apologize for misleading other souls. I have observed that there are very few people alive today, that can keep their head’s balanced when they are looking at anything in the way of prophecy of the scriptures. If we cannot be content just to be allowed to see that we are living in a generation, (and in the season Jesus spoke of) which would not pass away until all those things they were looking at would be fulfilled, what is it going to take to comfort us? What else would God have to do? I am thankful to God, just to be allowed to see what we do see. I know that as we get closer to the end, you are going to hear some of the most crazy calculations put together that human mind’s are capable of; and I do not want to be part of any such foolishness. I do want to be part of a generation and people that realize they are living in the season of the coming of the Lord. If we are approaching that, and I truly believe we are because all signs are pointing to the fact that God is looking toward Jerusalem, we need to get serious about our preparation to meet the Lord. He knows what is going on in the Gaza Strip. He knows exactly what is going on in the Jericho area: But I believe the focal point is Jerusalem. I cannot ignore the fact that the Bible says those Arabs are to be far removed from there. But if they are to be far removed, then there has to be a reason for them to be removed. The Jewish people are not to feel condemnation and guilt on their part, when they drive those troublemakers from their presence; so to me, that says those Arabs are going to do something that necessitates such an action. At least God has, in mercy and grace, allowed world leaders to throw in their carnal application; but all of that will wind up as nothing before it is all concluded. At least God is not guilty of failing to give them a chance. God can say, I gave you an opportunity and what did you do with it? You ruined it every time: because of your selfish, carnal ways. Not everyone will see this situation the way we are presenting it; but I believe the Bible vindicates every bit of it. The God we serve is a righteous God; and He has been long suffering all these many centuries in allowing unrighteous mankind an opportunity to enter into His plan of redemption and restoration; but there eventually has to be an end to what He allows His enemies to do in resisting His ultimate goal; and I truly believe we are fast approaching that time. He already knows the name of every individual that will ever believe and surrender up to His perfect plan of righteousness; so He is not going to cut it off prematurely; but neither will he be one day late: He has it worked out to perfection.

SOME JUDAEAN JEWS YET TO COME HOME

Let us go back to the 49th chapter of Isaiah. I know there are some who are more interested in some particular ball team than they are in what is happening in the Middle East; but I am more interested in what is going on in the Middle East; because that is what the Bible gives us to measure time by. I could not care less about these basketball players and how many games they win. When God spoke here concerning the rebuilding of Jerusalem, it goes with the 60th chapter. That is why we have to look at them together: They go hand in hand. Once the era of the miraculous is set in motion, then the ultimate aim is, Jerusalem is to be rebuilt and become inhabited by Judaean Jews. There is no doubt that there is still another element of Judaean Jews scattered out here in the world that are yet to be brought in. It is going to take the miraculous to cause the heart of those Jews to become spiritually drawn to the fact that they belong back there in the land of their forefathers. They are definitely Jews that are of the kindred line of King David. Why that, Bro. Jackson? All because back in ancient times when King David took the city of the Jebusites, it was not a large city. In the eyes of the world today, we would call it a village. However it became known for a long time as King David’s city. He built a palace there. It was the area God showed him, and the area where the first temple was built by his son, Solomon. It was mainly people of his own lineage, of his family heritage, that settled in and around there. So as we read this prophecy, let us keep in mind the fact that we are living in 1994. We could be a year away, two years away, or even three years away from the starting of this process of the miraculous; but I have to say, Once all these prophecies that we have been dwelling on, looking at the miraculous, start falling into place, it will not take a long time to wrap up the whole thing. I have them all set down here together so you can look at them again later. There are eight prophecies in this group, speaking of what Israel must do to the land of Jordan and so forth. Here they are. Numbers 24, Zephaniah 2:8-11, Isaiah 11:12-14, Jeremiah 48 & 49, Obadiah 1:10, Amos 9:11-12, Isaiah 19, and Zechariah 12. All these prophecies are speaking of what God is going to let Israel do to the Edomites, the Moabites and the Ammonites in the last days. That is in this area right here. (pointing to chart) That land definitely belongs to Israel. In ancient times there never was a country called Jordan. There were certain tribes, Reuben, Gad, Benjamin, and those that lived over there. There was the Edomites in the south, the Moabites right next to them, then the Ammonites up along here. The rest of it was the children of Israel. It has to return to that same structural division. That is why in Isaiah it says, “And the Ammonites will serve Israel.” There is no doubt once God turns Israel loose to sweep across this land to fulfill all these prophecies, (This is not eight applications. It is eight prophecies all stacked on top of each other, of what God through Israel will do to these people in the last days, that sets in motion the era of the miraculous.) it is more than just the fact that God wants to show the world how Israel can fight a war. It is how God display His power in it all, that gets the attention of a lot of people in this world; because there is something in the heart’s of a lot of those people that God wants to use. Also let me say this, No doubt when Israel does this, she will know that she will definitely have to deal with that country of Iraq also; because when God led Abraham into this land, He took him up on a high mountain to view the land He was giving him. He said He would let him have all the land from the great river, (which meant the Euphrates) right through here to the great river of Egypt; and to the great sea and as far as his eyes could see to the east. With that before her, Israel has an objective; but right now the world, in all its political, organized status, causes this to look like it is totally blocked. Yet I say, What better hour in time could the unbelieving man of the world live, than an hour like this? We have science on our side, they say. We have the military on our side. We have the high tech means of choking the life out of Israel any time she gets too hard to deal with. That is just what they think: That is not the way it is going to be. When the whole world begins to think like that, What better hour could God choose to say to them, Come here, I want to teach you something. Always remember, when He led the children of Israel out of Egypt, He did not take them the old caravan route along the coast. He took them right straight across the desert to the Red Sea, an unknown way. There He did the miraculous. Just remember, with that hour approaching, when God will again lead Israel in that way, we would have to know we are living in that transition period, as we watch the hand of God, through politicians, create confusion and disarray, getting the stage set for the big show. The Arabs are against the Jews, no matter what some may hope for. The Jews are against the Arabs. Therefore as this thing explodes, there is no doubt we are going to hear of some terrible atrocities and all kinds of upheavals in social structures, and yes, even of many innocent people losing their lives in the transition of this thing. Something drastic has definitely got to take place there, to cause certain politicians to be projected to the forefront in Israel’s leadership. Isaiah 11, and Zechariah 12, are two prophecies that speak of how the leaders in Israel in the last days would be; and those in leadership at this present time do not fit the description. Isaiah 11, says Israel will be a terror to those round about. She has never yet fulfilled that. Then Zechariah 12 says the governors of Judaea will be like a torch in a pile of wood. When you begin to read those scriptures, you are made to realize that Israel does not presently have politicians that would fill the bill for that time. She has not had any such men in office for sometime now. Rabin and Peres stand ready to sell out, completely disregarding prophecies of the scriptures. Peace at any cost, seems to be their motto. Well it is not always going to stay like that. If there is going to be leaders of Israel in that day, that are going to put their trust completely in their God, it would take a great stretch of one’s imagination to visualize Rabin and Peres sitting in such a place. When you read Zechariah 12, it speaks like this, (5) “And the governors of Judah shall say in their heart, The inhabitants of Jerusalem shall be my strength in the Lord of hosts their God. (6) In that day will I make the governors of Judah like an hearth of fire among the wood, and like a torch of fire in a sheaf; and they shall devour all the people round about, on the right hand and on the left: and Jerusalem shall be inhabited again in her own place, even in Jerusalem.” That lets you see that the leaders of Israel in that hour realize that Jerusalem is to be rebuilt to prepare to receive their Messiah; and to prepare for the Millennium. (That is what we call it: they are looking for that kingdom age.) For that reason, they are going to put their trust in God, knowing full well that He will protect the inhabitants of Jerusalem in that day. He has His eye on Jerusalem. All these prophecies are zeroing their sights on a focal point. As we read here in Isaiah, the prophecy is how the anointing of God’s Spirit speaks on behalf of the land itself, Mt. Zion, where that ancient city is existing. I am going to start reading in the 11th verse of chapter 49. “And I will make all my mountains a way, and my highways shall be exalted.” That is symbolic language, which means this, When the hour has arrived that God is ready for the city to be rebuilt and inhabited by Jewish people, He is able to go into the nations where those people are, move upon them in a way to cause them to want to go home; and then cause them to find their way from where they are, back to Jerusalem. Highways in this sense, does not mean God is going to be building more super highways across the world just for that purpose. It is how His miraculous power breaks down political opposition and hindrances that have stood in the way through these many years, (like in Russia in the past) and cause them to be at liberty to return to the land of their father’s. We know how Russia has stood against this thing of Jews immigrating back to Israel. More than anything else, it was because of the Arabs putting pressure on them, saying, Do not let any more of them come back here; but when God knocked that wall down, there was nothing they could do about it. On the other hand, when we come to this future junction, God is dealing with a specific element of Jews that must be dealt with in a certain way, in order to fulfill a certain development. Notice verses 12 and 13. “Behold, these shall come from far: and, lo, these from the north and from the west; and these from the land of Sinim. (China) Sing, O heavens; and be joyful, O earth; and break forth into singing, O mountains: for the Lord hath comforted His people, and will have mercy upon His afflicted.” I have to believe the world has seen that. But now the prophecy sounds like the land itself, Mt. Zion, is beginning to doubt. Listen. “But Zion said, The Lord hath forsaken me, and my Lord hath forgotten me. (The Lord answers back.) Can a woman forget her sucking child, that she should not have compassion on the son of her womb? yea, they may forget, yet will I not forget thee.” So even the Jew today that would dare to read the prophecies of his prophet, and yet have doubt in their hearts as to the reality, how soon this might be, I believe the hour is approaching he is going to have to realize, and God is going to show the Jewish people that it is going to take this to open their eyes, their hearts, and to encourage them. I have not brought you back here just to make you a racial state and to set you up in business so you can make more dollars, and so you can till the land six days. Then in order to keep the Levitical law the land is supposed to rest the seventh, you rent it to an Arab so he can go ahead and till it through that year. That is what caused Israel to be thrown out of the land for a long time, and she still comes back with a lot of that same old carry over. Therefore we can see that there is a reason why God has to deal with the Jews in certain ways like that. God promises here, “Behold, I have graven thee upon the palms of my hands; (In this prophecy God is looking at old Jerusalem.) thy walls are continually before me.” It is true when we read in Ezekiel 38 and 39 about the time when Russia is to come into this prophetic fulfillment, she will come down to a land of unwalled villages, villages that no longer have bars nor gates: a time when God says, My people Israel dwells safely. That is true, but keep in mind this old ancient city of Jerusalem, there is going to be walls rebuilt because the city itself has to take on its ancient appearance. We might say this, God wants the world to know this has been His focal point for centuries. Here is where He unfolded His plan of redemption to the whole wide world. Here is where the King of kings and Lord of lords is going to sit during that thousand year reign. The walls around the old city in that hour of time are not for military protection; and they do not affect the accuracy of this prophecy in the least, if you know how to read it. Does the Bible not say, In that day thy walls shall be called salvation? It sets a compound type. In ancient types it was physical salvation they enjoyed when they could get inside those walls. They felt safe. That is what they were for; but in the future setting the walls take on a different meaning. They will no longer be used for military protection; but they do definitely stand as a type; and it is written of them, In that day thy walls shall be called salvation; and thy gates shall be called praise. Looking at the 17th verse, you see that the hour has arrived; God is looking at Jerusalem. The world right now is saying to the Jew, you must get out. As the Jews in the Gaza Strip settlements get out, the Jews in the Jericho settlements get out, the Jews in the Golan Heights settlements get out, then the Jews that have moved into the old sector of Jerusalem to set up their habitation are hearing, You have to get out too. No. No. To me, Jerusalem is a focal point. That is why God has saved it to deal with last; simply because, once the miraculous starts, it will not stop until the world has been ushered into that seventieth week of Daniel. “Thy children shall make haste; (That means the Jews of the heritage of David that are to be the ones that will become the occupants of this city in that hour of renewal, will make haste and come; but if they are to make haste, it is not because of pressure out there, but rather because of the miraculous they have been witnessing. A spirit of excitement will begin to move upon them and make them want to hurry back there to be partakers of the benefits.) thy destroyers (those that have lived there for centuries) and they that made thee waste shall go forth of thee. Lift up thine eyes round about, (The Lord says this to old Jerusalem as that hour approaches.) and behold: all these gather themselves together, and come to thee. As I live, saith the Lord, thou shalt surely (He is speaking to old Jerusalem) clothe thee with them all, (Jews) as with an ornament, and bind them on thee, as a bride doeth. For thy waste (Here is the second time He mentions it. and thy desolate places, and the land of thy destruction, shall even now be too narrow by reason of the inhabitants,) (That is the Arabs.) and they that swallowed thee up shall be far away.” That plainly tells us that as the Arab, the PLO, through this present peace process they have negotiated, have set a demand that all these Jews get out of this occupied territory. To think that Rabin has willingly sold the nation down the drain to retreat and compromise. You can see what a disappointment it is going to be, when the same people that are now demanding that the Jews give up and get out, are the ones themselves who are going to be hauled away, never again to return as residents. Whatever they wanted the Jew to suffer, that is what they themselves are going to suffer. That is what all these many prophecies add up to. As the Edomites and Moabites and all those stood on the other side and watched Jerusalem and the Jews in those sieges of Nebuchadnezzar, shouting, Tear down, take her to the foundation, God was watching; and it is just about pay back time. Then those Jews, years later in Babylon, as we read in the 137th Psalm, sang, We hung our harps on the willow trees; and those Babylonians taunted and teased them, saying, Come on Jews, sing us one of your songs of Zion. Make us feel happy. Their reply was, How could we sing the songs of Zion when we consider Jerusalem. O Lord, remember the children of Edom in the days of Jerusalem. You just have to put the picture together. There is no doubt God is allowing these Arabs to rise up with hostility, with world favoritism on their side, to set the agenda to really put the Jews under pressure; but then, as God opens that hour of the miraculous, this whole picture is going to take a complete change. Once this thing is in full swing, these words fit into the picture. (49:20) “The children which thou shalt have, after thou hast lost the other, (meaning those in ancient times) shall say again in thine ears, The place is too strait for me: give place to me that I may dwell.” As we read this, I want to remind you that in Zechariah 10, there is another prophecy about the second move. In Zechariah 10 God said He would visit the house of Judah first; and afterward He would bring Joseph or Ephraim. Together they would become a mighty man.

1994-05-When-Israel-Does-This-Part-2

When Israel Does This, Part 1 – 1994, April


Rev. Raymond M Jackson

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

OUR FOCAL SCRIPTURE FOR WHAT WE WANT TO DEAL WITH IS MICAH 7:11-17. I KNOW WE WILL BE GOING BACK TO SOME SCRIPTURES WE HAVE ALREADY USED IN THE WINDOWS OF PROPHECY MESSAGE; BUT I FEEL THE NEED TO DO SO; AND I ASK THE QUESTION, HOW MANY OF YOU REMEMBER THE SIX DAY WAR ISRAEL FOUGHT? THAT WAS THE FIRST MAJOR WAR SHE HAD FOUGHT THIS SIDE OF THEM BECOMING A NATION: WHEN THE UNITED NATIONS GRANTED HER THAT CERTAIN PORTION OF LAND. THAT WAS THE FIRST WAR SHE FOUGHT WHERE SHE WAS LITERALLY FACED WITH OUTNUMBERING FORCES FROM THE SYRIANS, THE JORDANIANS, AND THE EGYPTIANS. NASSER OF EGYPT HAD MADE HIS BOAST, WE WILL WIPE ISRAEL OFF THE MAP, WE WILL DRIVE HER INTO THE SEA. THERE WILL BE NO STATE OF ISRAEL ALLOWED IN THE MIDDLE EAST. HE HAD ALL THE ISLAMIC ARABS READY TO GO TO WAR WITH HIM. LITTLE DID HE REALIZE AT THAT TIME, THAT HE WAS GOING TO TAKE THE LICKING OF HIS LIFE; AND THEN A LITTLE LATER BE TAKEN OFF THE SCENE. THAT JUST SHOWS HOW THINGS CAN TURN AROUND IN A VERY SHORT TIME.

We are using the same chart we used on the windows message; but we have added the words on top, “WHEN ISRAEL DOES THIS;” because I want us to focus on some things that are about to take place very soon. We are looking at a generation that Jesus said would live to see the climax of all we have been talking about; therefore we have 1939 over here on our chart as the year to measure that generation from. Over here on the Christian side we can put 1933; because that is when God spoke to His messenger to this Laodicean Church Age. When we think of the scripture that Jesus spoke in Matthew 24, giving us all the signs of the endtime, leading up to just before His coming, He spoke of the fig tree, meaning the rebirth of Israel. He links the generation that sees these things with the end time and declared that this generation will not have passed away, meaning death will not have taken all of them off the face of this earth until all these things that He has mentioned, be fulfilled. Well if what Jesus mentioned in Matthew 24 is related to a generation of time, then how do we look upon these prophecies written in the Old Testament that are relative to the rebirth of that fig tree as a nation? Therefore I look at the two lines of thought and I have to connect them together. It is the only way we can look at ourselves in the time factor we now live. When the U.N. in 1948 did give their approval for Israel to become a state, or a nation, we have to realize all these scriptures we are reading about here are tied to that. Some of those scriptures are collective. What I mean by collective is they carry a total picture from beginning, straight to the end, in the Millennium. That is what I mean by a collective picture. It does not necessarily set a time factor. That is why we drew these windows like this on the chart. A window gives you a field that is limited. It is different than standing outside, and out of the corner of your eye you see this way. On the other hand, a window gives you a limited field. Well, as we see these various prophecies as they are related to each other we realize time has passed very slowly; and preachers have preached about it without knowing very much about the collective picture. We realize of course, that something happened in 1967 that started a progression of events that are all scripturally tied together. Judah had been brought back. That is the tribe that God had been dealing with. They were the tribe that suffered so much in the holocaust. The purpose was to bring them back, to get them ready, because they were going to be the beginning of this total process of the rebirth of this nation, and the reconstruction of everything. When they fought the war in 1967, Zephaniah 2:3-7 covers that war precisely. That was a prophecy that speaks of the Gaza Strip, which Israel took. Once she took it, that gave them this land of the Philistines for the first time in history, the land that they had never been able to conquer in the ancient B.C. time during the kings. That is the area where you hear about so much disturbance today, the little strip of land called the Gaza Strip. Thousands of the Palestinian Arabs live there. At the same time, Israel took the old area of what they call the West Bank, meaning they pushed the borders of Judah to the Jordan River, which legally, scripturally, and geographically belongs to her. They call it Jericho, or the Jericho territory. A lot of people do not think seriously about why they call it the Jericho territory. To me this was typed when Joshua, with the children of Israel, did cross the Red Sea and later came on into this area. As you read about it under Joshua’s leadership, God told the children of Israel they should go around that city one time each day for six days; but on the seventh day they should go seven times around and at the end of it, they were to turn and look straight at the city and shout with a shout, and God would destroy it by His miraculous power. Let us ask ourselves the question, To what purpose was that done? What miraculous power was in that? To me, that was God’s way of setting a type that after centuries of time Israel would again be faced with an ultimatum of what they would have to do in relationship to that same stretch of land. Arafat was going to move his headquarters to Jericho. Jericho is not a big city. It is not any larger than Sellersburg Indiana. In fact the ancient city that fell was of old adobe brick, just a mound of clay now. You have to dig down many feet, before you begin to find the enormous buildings of adobe brick that were there in the days of Joshua. The city of Jericho today, is out in the foothills of this. When we look at all these things that were set in type, it is very obvious now as Israel is faced with an issue, or an ultimatum about the Gaza strip and Jericho that this brings time, and prophecy to the very end of this age: when all these loose ends will be tied together. Let us look at it in this light, If we are not close to the fulfilling of what these prophecies are about, then it means that all of this which I have used is inapplicable at this time and I have used it out of season. Nevertheless I have to realize this, Hosea 6:2, which covers this, says, After two days He will revive us. That was a promise spoken by Hosea even before Daniel had spoken about the seventy weeks of Daniel. The reason I look at this like I do, when God sets a time factor that covers a framework of time, God’s time is precise. God knows, that man in his keeping of records is subject to error; but God Himself is not subject to error. If the prophecy was, “After two days He will revive us,” then we have to read it like that: It does not mean six years later, or maybe six years beforehand. This old Gentile philosophy of give a little, or take a little is one thing; but you do not deal with God like that. In these things, we have to be just as precise as He is, or we miss the boat. Therefore we have to realize, as I pointed out in counting the scriptures earlier, we have already seen eight of these prophecies go into effect: starting with the war of 1967. Well that brings us to this point in time: where these other prophecies will start being fulfilled: to bring all of this to a completed picture. I know the big question now is, because of Middle East developements lately, Well just how close are we to the end? Just how soon will these scriptures be fulfilled? That is where we are right now: at the point of trying to answer this very question. Let me give you a little view of something that just came into my hands; and you will see more clearly what we are facing in this hour of time.

A LOOK AT FOUR-FIVE HUNDRED YEAR PERIODS OF TIME

Naturally we are not endeavoring to pin the coming of the Lord down to an exact day and hour; but after I read this book that came to me, this book of economics, the writer broke the time factor down like this, and I am going to repeat some things I have found to be very interesting. The first five hundred years began with the birth of Christ. The Roman Empire was at its peak. Five hundred years later the Roman Empire had crumbled and fell. In what way had it crumbled and fell? When you read the history, and also the articles we have printed, the fall of Rome from the old imperial position over the vast territory of Europe was to give way to the rise of Catholicism. This man places 500 A.D. as the beginning of the Dark Ages; and that is exactly why it was the beginning of the Dark Ages; Catholicism came into prominence. Nothing was said about Dark Ages in 100 A.D., 200 A.D., 300 A.D. It was only when we come to about 500 A.D., that the Dark Ages started. Therefore I ask you What made that certain span of time the Dark Ages? It was not a case where there was no earthly emperor that had any ambitions and ideas like the previous emperors had: It was simply a case where as Rome weakened, in the imperial sense, and the Catholic Church became more influential in society, the ideas and ambitions of those Roman emperors had to take a back seat. It was the Roman church and her influence in all the affairs of man, that began to look upon education as evil; and little by little plunged mankind into darkness. I have read that. This is exactly why, when the Dark Ages started, new inventions, and progress in general, came to a halt. Whatever architectural designs you find on those ancient Roman columns and arches and so forth at the beginning of the Dark Ages, that is exactly what they still had right straight on through. There was no progress made. Then the man brings it to 1000, and gives that a distinctive mark in time. In that, here came the FEUDAL system. When you read of the feudal system in history, you see how the vast area of Europe was no longer ruled by an emperor, but through this Dark Age period the land was owned by very rich lords. They held the wealth, and stood between society and the known kings. Those lords owned everything. They were the ones that would see after the wars that were to be fought. Society during that time, came to a standstill. Thousands of people lived under the control of those lords who owned vast holdings of farm land. Because of those conditions, the next 500 years of the Dark Ages, mankind in general just existed. There was no progress of any kind, as far as benefiting the average person. When you read that in darkest hour of the Dark Ages, the pope was busy elevating himself to become supreme, sovereign, universal ruler, so that by the time 1000 A.D. came around the Catholic Church was everywhere. Her influence was embedded in every facet of society, from the highest form of government right on down the lowest of the poor peasant people. In this book, the man brings all of this out to show how the world drastically changes on the verge of every 500 years. Coming from 1000 A.D. on through the Dark Ages the Roman popes rose to supremacy. We published an article showing how the papacy rose to its position of supremacy. That all goes with Daniel 7: that tells of the little horn that came up in the midst of the ten horns. He also brings out from the monetary and the social side, the change that is coming. In 1450, a man by the name of Johann Gutenberg invented a printing press. You would say, not knowing what he saw, Why is that so important to talk about? He said this, the world had been in a Dark Age feudal system so long, society was limited in how much information was given to them. But when he made this printing press, it was not just to print the first Bible for the Germans, which was the Gutenberg Bible: It became a means of putting everything in print and getting it out to the people, practically as soon as it happened: In 1450, just 50 years short of a 500 year cycle. Then look what happened in 1492, just right before the cycle closed: A man by the name of Columbus, so sure that the world is round, set out to find a new trade route to the Dutch East Indies. That was none other than God’s way of preparing him to find this new world. Well this man that wrote the book puts all of this together: that as the Gutenberg press had been invented, and every major city of Europe having access to that benefit, when news did reach back months later, that a new world had been found, the press picked it up and in a short order of time all Europe knew there was a new world discovered. Peoples heart’s began to burst with enthusiasm and excitement: They wanted to get ready and go there to see for themselves. Well, 1520 A.D. put it into the next cycle of five hundred years and God raised up a man by the name of Martin Luther, a German, to do a work. He come out with his 95 thesis against the Roman Church; and if the printing press had not already been invented, all Europe would not have heard about this man as quick as they did. However, no sooner did he write his thesis and tack them on the church house door at Whittenberg Germany, the printing presses all over Europe began to spread the news everywhere as fast as they could. With news about the new world just a few years in the past, and now the Reformation on starting, Europe began a continent on fire with the freedom of information: At least as they knew it in that hour. As people were hearing about this, that is why God raised up not only Martin Luther, but there came John Knox and John Calvin, right on the heels of each other, and the sword of the Spirit, the word of God soon had the whole continent of Europe in the process of a great change. Not suddenly, but eventually, change began to come about. The light of truth began to shine upon them; and it eventually brought mankind out of the darkness of the Dark Ages. The light that God gave back then brought spiritual light to many souls, as well as material light and understanding that enabled natural man to find a way of progress that set the trend for the next 500 years; and saints: We are coming to the close of it. When I read that book I said, That just makes these things written in the Bible stand out even more clearly. People are crazy: not to believe this Bible. As he brought in the economic system and how it fluctuates, how it goes through the various cycles of depression, He showed that within the sixty years of depression, there is nine minor depressions. He said we have already come through those. He said the year 2000, there about, we are moving to the climax. He brought in one outstanding thing, and said, Once again man has made something that is going to set this thing into a trend the world will never be able to go back from. That is the computer. I realize, as I bring the material side of this in, I have to do it because it is what the world is going to face when they get over here in the week of Daniel. Computers are everywhere today: Telephone systems are already being controlled by them. Banking systems are being controlled by them; and just about everything else you can think of. Now we have passed the bill, freedom of information; so just think what that means, The very minute something happens, that information can be instantly available anywhere else in the world. At least anywhere that is hooked up to the right computer link. The man climaxed his remarks in this way, Man, in his financial progress has set a trend that will one day lead to an hour when computers will control the flow of earth’s finances. Therefore I say, If the printing press, 500 years ago fanned the flames that set Europe on fire and changed the trend and progress of mankind, bringing him out of the darkness of spiritual and material matters into spiritual light and progress, then I have to say the computer is a monster looking us right in the face. Do you know why? Because we are fast approaching an hour when supposed-to-be smart people will decide that coins and currency is no longer a proper way to negotiate the exchange of monetary values. Then you will see for sure the instrument the antichrist forces will have at their disposal. Then when you read Revelation 13, you will see that it was the United States of America that gave the world this monster. It crept out of the military laboratories, out into educational institutions, then into the financial institutions, then into the scientific area of space exploration and everything; and now it is a toy to play with in teenagers’ bedrooms. You see where the world is in this hour; so when it says in Revelation 13, that the time would come when they could neither buy nor sell, except they wear a mark or a number either in their hand or in their forehead, that will be the final stage of this whole thing. A laser beam will pick up the number and the transaction will be consummated through the use of a computer system that shows every person’s purchasing capabilities. It will probably be every person’s choice whether they want the mark put their hand or in their forehead. With the natural eye it will never be seen. It is put in there with some invisible substance, and only this bar line light will see it. Saints I want you to know, it is already being used in other areas of society. It is being used in the animal realm, thoroughbreds are being given invisible tattoos of numbers. Cattle, dogs, and all such like are being identified in this way; and we can see by this that these are trial things. It lets me know we are just a few years short of the time when it is going to be something humanity will have to face. What causes this? It is the fact that as we get closer to that final hour of time and God has finally been excluded from all of man’s dealings, so that honesty, morality, integrity, and common decency are no longer values to be cherished, man will have to have some more sure way of preventing thefts and counterfeiting. Therefore these characters that are presently using every dishonest way they can think of to steal, counterfeit, rob and abuse, using all kinds of modern gadgets to beat the law, and to beat the system, will be cut off from their methods. Now some will say, What good is all of that to me? Let us look at this Middle East situation for a minute. It is no doubt becoming like a time bomb. I am convinced when this thing was signed in September, it was really like bringing two components of a bomb together; because when I look at it in the light of the Bible, it is an impossibility for their peace plan to work. First and foremost, it is anti prophecy. It is against everything these following verses we are going to read has in store for all concerned parties. However I can see why God has permitted it: because having permitted it to go this far, it is giving one element of the world an opportunity to use their natural, carnal way of thinking to negotiate, to bring about and stabilize some kind of peace condition in the Middle East. He has offered it to them by letting them have this opportunity. At the same time God knows it is not going to work, because every verse of prophecy has to go into place and be fulfilled exactly. The 1967 war fulfilled some of them; but outside of the 1967 war there has been very little manifestation of miraculous power. The war itself, that took the Gaza Strip and the Jericho territory, made it obvious for the first time since the beginning of the state, that there is a God that is fighting on behalf of the Jewish people. As we have said before, different statesmen from Europe and England, the United States and Canada, have all agreed that it was the hand of God seen in that war. Yet for a long time now you have not heard them say anything about it. To me, this goes to show God has His way of making the man of the world say Yes to what He does. For a while he will say it was right for such and such to be done; but after awhile his heart is hardened again just like Pharaoh’s. His former confession little by little slips away from him, or her as the case may be. Anyhow for twenty some years now, Israel has been struggling, negotiating, constantly talking, working internationally with different world leaders, trying to keep this thing settled; but it is not going to be settled like that. It is going to reach an explosive point somewhere in the near future; and we already know how it is going to turn out; but let us look at some more of these prophecies to see a clearer picture of how God will go about dealing with it.

WHEN ISRAEL’S WALLS ARE TO BE REBUILT

In our consideration of Micah 7, I want my brothers and sisters, wherever they hear or read this, to understand that every prophecy in the Old Testament was written for a specific time; and that is the only time they will fit into the plan and purpose of God. God let that man who was the instrument anointed to write these prophecies, which ever one we are looking at, see something, and say something that points to a precise time. That is why I said earlier, You just simply cannot draw one out of a hat and apply it just any old time you please. It is true, they are all talking about God restoring Israel; but God has a pattern, a certain way He is doing it, and a certain purpose in doing it the way He has chosen to bring it about. That is the purpose of this message: to help you better understand how to look at these various prophecies. I have used this title “When Israel does this,” to point to something God is going to use to start talking to an element of society: just like He did the Six Day War of 1967. You do not hear much about the miraculous power God displayed in that war any more. When things began to calm down people stopped talking about the miraculous power of God in the military of Israel at that time. Now we hear about atheism, evolution, dope, and perversions of every sort in the streets of Jerusalem: instead of how God helped them win that war in such a short time. Israel is writing about all of those conditions in the Jerusalem Post. Evil is on the incline everywhere. I cannot help but believe that all scriptures relative to the great hour of evil at the end time are all already in place. Here is the key, so from this time on, here is how we read it. (Micah 7:11) “In the day that thy walls are to be built, in that day shall the decree be far removed.” What decree is He talking about? Well we look back in the Old Testament prophets where God spoke, and promised Israel, The day you turn your back on me, and stop keeping my word, observing my ordinances, and all these things that are established in the law, then I will take great pleasure in cursing you and I will scatter thee to the ends of the earth, however in the last days, I will restore and bring you back. Well I believe we will all agree that through the last forty some years, and by a slow process He has been doing that very thing. We have been talking about it with anticipation. How soon? How close? But now this prophecy that has been linked to a time frame is very much in focus. He said, “In the day that thy walls are to be built,” so what does that add up to? That brings you right over to Isaiah 49 and Isaiah 60, which we have already read. You read that and then look at this, because here it tells us that God is going to bring back an element of immigrant Jews that are definitely going to take up their habitation and live in the old city of Jerusalem. Remember the 49th chapter of Isaiah, how the Spirit of the Lord is causing the city and the land which it is built on, to speak, saying, “Who hath begotten me these, seeing I have lost my children, and am desolate, a captive, and removing to and fro? and who hath brought up these? behold, I was left alone; these, where had they been?” In other words, Where did these come from, seeing that I have lost the first. Where have they been? Right there in that 49th chapter it plainly tells what is in store for the Arabs that live in that city now. Twice it says, “Thy destroyers and they that made thee waste (those that make old Jerusalem look like a run down shambles, or a shanty town) shall go forth of thee.” There is not one bit of it made out of wood: It is all stone; but the area stinks like a hog pen. It is in a run down, dilapidated condition. Much of it is made from old stones that had been torn in previous generations through earthquakes and wars and such. The streets are the same way. But here, for the first time, we see, “In the day that thy walls are to be built,” which is speaking specifically to Jerusalem and speaking relative to the temple. This is why in the Six Day War Israel took the old city. They fulfilled the prophecy of Jesus, how Jerusalem would be trodden down of the Gentiles until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled. The Jews took it and they have governed and watched over it, but they did not drive out the inhabitants and they did not touch the temple spot. So you can see the sequence what happened in 1967 and what is in front of us now. There is definitely to be a drastic change of developments in the Middle East very soon. Once God turns Israel loose, it will never be the same from that moment on. It will not drag out over a 10 to 20 year span of time either: it will all come about very quickly now. As one brother from Montreal always said, God has saved the best for last, or The best is yet to come. He has a treat for some and a heartache for others. I have to say, Praise God! I am glad I am a child of God today. I would not want to miss the show that is about to take place. I can hardly wait to hear the News come on and run 24 hours around the clock: showing first hand what is taking place in Israel. Newsmen from all around the world will be getting on planes, wanting to go to Israel to see what is going on over there that has the world so startled. If you can see this in Micah 7, you can also see in Isa. 60, how it is going to be done. Notice verse 10 first “And the sons of strangers shall build up thy walls, and their kings shall minister unto thee: for in my wrath I smote thee, but in my favour have I had mercy on thee.” You can learn a lot from that one verse alone; but the verses just before that, speaking in relationship to the temple, you see how out of Saudi Arabia will come camels carrying this wealth, and incense to be offered upon the altar. Out of Jordan, the Bedouin Arabs, which are from the offspring of Abraham by Keturah and her six sons, here comes the goats and the sheep. God says, They will be accepted upon my altar. Israel, right at the present time, does not even have a breeding program to start this thing, because the politicians they have had through the years have not even looked ahead, allowing prophecy to be a guiding factor in their decisions. Most of Israel’s politicians has went about these things always wanting to play up to the western leaders, negotiate, negotiate, and make concessions. That is what these two are doing right now; and that is why I cannot help but believe that God is going to intervene in the process before it goes too far. Once God changes the procedure, from then on these prophecies are going to start dropping in place one right after the other. Every one of them involve the miraculous workings of the Creator. Of course as we read these various verses we realize that in the past number of years there has been a great number of Jews come from various places already; but we have to realize when the time arrives for the 49th chapter of Isaiah to be fulfilled God is going to be instrumental in bringing back an element of Jews to inhabit the old city; and I want to explain something to you about that. That group of Jews that will eventually inhabit the old city and be there for the Millennium will not be just Judaean Jews, they will also be of the lineage of the house of David. Where do you get that, Bro. Jackson? Go right back and read in Kings; and you will see for yourself. That was the ancient city of the Jebusites, a pagan city; but when King David decided to take it, he took that ancient city of the Jebusites and selected one place where he had a palace built. There is where he set up his dwelling; and over the centuries the house of David grew into a great number. We can see from the scriptures that Jesus Himself is of the tribe of Judah, but He is also out of the lineage of David. Therefore when the hour has come for Jerusalem to be inhabited, and it passes into that period when God is going to cause it to be renovated and rebuilt, modified and beautified to get it ready for the Millennium, the people God will really be concerned about living there are the present twentieth century descendants of the house of David. That is how we have to see this picture, if it is to make any sense. Let us continue reading in Micah 7. (12) “In that day also he (meaning the Jews) shall come even to thee from Assyria, and from the fortified cities, and from the fortress even to the river, and from sea to sea, and from mountain to mountain.” Verse 13 speaks again of the Arabs; so notice it. “Notwithstanding the land shall be desolate because of them that dwell therein, for the fruit of their doings. That verse lets us know that those which made that land, that city waste, are going to be brought out of there by the Jewish military and removed so far away that it leaves that area completely desolate. Here is what we have to look at, and this is the key prophecy that sets all others in motion. That is why this could not have happened back in the 1967 war, because in the eyes of God it was not time to build the temple. It was not time for God to deal with the old city of Jerusalem for Jewish habitation. That is why twenty years has come and gone and they have done nothing but argue and slap at each other. That kind of thing has just about ran its course by now though; so we have every reason to expect a very drastic change in the Middle East very soon now; and there is no doubt some terrible ordeals of a very devastating nature are going to occur on both sides. God has His way of stirring the issue and causing the thing to get so hot something will have to give. This is what will frustrate world leaders that have worked so hard trying to get those leaders to negotiate and get the thing settled. The more they stick their nose in, the more God lets it become a confused picture to them. This is the key. When the hour has come, then we can say this, Once God turns Israel loose, then is when the miraculous hand of God starts showing itself on their behalf. Now let us watch this next verse. “Feed thy people with thy rod, the flock of thine heritage, which dwell solitarily in the wood, in the midst of Carmel: let them feed in Bashan and Gilead, as in the days of old.” They are not there yet, but when this hour has arrived, they will be there. I take that right back to Zechariah 10. It tells how they will come into Lebanon and into Gilead, and room is not found for them. That lets me know, When the hour comes that God is strategically dealing with the issue of the city of Jerusalem, then that is going to become the major focal point of where all attention, and where these prophecies begin to zero in at. Then God is going to extend His hand in a miraculous way on behalf of the Jews; and He is going to do it in order that Jews, wherever they are out there in the world, those that are to play a role in this end time by being part of the Jews that are to come in and inhabit this area of old Jerusalem, will have their opportunity to come to the land of their forefathers. God has a miraculous way of showing His hand in the Bible land. That is the signal for those Jews to start their journey homeward. Now we are back to a verse we read earlier. (15) “According to the days of thy coming out of the land of Egypt will I shew unto him marvellous things.” Well all we have to do is read Numbers and Exodus, to see what marvelous things God did for the children of Israel back then. When I read the account of the spies that came to Jericho, that second episode, and how they came into the house of Rahab the harlot and asked her, How did your people feel about this thing? She said, The day we heard what happened when your people crossed the Red Sea, our hearts did melt within us. In other words, We were scared. That lets you know God has a way of touching peoples heart’s to make them afraid and get them all rattled so they cannot defend themselves. Saints: If that could be true in that day, then what about 1995, or 1996, or 1997, whenever He wants to do this sort of thing again? (16) “The nations shall see and be confounded at all their might: they shall lay their hand upon their mouth, their ears shall be deaf.” This will not be something hid from the eyes of the world: Not in this day when the News Media is ready to get on an airplane and go where the News is. With TV cameras tuned in, there is nothing hidden anymore. What are those satellites doing out there in space? Taking pictures and relaying them back down to earth. We are living in a day when there is not only freedom of information, it is instant information with audio and video. It no sooner happens there, you are looking at it here. When you think of the two world systems, Russia and the United States, with all their high tech weaponry, and also of the Arabs that are equipped with the Russian equipment, I have to say, When God turns Israel loose to fulfill these prophecies, once it starts, it will not stop until the whole prophetic picture is complete. It will not be all broken up. It is going to go right on straight through. “The nations shall see and be confounded at all their might: they shall lay their hand upon their mouth, their ears shall be deaf. (17) They shall lick the dust like a serpent, they shall move out of their holes like worms of the earth: they shall be afraid of the Lord our God, and shall fear because of thee. (18) Who is a God like unto thee, that pardoneth iniquity, and passeth by the transgression of the remnant of his heritage? he retaineth not his anger for ever, because he delighteth in mercy.” In the previous message which we titled “Looking Through Windows of Prophecy,” we brought in Zephaniah 2:3-7, how God caused that prophet to look down on the land of Gaza and prophesied how that Gaza Strip, the ancient land of the Philistines, was going to be given to the tribe of Judah in the last days for an eternal possession. The three major cities of this land of the Philistines all are definitely destined to be areas that Jews will inhabit. Also how the areas of the countryside will be there for herds of sheep and flocks. If God has promised that to the tribe of Judah, and she took it in the Six Day War in 1967, let us notice how it stopped where she was to cross the Jordan and hit the Edomites, the Moabites, and the Ammonites. We can see when verse 7 stops, that puts the tribe of Judah in a promised area of future habitation that they never had in their possession in ancient times. God promised it to them, that it will be for the tribe of Judah. When you go on into verse 8, that gets them over into the area of Jordan; but let us look again at the 12th chapter of Zechariah: where it is speaking about the city of Jerusalem. (2) “Behold, I will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling unto all the people round about, when they shall be in the siege both against Judah and against Jerusalem. (3) And in that day will I make Jerusalem a burdensome stone for all people: all that burden themselves with it shall be cut in pieces, though all the people of the earth be gathered together against it. (4) In that day, saith the Lord, I will smite every horse with astonishment, and his rider with madness: and I will open mine eyes upon the house of Judah, and will smite every horse of the people with blindness.” Since the 1967 war, Israel has not been allowed to deal with anything else that is relative to prophecy. Everything has just been hanging, waiting for God’s time frame. He has a launching time for the wrap up and that is where Micah 7 opens up the door for the hand of God to show His miraculous power on behalf of His chosen people Israel.

1994-04-When-Israel-Does-This-Part-1

Looking Through Windows of Prophecy, Part 3 – 1994, April


Rev. Raymond M Jackson

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

CONTINUING ON WITH OUR LOOK THROUGH THESE WINDOWS OF PROPHECY, WE HAVE SOME OTHER PROPHECIES TO LOOK AT; SO LET US GIVE OUR ATTENTION TO WHAT THE SPIRIT OF GOD HAS ALLOWED US TO SEE HERE AT THE END OF THE AGE.


LOOKING AT A BIBLE PICTURE


In Ezekiel 38:9, it says, (speaking of Gog, or Russia) “Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee.” When will that take place? When Israel is finally dwelling safely in their unwalled villages. When God turns Israel loose to fulfill Numbers 24, Zephaniah 2:8-11 and Jeremiah 48:47, it will not take Israel six months to make that giant military sweep. She will sweep across this land in question. I have to believe, when God moves upon her to do so, she will probably not stop until she has gone completely to the Euphrates. That takes you right back to Genesis, where God promised Abraham that this would be one of their borders. Not that the Jews will want to destroy the Iraqi people, but they will certainly want to destroy that spirit that has been leading them, and teach them a lesson. They are not going to destroy the Ammonite people, nor the Moabite people, nor the Edomites. They are just going to destroy their ability to be a little nation within themselves to create trouble. When God uses Israel to take that Islamic religion away from them, they are going to stop that Allah chant and start praying to Jehovah, just as the Jew do. That is how you have to see this thing. Israel, by that military sweep, will have stretched her borders right exactly where God wants them. When those Arabs get over the shock and psychological effect this will have on them, I cannot help but believe that the News Media in the west will begin to interview Sheik This and Sheik That, King This and King That, and report to the world that a strange thing has happened. I can just hear them now: What is your opinion about what has just happened? If we look at it right, they are going to say, God is with the Jews. We now believe the promise of God to Abraham was to come through Isaac, not Ishmael. If we can see these prophecies in the right light, we will have to come to the conclusion that as God uses Israel in a war that surely must be close at hand, and they do valiantly on the field of battle, and the outcome is that she again presses her borders to the limits set by the Creator so very long ago, her closest enemies will be put to rest. Not necessarily to sleep in the grave: though I am sure many of them will end up that way; but surely the fight will have been taken out of them. They will have a new outlook toward the Jews after that. They can then begin to sympathetically align their hearts and their attitudes toward the Israeli cause. I am going to show you something in the scriptures again at this time, that will enable you to see what I am looking at. To this point in time, all of those little Israeli settlements are behind chain link fences with gates; but I want to read something to you from Ezekiel 36. This is the chapter that brings out how God will restore them according to their former estates. However what I want you to notice is that in the process of restoring them, here is a picture that brings out how we have viewed Israel through the years coming up to this point. We are starting in verse 34, “And the desolate land shall be tilled, (I have lived to see that take place.) whereas it lay desolate in the sight of all that passed by.” The plains of Megiddo, in the valley of Jezreel, for centuries, was a wilderness, then a swamp. Crocodile were found there. However after the turn of the century, after the Jews began to go back there, they brought the Eucalyptus tree from Australia, and as they purchased certain areas within this wasteland they set out the Eucalyptus trees and their roots broke the hard crust, causing the swamp to disappear. There are no crocodile out there now. Rice, wheat, barley, oats, cotton and all such like are growing in that same region today. (35) “And they shall say, This land that was desolate has become like the Garden of Eden; and the waste and desolate and ruined cities are become fenced, and are inhabited.” Why were they fenced? Because they have had an enemy for forty some years that had to be kept out. Those fences were not installed there to keep stray cows out of town. They were to keep the guerrillas out of town. In many places they had certain areas mined, in the perimeter around town. Anyhow chapter 36 has been in focus these past number of years. We have seen their fenced cities. You do not put up a fence without a gate; but the gates were guarded. Those immigrant Jews had to do it that way in order to hold on to what little they had: believing that somehow in the future, God would make a way possible for the picture to change. That is why I emphasize these prophecies and what I see coming: I have seen these fences. I have seen the gates on them. Row after row of new huts sat behind them, where immigrant families had moved in. In the Jordanian Valley, leaving Jericho going north toward the Sea of Galilee, you pass some of these new settlements right in the desert, where they bulldozed everything away. There were those chain link fences that looked to be nine feet tall, with gates. When night comes those gates are well guarded with armed guards. The purpose of it is to keep out those guerrilla bands that want to come along and harass the Jewish settlers. God allowed it to be like that for a while; but it will not always be like that. When God does this for them, and I am persuaded that it will be very soon, that is why He will use Israel: He is absolutely going to get to the head of this whole thing. He is going to get the heads of these Arab people who constantly want to harass them and are so antagonistic toward the very mention of a Jew. When God uses Israel, through that military sweep, He is going to do it in a way that those Arabs cannot help but realize that Allah cannot help them. It is Jehovah with the Jews. When that happens, then you can easily see what that does for all those walled villages. It makes them safe. When my people, Israel, dwell safely, that is when the word of God says Gog will make his move against them. This certainly lets us know for sure that Ezekiel 38 and 39 could not possibly be fulfilled until after some of these other prophecies have been fulfilled to open up the way for it. As we move through these scriptures, we can see that somewhere in the very near future it will no longer be the Arab people making trouble for the people of Israel. They will be at peace with Israel. When that comes to pass Israel can take the fences down. Notice the language of Ezekiel 38:10 “Thus saith the Lord God; It shall also come to pass, that at the same time shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought: And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates.” Why do more people not ask when they read these scriptures, Where did all those fences go? It is not that way now. Every last one of those villages that have those fences, have bars and gates. It has to be like that to keep their enemies out. It is not intruders from Iran, nor Libya, nor Ethiopia, nor any others but those Arabs that live right next door. Well that is why God will use Israel in such a way as to display His own power in such a miraculous fashion. Let us go back a few thousand years: to the time when spies were sent to check out the land the Jews were heading for and they came into Jericho and met the harlot by the name of Rahab. When they got introduced to her and she began to tell the story, what did she tell those spies? We heard of your people, what your God did when He brought you across the Red Sea. You every one know what she told those spies? She said, At that time our hearts did melt within us. (In other words, We were scared half to death.) They had every reason to be. Well Micah 7 plainly says as it was with him in the days when I brought him out of Egypt, so again will I show unto him great and marvelous things. Insomuch that the heathen round about will come crawling out of their holes, confounded at all their might, at their infrared sights, heat sensors, and all that stuff. As I said in Norway, we not only have all of that, Israel has it too. We sold them some of our technology. Just look at what our men can do: then put a Jew in that same plane and you will really see something. I have to remind you what you have heard many times before, Little is much if God be in it. He will take one Jew and one airplane and drive the whole Iraqi Air Force out of the vicinity. You say, You talk crazy, Bro. Jackson. Oh no: I am just waiting for the hour that I can see some of these things falling into place. I will jump up and down with Joy, saying, Did I not say so? That is the way the whole thing lines up: when I look at the picture the Bible portrays. It did not look like this 15 or 20 years ago. It is just simply a fact, that as we get closer to a prophesied event, we begin to see more clearly how to look at it. Yes saints, notice how He emphasizes this, I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely. Two passages of scripture show it. (Ezekiel 38:8) “After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword, and is gathered out of many people, against the mountains of Israel, which have been always waste: but it is brought forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely all of them.” This would be, when my people Israel dwell safely. In this verse, it is in connection with the invasion of the enemy that it says, When His people dwell safely. That means their borders have been pushed out to their ancient boundaries and everything is in place. Then we notice in verse 12, it is the invading force under the leadership of this Muscovite, the Magog people, that it is referring to. Here is what they say, “To take a spoil, and to take a prey; to turn thine hand upon the desolate places {that are now} inhabited, and upon the people {that are} gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the midst of the land.” By that time we can say this, Jerusalem is in the process of being renovated and her future inhabitants, Jews, are now moving in to possess their dwellings. That is why you read chapter 49 of Isaiah along with this. There is no doubt that Israel will make this sweep to set the stage for Jerusalem to be renovated and made ready for the Messiah, which will come over here at the end of the week. We realize the temple is going to be built somewhere in the preceding months leading into this period of time; and as we have pointed out, The Jews will have help building that temple that people not too many years ago would have said would be an impossibility. That just goes to show how God can turn things around when His time comes for it to happen.


WHAT THE PROPHETS HAVE WRITTEN ABOUT ISRAEL IN OUR DAY


The whole picture in the Middle East is going to change very quickly as Israel begins to make the moves these prophecies foretell; so do not be surprised if you turn on the News some morning and Israel is on the move. With this in mind, we have to realize these other Islamic nations are absolutely going to become infuriated when they begin to watch the progress and development of things and see how the Jews are renovating that city. They will be even more infuriated when they observe the fact that the Jews are dwelling safely in their land. Israel can say with a sigh of relief, The Arabs are no longer our enemies, out to harass us, and their guerrillas trying to infiltrate our ranks at night. They are finally allowing us to dwell in peace. You have to understand it took that war under Numbers, to rid all that Saudi Arabia area of that religious anti Jewish feeling, and to convert the heart of that Arab so that when you get to Isaiah 60, which goes with Isaiah 49, here they come with gold and incense, with the wealth of the people of Arabia, to offer upon His altar of sacrifice. (Isaiah 60:1-11) “Arise shine; for thy light is come, and the glory of the Lord is risen upon thee. (2) For, behold, the darkness shall cover the earth, and gross darkness the people: but the Lord shall arise upon thee, and His glory shall be seen upon thee. (3) And the Gentiles shall come to thy light, and kings to the brightness of thy rising. (4) Lift up thine eyes round about, and see: all they gather themselves together, they come to thee: thy sons shall come from far, and thy daughters shall be nursed at thy side. (5) Then thou shalt see, and flow together, and thine heart shall fear, and be enlarged; because the abundance of the sea shall be converted unto thee, the forces of the Gentiles shall come unto thee. (6) The multitude of camels shall cover thee, the dromedaries of Midian and Ephah; all they from Sheba shall come: they shall bring gold and incense; and they shall shew forth the praises of the Lord. (7) All the flocks of Kedar shall be gathered together unto thee, the rams of Nebaioth shall minister unto thee: they shall come up with acceptance on mine altar, and I will glorify the house of my glory. (8) Who are these that fly as a cloud, and as the doves to their windows? (9) Surely the isles shall wait for me, and the ships of Tarshish first, to bring thy sons from far, their silver and their gold with them, unto the name of the Lord thy God, and to the Holy One of Israel, because he hath glorified thee. (10) And the sons of strangers shall build up thy walls, and their kings shall minister unto thee: for in my wrath I smote thee, but in my favour have I had mercy on thee. Therefore thy gates shall be open continually; they shall not be shut day nor night; that men may bring unto thee the forces of the Gentiles, and that their kings may be brought.” I just have to say, Only God Himself can cause it to be done like that. My critics will probably say, Well it will sure take a miracle to bring about such a thing. Sure it will; but what do you think happened to the Russian Empire 3 1/2 or so years ago? Was that not a miracle? There is no need for anyone to think Reagan and the pope of Rome accomplished all of that without God having a hand in it. They may have been key instruments in bringing about what happened; but you never would have seen a thing like that take place unless God had first said, The time is right. Have you ever stopped to think of all the people who lost their lives for that monster to grow and become what it was, and then think how quickly the monster was brought down: simply with a stroke of the hand of God? This ought to tell the world that this old world system is in for a shaking like never before. What it took empires years to build, God can bring to naught in a day’s time. Yes saints, verse 12 of the 38th chapter of Ezekiel, lets us see how the enemy says, We have come to take a spoil, we have come to take a prey, we have come to do this and that. But look at verse 13: who is doing the talking. Saudi Arabia would not say anything like that today. (That is who Sheba and Dedan are.) If old mad man Hussein of Iraq, three years ago, instead of going into Kuwait, would have crossed Jordan into Israel, Saudi Arabia would not have said one thing about it. Listen to me. They would not have said a thing, because their sentiment is for the Islamic cause. They probably would have said, Onward Hussein! As it was though, the minute Hussein got his eyes on Kuwait, Saudi Arabia got scared and began looking for help. They were glad to let our Bible totting soldiers, whom they looked upon as a bunch of infidels, come to their rescue. Of course it is true to a great degree: our society has become corrupt and more like people who hate God; but I want you to know this, The mere fact that they make their women wear their dresses long and cover their faces does not make them holy. That long nosed bunch of characters will sit in a beer joint watching belly dancers until three in the morning, then go home to their wives still feeling like they are something special. They will not let their women be seen in public unless she is wearing a veil over her face. That is social hypocrisy: just pretending to be moral when all evidence speaks otherwise. I had to say it that way based upon my own observation. When God gets through using Israel to open their eyes, I have to believe Saudi Arabia will see a lot of things they have not seen for a long time. The veil will be lifted from their mind’s so they can begin to see and understand a few things they have been ignorant to. Anyhow here is what verse 13 says, “Sheba and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish, with all the young lions thereof, shall say unto thee, Art thou come to take a spoil? hast thou gathered thy company to take a prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take a great spoil?” I have said all of that to show you, from three years ago when they had to scream for help themselves, you do not find this verse portraying them as being against Israel when the enemy is coming toward them, like they might have been in prior times. Instead they are heard saying, What have you come to do? They are the first ones that speak out, What have you come to do? Sheba and Dedan, (Look where they are on the map) and the merchants of Tarshish, (the area representing old Spain) are asking that question. Some of you may not realize what people the merchants of Tarshish represent; but in ancient Biblical times when Israel was a major nation in the Middle East and traded with certain Gentile people on the coast of Spain, those people there, were of the first foreign tradesmen, craftsmen that traded certain produce with the Israelis. They had a life style that many Jews took a liking to. This is why when Jonah went down to the sea fleeing from the presence of the Lord, he was determined to go to Tarshish. He went down to the old ancient seaport called Joppa and bought a ticket for a boat trip. To go where? To Tarshish. That lets you know which way Ninevah was from there: for he went the opposite way from what the Lord had told him to go. My point is, This could not have happened before: that those of Tarshish would be for Israel. When you look at the lineup of western Europe today, the ten major nations are all back in combined unity. This should tell us that somewhere deep in the old sentimental background of Spain a spark is rekindled; because for centuries Jews lived in the old ancient capital of Madrid. There is a section there, one third of the old city, it was called the Jewish section. Then when the Moslems were there, they had their section. The rest of the city was Catholic. All three lived side by side until the time of the Spanish Inquisition. Then the Catholics were hard on the Jews. The very year Columbus discovered the new world, that was the year the rulers of Spain and the leaders and people of southern France and Spain got together and drove the Moors out. That is when the Jews were driven out. I said all that to give you a little background of Tarshish. Just keep in mind, it was called Tarshish at that time. A lot of these other nations called Portugal, France, and so forth were barbarians; but they were not tradesmen with Israel. How many realize that is why it addressed these in the forefront of this statement? Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish, with all the young lions thereof speaks specifically. When you and I look at western Europe, we see it in a much different way; because all these other nations you and I have known in our history and study, we realize they came about, got their identity after the breakup of the old Roman Empire. Keep in mind though, the prophet was not looking at Spain as having been a part of the Roman Empire. He was looking at this country way before the Roman Empire ever came into existence; and he was speaking from that standpoint. That is why it is Sheba and Dedan, these Arabs in Saudi Arabia, who take the initiative to question such an approach by such an invading force, Art thou come to take a spoil? hast thou gathered thy company to take a prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take a great spoil? (Ezekiel 38:14) “Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say unto Gog, (This goes back to the leader.) Thus saith the Lord God; In that day (here we come) when my people of Israel dwelleth safely, (God puts emphasis on it. She has secure borders. She is at peace with her Arab half brothers. They are at peace with Israel.) shalt thou not know it? And thou shalt come from thy place out of the north parts, thou, and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses, (horsepower) a great company, and a mighty army: And thou shalt come up against my people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; (a cloud, twice it speaks like this) it shall be in the latter days, and I will bring thee against my land, that the heathen may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes.” God has a way of bestowing His power and His presence. When we think of Russia, for the past number of years she has been the great producer of scientific philosophers of atheism. She has taught her young people that there is no God. Yet as she denied her young people the knowledge of God, many of them went off after astronomy and all that kind of things. I will never forget last year in Russia, person after person, as they came in the prayer line, would say, Please pray for me. Through the interpreter they would say, We have not been free to study religion; but we have been free to study other things. I heard this, I got caught up in astronomy; and now I see demons in my house: I am scared to go to bed. I thought to myself, When you take away from people the privilege of studying the right thing, the devil will always give them the wrong thing. Here they are in torment: captured by one thing or another. Person after person, alcoholic after alcoholic: much of it attributed to them being denied the privilege of seeking God for fellowship and help. Saints I hope you can see why this chapter is written like it is. It has a picture in it. It tells you precisely when to look toward the seventieth week of Daniel; because it is definitely going to be the last war that will be fought just before that week of Daniel starts. There is no doubt that as that war is fought, western nations will stand ready; because when you read in there, “And it shall come to pass I will call for a sword out of all my mountains,” That means nations that somehow or other have honored God, (For He said) “I will rain upon him a great rain, fire and brimstone.” from Spain to France, to England, to Ireland, Belgium, Germany, Holland, I can see rockets in their launching pads, ready. God says, “And I will plead with him, with pestilence and with fire.” Every kind of disaster. God is going to teach that mass of people one last lesson: that there is a God is the universe. I could sense in talking among a lot of those people, that even though for the past eighty years they built their universities to educate their people in science, physics, and all such like, when they left God out of the picture it made all of that very vain. They have tried to ignore the very ONE that holds this great universe together. God is going to teach those responsible ones a lesson though; and He will still get His remnant out of Russia to fulfill the scriptures. He is going to show them the greatest text book the human race has ever known: this book we call THE BIBLE. I am glad it is a book that can talk to you. It has been written in a way that it can talk to people; and at times when people are to see certain things it can present a very vivid picture. Yes there will be saints from every nation under heaven. God has His way of bringing to pass all that His prophets through the ages have written.


A NEW WORLD ORDER OR AN OLD WORLD ORDER REVIVED


In the light of a lot of things that have been discussed in the political realm in the past two and a half years since the Gulf War, I want to make a few comments before continuing on in Ezekiel 38 and 39. I know that when the Gulf War was going on there was a lot of talk about a New World Order. It made preachers go absolutely wild: Here comes the beast. Now, after so much time has passed you do not hear much about the New World Order. Let us just take a look at the United Nations as it exists today. That is as close as you can get to a New World Order. That thing has been in existence since 1948; but tell me, What good has it been? It has not done one earthly bit of good that I can see. Yet our own nation has contributed billions of dollars into the funding of the thing. As I said before, it was something designed by the leaders of the United States, in collaboration with other western leaders, because as the WW2 era came to a close, they were faced with a huge debt, an area lying in ruins, and that is the only thing they could devise to give any ray of hope: Let’s all get together and agree to function as a group of nations, just as the United States has been a multiple of states with their own independent governments. We have to realize though, there has been a lot of make shift things that have been the product of man’s own initiative down through centuries of time; yet none of those things, however long they existed, or how short they lasted, has ever changed the overall picture of Biblical prophecy. If you just look back through the pages of history, you saw the rise of various things; but somewhere along the line prophecy is the measuring stick that determines the end results of all of it. Right now there seems to be little cooperation, very little agreement and very little accomplished by the United Nations. Look at this Bosnia situation: You and I know there is not much more they can put together than what is already in existence there; and I ask you, What has it done as far as shaping the world for the future. If they cannot get three factions of people to respect them, how in the name of common sense are you going to get total nations to respect the same for a lasting world peace? Even many times those troops with the relief convoys have been held up and did not know what move to make until there was something worked out. My point in saying these things is, Let us not forget what the Bible says; because the Bible gives us a unique picture: letting us know it is Rome coming back into preeminence for a short allotted time; and certainly we know that will not be a New World Order. We might say it like this, It is an old world order with a new title attached to it. There is no doubt whatsoever that we are living somewhere in this area of time, looking through this window: just before the miraculous begins to take place. As I said before, don’t place these windows we have on our chart years and years apart. We are moving toward the year 2000 A.D. That prophetic time of Hosea 6:2, if it is to be figured from the crucifixion of Christ, it will terminate in the year 2005. In the light of a generation Jesus talked about, and a little season as we find under the 5th seal, how can we extend time any longer than that? Those two days are dispensational days of prophetic time, each day a thousand years of prophetic time. They definitely have to have a beginning point and an ending point: such as they will definitely have when the week of Daniel comes into effect and Israel’s revival takes place. As I see it, if 33 A.D. is when Christ was crucified, that is the only possible date you can come up with that makes any sense, for those two dispensational days to start. If you try to push it to 70 A.D., the final destruction of Jerusalem and the children of Israel being taken away into captivity, you push the ending of those two days beyond the generation of people that are to live to see the end of all these prophesied things. We have a measuring stick in the Bible and we would do well to use it properly: not trying to pinpoint any certain year, but rather recognize that we are in the season for the wrap up of these things we have been looking at. That is why I say, We can look for God to do something with His Gentile Church in the very near future. Since 1948, pressures, conditions and circumstances have reshaped Europe until today you have a complete, combined area of nations there in western Europe that is all under one political unity, working out their economic strategies. They have been under one military umbrella since 1948. That is why we heard much about NATO. Even now, different men in our government are saying, Why doesn’t NATO do something in Bosnia? That is their headache. We can say this, if you knew what is behind the scene, (and I assure you we do not know) you would know good and well there is some reason why those western leaders in Europe today do not want to lift a finger toward changing that situation. A lot of what is going on over there can be attributed to nothing more and nothing less than a religious war. That is why the Moslems there are taking a beating, both from the Croatians and the Serbians; because the Croatians and the Serbians are definitely either orthodox, or the other, we will say Greek Orthodox. They have been rival enemies for hundreds and hundreds of years. If you could read the pages of history when the Islamic religion came out of Saudi Arabia, how by the time we come into the 8th and 9th century, it had swept into Turkey, and what bloodshed. No historian was around to write the horrible picture; but what little I have read, especially when they attacked Constantinople, they literally beheaded Christians by the thousands. Who stood by to contest it? What world leader said, Let’s send aid? I hope you get the picture. Those people have reason to remember that horrible hour. To me it is a tragedy, to think how in modern times innocent people are suffering. I just have to say this, God is looking down on what is taking place. He sees it better than I do. We just have to realize that eventually every bit of that area of old eastern Europe, going into Asia, by the time it is all over, is going to be lined up with Rome one hundred percent; so everything just has to work into place. Man can interfere; but man cannot defeat the plan and purpose of God. Neither can man’s interfering change God’s timetable for wrapping up this whole thing. It will all be right on schedule.


WHEN GOD HIMSELF IS SANCTIFIED


Let us get back to Ezekiel 38. Here we find a war described, that a lot of people have had a lot of misgivings about. They have said, Well it looks like that could be the battle of Armageddon. No saints, it is not the battle of Armageddon. The battle of Armageddon, as we read in Revelation 16 and 19, is not even described as a miracle war. Think of it. There is not a thing in Revelation that tells you the battle of Armageddon will produce anything that God is glorified in. Yet right here in this war described in Ezekiel 39 and 39 it plainly tells you, number one, He is going to be sanctified in Gog. Then it says He is going to be sanctified among the heathen. The heathen mentioned is not that poor bush man in the Congo either: it is this bunch of educated, know-it-all politicians that act like they have the answer to everything: along with Professor This and Professor That, many of whom will even reject the very idea that there is a sovereign God in the picture. Yes the heathen mentioned in these scriptures are those type of individuals. Then we notice also, it plainly closes out by saying, And Israel will know from that day onward that I am the Lord their God who is in the midst of her forevermore. That tells me this war is an episode that is to be fought just before the time that from the western world is introduced that covenant period which will be the 70th week of Daniel. There is no doubt as the western world watches this unfold, seeing how God portrays himself to the leaders of the western world where the beast is already being shaped, already put together, ready to go into action, those leaders will not be disturbed one bit. However within the realm of Gentile nations there is going to be people whose hearts are going to be touched. That is why God speaks of how He is sanctified in the midst of the heathen. There has to be a reason why God wants to be sanctified. It is not that He is unholy. It means He wants to be recognized as a Holy God in the midst of a nation of people that has forgot all about Him. That is what we have to look at here. You can see it today. That is why our western nations do not want God brought into the picture. That is the last thing on earth they want. Israel has been ruled much through recent years by the politician type Jew, not looking at the future of Israel from a Messianic viewpoint. The religious, Messianic people have been pressed into the background. Therefore you have to realize somewhere in front of us, when we come to this period of time that these prophecies are to drop down and be fulfilled, God will make the governors of Judah as a torch in the midst of the pile of wood. They have not been like that yet. It is true there was a six day war, even then in the Israeli government there was a lot of bickering as to what they would do and would not do. Nevertheless when it became obvious that Nasser of Egypt and the Syrians were ready for a strike, they had to agree to a strategy and God honored it. Since then they have done everything else other than to really agree on anything. Therefore my point in saying this is, Ezekiel 38 is not a war like conventional types of wars of the past. While it is a war that Russia, with her allies, are coming against Israel in one of the most unique sneak attacks that could ever be put together in modern times, it is going to be different than anything the world has ever witnessed. That is why it does not say in the Bible that they are going to come dropping out of the air with parachutes. No. It tells in Ezekiel they are coming on horseback. Like I said earlier, Imagine thousands of troops coming from Libya, from Russia, from Persia and Ethiopia on horseback. How far do you think they would get, with Israelis intelligence as sharp as it is? They would never get where they were going. It would not be a miracle in the, it will be a miracle if they survive even long enough to get to the borders of Israel. No saints, they are not coming against Israel by those primitive means. The horses they will be coming on will be horsepower: as your engines are rated today. These shields and bucklers and things that ancient mankind used, you just have to transfer that terminology to modern armament and high tech fire power. Every last bit of it is Russian made. That is why it stipulated here, Art thou not he whom his servants have prophesied in former times, now we would have to find that somewhere in other Israeli writings; because it is not in our Bible. Let us go to Ezekiel 38:14, and look at something that is in our Bible. I know there are people who will say, Oh Jackson, you are wrong, God has already torn Russia to pieces. To those people, I just have to say, No. He did NOT tear the land of Magog apart; and that is the part of the old Soviet territory this prophecy pertains to. God just broke up that great monster that had such a large perimeter out there. It was never all known as Russia. Did you know there was a time when Turkey ran all the way up into that region? Yes, there was a time when much of that area was called Turkistan. That was not Russia. However out of that, eventually, that which actually is Russia, the land of the Muscovites, (who are the descendants of Meshech and Tubal) came the heart core of what you look to as Russia. It is true, as we come through the 18th century there was a lot of bloodshed in that vast region. Russia did not extend all the way to the Orient. But as that Communistic spirit hit, they were successful in surrounding and putting together (though gradually) a vast network of smaller countries, such as Lithuania, Latvia, Estonia and those. There were many of them: too many to mention. It all combined into a vast area of what was known as the Soviet Union, which was a communist empire; and that is what has been broken up. However what God was looking at in Ezekiel 38 and 39 are still right there; and I might say, very capable of fulfilling what we are reading about. These words were written to, or about Gog, the chief prince, (or ruler) of Meshech and Tubal, of the land of Magog; so that is where we look to as we study these scriptures. God was looking right at that old hard core. Right now if you would ask those Russian politicians, Do you believe you will play a future role in coming down into the land of Israel, by making alliance with Persia and Ethiopia? you would probably hear them say, Why? We see no need for anything like that. Well naturally they would see no need for that at this present time. Neither do those Common Market nations of Western Europe look at the Bible to see their future role in the plan of God. Circumstances and world conditions just lead up to the point of their active role in fulfilling these prophecies. The Bible tells us God will put hooks in the jaws of Gog and his band and bring them forth to come against Israel. They are not looking at the Bible to see what their future role in prophecy will be; but God certainly is. That is why I say, Though Israel and the PLO may sign a thousand agreements, that does not guarantee there will be peace in the Middle East? Absolutely not! Let us look at verse 14 of chapter 38. “Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say unto Gog, (The word Gog applies to the leader) Thus saith the Lord God; In that day when My people of Israel dwelleth safely, shalt thou not know it?” I will repeat what I said earlier. Since 1948, the immigrant Jews that have come back to their ancient home land have not been able to live there in peace and safety. Every year there is hostility, killings by every thinkable means. They are constantly subjected to guerrilla attacks. At night the settlements are invaded. That is why the kibbutz have barbed wire around them. Every new village has chain link fences around them. Therefore there has been no time to this point in time, that you could properly refer to them as dwelling safely. We are living in an hour when we can say this though, In the very near future, the world will wake up one morning and discover that there has been a dramatic change in the Middle East; because Israel will be on the move, fulfilling these various prophecies we have been studying. God is going to use Israel to literally secure her borders and put every Arab where he, or she is supposed to be. It is going to set the stage for those Arabs that are now very hostile toward the Jews, to suddenly realize, that from that moment on, resisting the Jews will be a fruitless endeavor. When those Arabs have finally been put to rest, after being made to see that their God is no longer with them, they will have to change their overall religious philosophy. That includes the Edomites, the Moabites and the Ammonites, all of which will be put to rest at that time: so that they no longer have that hostile attitude toward the Jews. Where you have little villages on the Golan Heights, the area taken from Syria in the six day war, presently having those fences around them, there will be no need for those fences after that. God had a reason for Ezekiel writing like this, “when my people Israel are dwelling safely.” Trinity Broadcasting will not agree with me; but do you think I am going to concern myself with what they say? Just watch and see if any of them ever preach this kind of a picture concerning these prophecies we have been looking at. They cannot; because they do not see the true picture. Just as the scripture says in Proverbs 29:18, “Where there is no vision (or revelation) the people perish.” Those who have a revelation of the word of God will not be running a program. You cannot run a preplanned, traditional program and be subject to the leadership of the Spirit of God both at the same time. I am aware that many times you can see and hear things on those denominational programs that make it look like those people are doing a great work of God; but if you know anything yourself, it does not take long for you to realize they are as blind as a bat spiritually. I am persuaded though, that there is going to be a little nucleus of people walking on God’s green earth from here to the end, that will have a good understanding and a clear picture in their mind’s, of how this world’s developments are going to begin to materialize as this age of grace to the Gentiles is phased out. This Ezekiel war we have been talking about has to be looked at as an international conflict. It is not just a matter of Israel taking care of the Arabs and putting them to rest in some soon-to-be conflict. That is only a prelude to the Ezekiel 38 war. This is somehow or other a Satanic, master minded plot, using another segment of the world, Persia, Ethiopia, Libya, and the house of Togarmah, which is Turkey. They are definitely going to try to pull off one of the sneakiest attacks against Israel that could ever be devised. They carefully set the stage; and then come like a cloud to take Israel by surprise. (Ezekiel 38:9-12) “Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee. (10) Thus saith the Lord God; It shall also come to pass, that at the same time shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought: (11) And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates, (12) To take a spoil, and to take a prey; to turn thine hand upon the desolate places that are now inhabited, and upon the people that are gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the midst of the land.” If there is any doubt in your mind as to who these people are, just pay attention to verses 16 and 17, and you will know for sure. (Ezekiel 38:16-17) “And thou shalt come up against My people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall be in the latter days, and I will bring thee against my land, that the heathen may know me, (I want to say this, I am a Christian, but I live in a nation that has become a heathen nation. This nation now has more crime committed every night than anywhere else in the rest of this world. Shame on a nation that has taken such an attitude on how to fight crime. We were going in and save those poor Somalias. If we had done the thing right thing, our leaders would have said, Go get that bunch of cutthroats first. Common sense would tell you, if you are going to make a difference in a situation like that, you have to go get that bunch of cutthroats out of the picture first. You had two things there that was creating this disaster. You had a natural drought. That made the food supply very short. Then that bunch of cutthroats, war lords if you please, was using what was left there to fatten their own gut and fill their own pocketbook. You know that is the truth. The poor Somalia children were caught between the crossfire and have become victimized by their own leaders. Yet out of these western, supposed-to-be civilized countries that pretend to be humanitarian on one standpoint, came leadership that did not know where to draw the line on what was humanitarian and what was not. I do not pretend to be a military strategist, but common sense tells me, if you go into a place like that and try to aid people under those conditions, that bunch of cutthroats will turn the whole thing in reverse and use all your efforts for their own selfish cause. That is exactly what they have done. They have master minded it to the point they are gradually turning many Somalia people against our very cause in being there. Well, I am glad God knows what He is doing here. It will not turn out like the Somalia thing has. No, this conflict is not going to be something designed by man. It was designed by God long before the prophet ever recorded it. He is going to get glory for Himself out of it from those who are heathen in His eyes.) when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes. (17) Thus saith the Lord God; Art thou he of whom I have spoken in old time by my servants the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those days many years that I would bring thee against them?” (As I said, You would have to go back somewhere in other Israeli writings to find that. It is not in our Bible anywhere else.) This is going to be after Israel has already taken their ancient land and secured their borders. It will be the Islamic world’s last chance to regain their religious prestige; but Russia has to play the part of being their guide, their military adviser, furnishing the technicians, and the military strategist that they feel necessary to conquer the Jews. God will force them to do it. “And I will bring thee against my land, that the heathen may know me.” Does that mean every king, every leader, every governor is going to be awakened? No. But it means out in this western, educated world, there are some people out here that at that time, God wants their attention. It is their personal attention God is after. He is not going to change the antichrist system nor the beast system in Europe. No. But there are some individual people that He is going to change their attitude as to the part they play and the role they participate in. That is why He has designed it this way. “When I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, (God is speaking directly to the ruler of this whole thing.) before their eyes.” (18) “And it shall come to pass at the same time when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord God, that my fury shall come up in my face. (19) For in my jealousy and in the fire of my wrath have I spoken, surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel.” Saints, you may think you have seen anger before; but when God gets angry things are going to shake.


HOW-AND WHY GOD WILL FIGHT AGAINST GOG AND MAGOG


As you read on through Ezekiel 38, you will see that it says nothing about the kings of the East: as you read in Revelation 16. Therefore this is not the great day of the Lord, the day of God’s wrath upon the whole earth, we are looking at in this chapter. This is a precise time when God is bringing one nation, which is the leader of other nations, which somehow or other have demanded the right to attack this little nation that they feel the Arabs have failed so miserably in all their efforts of trying to conquer them. Strictly because they are still Islamic, they feel they are being cheated by the events that will have transpired just prior to this time. As I said earlier, The Islamic people have been split into two camps for hundreds of years; but they are still Islamic nonetheless; and this bunch that comes with God will feel that it is their responsibility to finish up what the other bunch have tried to do and failed. Those of Saudi Arab and those who are basically Arabs of that nature, were the Soonites; but those of Persia and all that other category are the Shiites. The Shiites, as far as history is concerned, have always been in the forefront. They seem to set the stage. That is why when God takes care of the other Arabs with Israel and puts them to rest, He leaves this other camp to deal with; and He deals with it by doing this thing we see in Ezekiel 38. Now do not be mislead: This shaking is not God dropping an atomic bomb. God does not need an atomic bomb. He has enough destructive forces at His finger tips to outdo anything all your man made bombs put together could ever do. In a few hours time He can tear down what it has taken men hundreds of years to build. Do not try to minimize this thing saints: like gentile mind’s are so prone to do: When God said there will be a shaking in the land of Israel, and it is going to be known world wide, (20) “So that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all the men that are upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence, and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground,” He has a purpose in it at. When you read it like that, you might ask, Well what is the purpose of it? God gets glory from it. Do we not find in Exodus, how God brought two and some odd million people across the Red Sea by such a miraculous means? It plainly tell you there that a strong east wind blew all night long. When daylight came the next day the children of Israel looked at that body of water and there was a deep, dry chasm running right through there to the other side. God said to Moses, Come on, go across to the other side. The way some people respond to the word of God reminds me of a little story I heard somewhere. It is typical of how Gentile mind’s react to the things written in the Bible. They treat it as though it is all fiction. The story goes like this, There was a small boy who had modern parents that did not want him going to Sunday School, nor anywhere that he would learn anything about the Bible. Well the story goes, that there were new people that moved into the area and he became a close friend to one of their children. His friend asked him to go to Sunday School with him and he went. On that particular Sunday, the teacher was talking about the children of Israel leaving Egypt, and telling how God miraculously brought them through the Red Sea. The story is complete and the little boy goes home: where his mother asked, Johnny: What did you learn today? The little boy said, I don’t know. Now Johnny, come on and tell me what you learned today. Mommy, I heard one of the most fantastic stories I ever heard in my life. The teacher told us about how many years ago there was a large group of people in a foreign country, and they had been there for many years; and had been turned into slaves. After they had been mistreated for so long their God decided He wanted to lead them out of there. The day came, and He led them out of there; but they came to a large body of water out there in the desert that they could not cross. When Moses saw the predicament they were in, he called a halt and got on his walkie talkie and called to the rear for reserves; and up they came with modern equipment and cut down trees and everything. His mother interrupted him: Now Johnny, you know that is not the truth. To that He responded, Well if I had told you the truth, you would not have believed it. That is typical our Gentile world in this day and hour. God has to slap them up one side of the head, knock them down, step on them, and turn them over, before He gets their attention. In this day of modernism, and intellectualism God has this thing designed like this because He wants to get the attention of a few Gentiles. He has a purpose in it: to use them. Therefore as God does this thing, this is how He deals with these people, these troops that come into the land of Israel like a cloud. That is why I said, These troops are not coming in long convoys. Common sense would tell anyone that ten thousand troops leaving Russia, winding their way down through Turkey toward Israel, would be picked up by Israeli intelligence before they got very far. Keep in mind, we have intelligence satellites and we share this technology with Israel; therefore Israel would have it. Think where the Libyans are situated in North Africa. If they were to start across Egypt with a long convoy of military trucks, Israel will know it. The same with Ethiopia, and also coming from Persia. There is no way they can come that way. It tells you in another verse here, they will come quickly, like a storm. A storm is something that goes into effect quickly. What does verse 9 say, “Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land.” You do not have time to put a new roof on your house when you see a storm coming. The closest thing to this description that we have ever known, was when our troops went into Saudi Arabia to fight the Gulf War: We staged one of the largest military airlifts ever known in the annals of warfare. We put more equipment and men in the field in a matter of hours, than anyone had ever heard of at that point in time. When this Ezekiel war is fought, they will not be bringing a half million troops: you are dealing in the thousands. That is the way we have to look at it. I have no doubt this is going to be troops that are trained by Russian technicians, because their own intelligence, their own strategy is, If we are able to pull this off as a sneak attack, we have to do it so we are not in the air over an hour: lest Israeli intelligence pick it up and have them prepared. No they are not going to drop them in the midst of Jerusalem. Common sense would tell you that. They are going to pick a large rural area somewhere, so they can drop them on the ground, where there is the least amount of military defenses. Well that is exactly where God wants them. I have to say people who cannot believe what God did at the Red Sea, and at the Jordan River later, when Joshua crossed over and the waters walled up like a giant wall, and people who cannot believe the walls of Jericho fell straight down, not straight out, just wait a little while: God is going to shake your brain, and make your eyes turn over in your head when He begins to do some of these things we are dealing with in this message. I say all that because I am sick and tired of hearing all these modern philosophers so full of unbelief, as though they are so smart they could not possibly believe anything like what we are talking about: when actually God has their number; and knows exactly how to bring them all to an abrupt end. That is why God has saved the best until last. He is going to show some of it in the next few years as He shapes things up and gets it ready for the western world to move in, and the antichrist to fulfill his lot. Yes, imagine all these thousands of troops coming. I can see the air filled with giant cargo planes and doors suddenly flying open. There are literally hundreds of men following each other, waves upon waves of them. God waits until He has the right number in that drop zone; and then He makes His move. Let me just say this, When heaven opens up and God begins to rain a torrential rain on them, do not dare tell me that will not hamper their modern military equipment. Not only rain but great hailstones also, will be hitting them. (Ezekiel 38:22-23) “And I will plead against him (Gog and his band of invaders) with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone. (23) Thus will I magnify myself, and sanctify myself; and I will be known in the eyes of many nations, and they shall know that I am the Lord.” That is also going to take place in the day of God’s wrath at the end of the great tribulation: under the 7th vial judgment. The only thing is, Ezekiel does not give the weight of the hailstones that will fall, like Revelation does. Notice Revelation 16:21, what it says. “And there fell upon men a great hail out of heaven, every stone about the weight of a talent: and men blasphemed God because of the plague of the hail; for the plague thereof was exceeding great.” Whatever the weight of a talent is, that is what God will rain down upon wicked mankind at the end of this age; and from the announced results of this intervention on the part of God in the Ezekiel war, I would say the hailstones could be every bit as great as those under the 7th vial of Revelation 16. When the whole thing is over, only one sixth part of those invading forces will be left alive to return home. You can read that in 39:2. At the same time, in the 21st verse, it says, “And I will call for a sword against him throughout all my mountains.” Mountains here, does not mean geographical mountains. It is symbolic, meaning kingdoms of human beings. Listen carefully to me, and keep in mind what I said earlier about Tarshish being the old country of Spain. It was known in ancient times to Israel; because I was reading how it carried on commerce and trade with Israel before Israel was taken off into Babylonian captivity. The other regions of Europe were basically barbarous tribes of people. No nations were yet formed. That is why they are not named in this prophecy. But when it says, “And I will call for a sword against him throughout all my mountains, saith the Lord God: every man’s sword shall be against his brother,” That sounds contradictory the way we would normally read it. Do you know why? It would sound like everyone will get into it with each other. That is not the way it will be. You have to look at it from the standpoint, are we not all created brethren, as far as human beings concerned on this planet? Are you not also a created brother to the Russian people? Sure you are. You can claim that in any generation you want to. So when it says God will call for a sword throughout all his mountains, you are looking at people, every one of their swords against their brother. You are dealing with the created family of God, not the spiritual family of God. That is how you have to look at it. It does not mean anarchy is going to break out within the nations where God is calling for this thing. No, He is calling for a military strike out of those nations. Just take a good look at Europe: where she will be in that hour. Does it not tell you in Revelation 13 concerning the beast with ten horns (which we know is pointing to those ten nations of western Europe) that John saw it coming up out of the sea? This is the beast Daniel saw, and when he saw it coming up, he saw this little horn with the eyes of a man and a mouth speaking great things: how that little horn subdued three of the ten horns and so forth. It plainly tells you there in Revelation that the dragon gave that beast his seat and his power and great authority. It tells us also, that people will worship the dragon that gives his power unto the beast, saying, Who is equal to the beast, who is able to make war against the beast. Saints you are looking at western Europe in a future hour: when she is called upon to play a role, a role she refused to take part in there in Bosnia. When God calls upon her to play a role in this event, she will do it. It is not a case where western Europe goes into anarchy, drawing their swords against each other, even though it may sound like that: It is absolutely a situation where out of those nations there is to be a military strike against those who they have definitely tried to see as brethren: to bring about peace. Yes. Western Europe is definitely going to be faced with going into action. (Ezekiel 38:22) “And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone.” God does not need rockets, nevertheless as he pleads with these nations of Europe, He will let them use their rockets. Keep in mind, God is going to deal with the troops of Russia and all her allies that come into the land of Israel. He will do that with His own miraculous power, but He is going to definitely use the military capability of these nations in Europe to rain a devastating blow on the land of Magog. That is the way the Bible reads. All of that along with natural elements including hailstones, and fire, and brimstone. (23) “Thus will I magnify myself, and sanctify myself; and I will be known in the eyes of many nations, and they shall know that I am the Lord.” It is all yet to be. That is what this window on our chart lets us look toward. This is how we are to look toward the seventieth week of Daniel. It goes into motion on the heels of this Ezekiel war. There is absolutely no doubt that it will be just a few months, a year or two maybe until that week goes into effect. The effects of this thing no doubt brings the western world to natural man’s thinking: We have got to do something to avoid another event like this; or we are going to be shoved over the brink into total anarchy. That leaves mortal mankind with a dilemma; so they get together and do the only thing they know to do. They are not going to pick up the Bible and read it: to get their instructions. You know they will not do that. Neither will they get on their knees and say, Lord help me, I want to know what you want me to do next. No, they will never humble themselves to do a thing like that; and besides, God will already have put it in their hearts to play the role the Bible describes in the 17th chapter of Revelation. They will not look to God as men ought to look to Him for direction; but they will finally agree to call upon the pope of Rome to mediate what they are determined to do. In the meanwhile, God just simply allows Satan to fill their minds with all kinds of ideas; but in the final outcome what they do will fulfill the purpose of God exactly. His word cannot fail.


HOW TO LOOK AT ISAIAH CHAPTER 49


We will go back to Isaiah 49: where God, through the spirit of prophecy looks to the future of Jerusalem. The future of Jerusalem is revealed in these passages of scripture of these various prophecies. The old city, not the new city that has been built since the 20th century, which is on the higher land. The old city has definitely got to be rehabilitated and put in a proper condition for immigrant Jews from different areas of the world that are definitely to choose it for their dwelling place to fulfill scripture. They are not on the scene yet; but they are going to be coming sometime in the near future, as the clock of prophetic time moves to that point. We notice here this prophecy how the Spirit of God spoke on behalf of the geographical mountain, Mt. Zion, the spot where Jerusalem is built. The prophecy is speaking for the mountain, and in it the mountain is speaking in behalf of her inhabitants. Let us pick it up in the 14th verse, “But Zion said, The Lord hath forsaken me, and my Lord hath forgotten me.” Just think, In 70 A.D., August 10th, when Jerusalem fell to the Roman army, as the sun rose the next day the Roman army was gathering up the remaining healthy, work-able young Jews. The idea was, We will sell them on the world slave market. They were sold in Egypt, they were sold in Constantinople, and some were sold in Rome. From that time until a short time ago, Mt. Zion lay desolate as far as literal Jewish occupancy in a major role; but coming up is the city. God says this, (18) “Lift up thine eyes round about, and behold: all these gather themselves together, and come to thee (That is the new wave of immigrants that are soon to come and take up occupancy in Jerusalem.) As I live, saith the Lord, thou shalt surely clothe thee with them all, as with an ornament, and bind them on thee, as a bride doeth.” In other words, I will clothe you with Jewish inhabitants. Right now, old Jerusalem is populated by three fourths Arabs. Verse 17 says, “Thy children shall make haste; (meaning the future occupants) thy destroyers (which are the Arabs) and they that made thee waste shall go forth of thee.” (19) “For thy waste and thy desolate places, and the land of thy destruction, shall even now be too narrow by reason of the inhabitants, (meaning no place to live, no house to live in. In other words, There will be no vacancy signs everywhere: there will be no place to rent. It does not apply to the ground: there is plenty of ground; but no place to have a roof over their head’s.) and they that swallowed thee up shall be far away.” You have two verses there that tell you what the future is of old Jerusalem’s inhabitants. That should tell us there is no way God is going to leave three fourths of the occupants of old Jerusalem to be Arabs: to stay there demanding self government, we want self government, when God’s word says they are going to be moved out of there. That is why it is going to be interesting to watch the next few months, to see what does unfold before the eyes of the world. (Isaiah 49:20) “The children which thou shalt have, after thou hast lost the other, (That points back to 70 A.D.) shall say again in thine ears, The place is too strait for me: give place to me that I may dwell.” In other words, in this modern age, Can you not hear in that hour, when they have cleared out all the Arabs and the city is opened up for renovation and total reconstruction, they are rebuilding the city and here comes the new wave of immigrants; and as people begin to get a promise of this and that there will be so many more in line hoping for a place they will be saying, Look, I have been waiting here six months: When am I going to get my opportunity? I can just hear them now. That is exactly the way it was two years ago when the iron curtain finally fell and Russia agreed to let the Jews come back. Here they came by plane loads. It was not very long until the Israeli government was faced with a dilemma: There, stood Jews by the scores saying, We want a place to live. That is when, from the west we shipped boat loads of house trailers and they set up temporary housing in the outskirts of Jerusalem, on the outskirts of other villages that were already built. Do you know what though, those Russian immigrant Jews coming back to the land of their heritage, when the Israeli government wanted to put them in temporary housing, (which was those house trailers) they looked at those things like they were dog houses. I don’t want to live in that, when most everything in Israel is made of stone. That caused me to ask myself the question; and I would like the opportunity to ask them, Is this not a far cry better than what your forefathers, whom you brag about, that came out of Egypt under the leadership of Moses, came to? Every Sabbath meeting, you read all about that. They lived in tents of skins; so tell me, What is wrong with this? Well saints, that is this modern, 20th century mind for you: They could never live like their forefather’s lived. Therefore when you read this, you are going to see that the Jews are going to want their portion. That is what it is all about. (21) “Then shalt thou say in thine heart, Who hath begotten me these, seeing I have lost my children, and am desolate, a captive, and removing to and fro? and who hath brought up these? behold, I was left alone; these, where had they been?” That is yet just ahead of where we are in time. When that hour has come about, God has used Israel to set these prophetic pictures in shape, and when they cross over into Jordan and take all that and subdue it, you will have this verse we have just read. There is no doubt that miraculous display of God’s power is going to awaken the heart and the interest of another wave of Jews that are now standing back with questions, I just don’t know whether I want to get back there in that mess or not. Keep in mind, God has more ways than one of getting them out of Egypt: if you know what I mean. The point is, When God shows His power in all of this, that is going to cause another wave of Jews to say, I can see now, that God is with my people. I want to go back where my God is watching over His people. As they come back, they come back with a vision, I want to live where my forefathers lived. Naturally many of them will say, I want to live in Jerusalem. It will be time for Jerusalem to be renovated. This brings Isaiah 60 into the picture.


CHAPTER 60 OF ISAIAH GOES WITH CHAPTER 49


When you go to Isaiah 60, take a good look at it. Isaiah 60 brings you through this, AND through this, to the few months before this sets in. (pointing to chart just before the seventieth week of Daniel is set in motion) There, in Isaiah 60, what a beautiful picture you see. This makes me say, Lord: I know I don’t have to live until Jesus comes back to prove that I believe your word: I am ready to go any time you see fit to take me; but what I see here in your written word makes me want to say, Let me stick around to watch this picture unfold. Gentiles as a whole will not read this; because they just simply do not know whether it is true or not. They will run after everything else though: no matter how silly it is. When this 60th chapter unfolds, the 49th chapter is hanging right over the top of it. Jerusalem is in a stage of being rebuilt and being inhabited, the temple is in the process of being built; and we find God speaking on behalf of it. The 5th verse plainly tells how the forces of the Gentiles and the abundance of the sea shall be converted. That is not talking about spiritual conversion: It is talking about material things being converted, changed over to the destiny of serving Israel in her cause. In the 6th verse, we read this. (Isaiah 60:5-6) “Then thou shalt see, and flow together, and thine heart shall fear, and be enlarged; because the abundance of the sea shall be converted unto thee, the forces of the Gentiles shall come unto thee. (6) The multitude of camels shall cover thee, (What nation today has camels by the thousands? Saudi Arabia. If you had been watching the news as our soldiers first entered Saudi Arabia and they put them in the desert to begin their initial training, many times where they were dug in, off on the horizon, there would go two or three camels. They did not tell who they belonged to; but I bring it in, so keep in mind, Saudi Arabia and all that region across the Jordan River, and on back through here, (pointing to chart) for centuries was basically a Bedouin people. It was only after we came into the 20th century that many of these Bedouin people begin to decide that they were going to blend together and form a city environment. However out in the wastelands you still find the Bedouin people. There is where the camels are; so watch this. What will the multitude of camels cover? Mt. Zion.) the dromedaries of Midian and Ephah; (That is also out of Saudi Arabia.) all they from Sheba shall come: (That is Saudi Arabia also.) they shall bring gold and incense; and they shall shew forth the praises of the Lord.” What are they going to bring? Gold and incense. That is why I brought in Haggai 6: As the Lord prophesied about the temple in the end time, God told the people then, (Haggai 2:8-9) “The silver is mine, and the gold is mine, saith the Lord of hosts. (9) The glory of this latter house (That is the one to be built around the beginning of the seventieth week of Daniel. As you read in Revelation 11, you see that John was told to take a reed and measure it.) shall be greater than of the former, saith the Lord of hosts: and in this place will I give peace, saith the Lord of hosts.” Here, we see that there will be people coming out of Saudi Arabia, riding camel back: Not driving Cadillacs; and they will be bringing gold and incense for the temple. You know Saudi Arabia is one of the wealthiest oil countries in the world. Is that not true? I wish President Bush would have let the king of Saudi Arabia honor our troops with a certain amount of gift money like he pledged to do; but our president turned it down. Maybe it was supposed to be so, in order for all of it to come to this occasion. Maybe some of you did not know that; but it was in the News: They would not let him give our soldiers a reward of any kind of monetary value for their faithfulness in coming over there to fight. (7) “All the flocks of Kedar shall be gathered together unto thee, the rams of Nebaioth (You read those names in Genesis 25:12-13: they are the sons of Abraham by Keturah, his second wife.) shall minister unto thee: they shall come up with acceptance on mine altar, and I will glorify the house of my glory.” The house of His glory is His temple; and all of this pertains to the rebuilding of it. I say this again, There is no way you could send an emissary, a spokesman for Israel to Saudi Arabia today and have him say to them, Would you people of Saudi Arabia and of these regions round about be willing right now to contribute anything to the Israeli cause by building a temple on the spot where the Mosque of Omar presently stands? They would think such a person was crazy. Well I just have to say this, and I just feel like jumping up and down with joy, Just wait until God gets through using Israel like we have been talking: It will be a different picture altogether. That Mosque of Omar will no longer mean one thing to those Arabs. It was built in 600 and something A.D. They beautified it several times through the centuries; and they (the Arabs) claim Mohammad rode off from there into heaven. They want to claim he is coming back that way; but when God gets through using Israel the way these prophecies show that He will, they are going to have a different revelation. They will know that Mohammad has left them. The truth is, He is still in his grave. But when Jesus Christ left from there, He has never been in a grave since. He is coming back one of these days. That is why none of these characters on trinity broadcast want to deal with these prophecies; they just simply do not have the picture of it. But in front of you and me, and specially you young people, when God does these things, after it is over, watch how those Arabs are talking then. They will no longer care what happens to the Mosque of Omar; because it will be a reminder of a worthless cause. They will see that Israel now has the right to build their temple on that very spot of ground. Then, Here they come with their offerings of gold. Here comes sheep and goats from the very regions that right now would not give the Jews one dime. I have to take issue with anyone who tries to push this picture off over into the Millennium. The Jews are definitely not going to be building a temple after the Millennial rule is set up. They will be building the temple right in here. It has to be built for the seventieth week of Daniel. That is why John saw it here, in connection with the two prophets of Revelation 11: that will prophesy for the first 3 1/2 years of that week of years. If you follow the rest of this chapter on through, it will plainly tell you in the 10th verse, “And the sons of strangers shall build up thy walls.” That is why it is necessary for God to be magnified and sanctified before the eyes of the heathen. Out here in these Gentile nations, I can see young Gentile men, engineers that have the knowledge to know how such a building should be put together, volunteering their time and resources. They will have the necessary equipment. This is why when God has used Israel to set all this in motion, and that hour comes that there is to be a temple, there will be as many Gentiles working on it and helping build old Jerusalem as there will be Jews. You can find the type way back there in Kings: when King Solomon built that first temple. Out of the nations round about came professional tradesmen, architects, sculptors, tradesmen in all the crafts necessary. That was not all Jews working on it. They came from many different regions. This one that is yet to be built, is being built to get ready for the Messiah to occupy it. That is exactly how you have to see these things, “And the sons of strangers shall build up thy walls and their kings shall minister unto thee: for in my wrath I smote thee, but in my favour have I had mercy on thee.” That means there are some leaders that definitely are going to contribute something. Bro. Jackson, how is that going to be? Well we have a man up there now by the name Clinton, and this peace process they are getting ready to sign, he has already said he is ready to donate so much to the cause: to help establish their economy. Well if they are ready to do that now, what do you think they will do when God is seen in this thing that is on the verge of taking place? I have to say to the critics, You need not argue with me; because, if I live, and you live, there will come the day I can say, Did I not tell you it would be like this? I am sure of it; because the scriptures vindicate the whole picture.

1994-04-Looking-Through-Windows-of-Prophecy-Part-3

Looking Through Windows of Prophecy, Part 2 – 1994, February

Looking Through Windows of Prophecy, Part 2 - 1994, February

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

WE ENDED LAST ISSUE SPEAKING OF THE APPROXIMATE LENGTH OF TIME OF THE GENERATION JESUS SAID WOULD LIVE TO SEE THE END OF ALL WE HAVE BEEN SPEAKING OF; SO THAT IS WHERE WE WILL PICK UP TO CONTINUE ON WITH THE MESSAGE.


A CUP OF TREMBLING A BURDENSOME STONE


As you think about the negotiations that have been taking place between the Jewish leaders and the PLO leaders, you cannot help but think about that scripture in Zechariah 12:2. To me this is one of the keys as to how to look at the time factor involved in all of this. With the Jewish government having agreed to what they have, concerning the Gaza Strip and the Jericho areas, the next thing any group of Arabs within the land can begin to squawk about, is the fate of those Arabs in the old city. Since the Israeli government is not going to let those Arabs leave the old city and go down here where they can have their freedom, (They all have to stay where they are.) Do you think those Arabs in the old city are just going to sit there, with Israeli troops walking the streets patrolling them, keeping them from carrying on their wild escapades like they have been doing in the past? No sir. Those Arabs are going to demand the same freedom that has been given to those in Gaza and Jericho. That is why, in the Jerusalem Post even today, many Israelis are saying that their government has sold them down the drain: that their government has actually brought them that much closer to a war which is inevitable. By doing what they have agreed to do, they have literally lit a fuse to a bomb that will blow things wide open when it goes off. Having said that, let us read this verse in Zechariah 12:2. “Behold, I will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling unto all the people round about, (That is talking about Arabs.) when they shall be in the siege both against Judah and against Jerusalem.” Saints, you have to look at it in this sight, It is going to be the Arabs who are going to begin to stage the demonstrations: saying, We want our freedom too. We want our self autonomy like the others. That was even stated by Peres, that they would not even discuss Jerusalem at the same time these other two areas were brought into the peace plan. However the Arabs representing those around about will no doubt begin to create a situation that will bring on something God will use. As I have said many times, He will create an opportunity, or we will say, a condition, that will open up the way for certain other prophecies to come forth in fulfillment. Right from the very area of old Jerusalem, which the scriptures declare is to be the Capital city, conditions will arise that will allow the Jews to reclaim it, renovate it, and build the temple. Right now you have a population of three fourths Arabs that own the property and control its environment. I have to say though, Do not try to picture Jesus coming back to rule and reign from there with three fourths of that old city being Arabs. It is going to be Jews when He comes. The nations can howl, That’s not fair! all they want to; but God will see that His word is fulfilled. Let us just watch this thing unfold. God will cause Jerusalem to become a cup of trembling some time in the near future. I have illustrated it like this, by using a glass of water. It means when the time has come that God wants the entire world to get involved with Jerusalem, this means there is something important about this city. It means when the time has come that God wants prophecies, events and conditions to be fulfilled, the first order of business is, He lets it become a cup of trembling. Did you ever see a person who is extremely nervous try to handle a cup of coffee or something? You cannot help but expect it to be spilled. Imagine the Arab world then, the very minute they begin to inflame the situation, that is exactly what Jerusalem will become. When that time comes, the more they act up, the worse it will get. When God makes Jerusalem a cup of trembling to those round about, it will produce the prophesied results regardless of who wants old Jerusalem to remain in Arab hands instead of Jews’ hands. Therefore having established that much, let us take it beyond that point. (3) “And in that day will I make Jerusalem a burdensome stone for all people: all that burden themselves with it shall be cut in pieces, though all the people of the earth be gathered together against it.” Notice two things. First, to those around about a cup of trembling. That is the Arabs. They are the ones who want complete control of it. Realizing this we say, If it is already the people of the world, politicians, who have more or less put pressure on Israel to do with this Gaza Strip and the area of Jericho what they are doing already, do not think those same world politicians will not say to Israel, Now do the same for the Arabs in Jerusalem. They will say, You can afford to give up territory. Verse 3 therefore, is not talking about the Arabs. This is where God lets it become an international problem. Since the world in general is thumbs down on the Jews, then God is going to make that city a burdensome stone to all of them. Most of the leaders of our nation like to be identified in some way with some system of religion; and I suppose they attend services from time to time if not regularly; but do they go there to hear the Bible preached? Very few do in this present society. They go to hear some kind of sermon based on statistics, world conditions, basically talking about the economic side, the social side, the political side, leaving the Lord completely out of the picture most of the time, yet carrying it all under the name of the gospel of Jesus Christ. The United Nations body has had its nose stuck in everything from the Gulf War and Bosnia, to the Arabs, and the whole process of resolving differences in the Middle East. Well just take another look at this. If God says He will break them to pieces, then keep in mind, In front of us somewhere there has to be something come up that does not just bring Jerusalem into a mild breakfast party relationship between a few leaders of the west and a few politicians in Israel and a few Arab leaders that will all be over with in a certain length of time. No Sir. I am convinced this is where the thing is really ignited. It is God. He has it planned this way. What is a burdensome stone? It sure is something more than just a little pebble. This is symbolic language speaking of something like a huge rock that has to be moved. In the eyes of the world, it will be something that is obstructing progress. That is what it all boils down to. In the political and social realm, until someone decides what we will do with Jerusalem, it is going to be there on the world’s political table. It is going to be a political stone, an obstruction to peace in the Middle East, which they want to see come about; but they want it to favor the Arab population just as much as the Jewish population; and that is contrary to the picture we see in the Bible. They could not care less about the prophetic picture laid out so clearly for those who want to see it. Just imagine a giant rock that has to be moved before progress can be made. Here comes every world leader sending his envoy, his magistrate, this and that, everyone sitting ready to toss his two cents worth into the pot, (so to speak) trying to figure out how to move the thing. Try to imagine a burdensome stone and it is so big you cannot get around it, you cannot get it on your shoulders, but the thing has to be moved. That is exactly what is in front of us. World leaders are going to want to stick their two cents in, but eventually God is going to get tired of their clamoring around, and their fussing and dictating what the Jews can and can not do, and what they must let the Arabs have. Right then is where God is going to create a condition, and though the entire world will absolutely want to do something to try to force Israel to bend and compromise, God said He would break them to pieces. That is not talking about the battle of Armageddon either. That is talking about the fact that God will do something to tear their political agreements all apart, so that when it is all over only the Jews will be left. The Jews will be the only ones who will know exactly what to do with this burdensome stone; because to her, it is the rock of her foundation, and her faith. It is where God placed His name, the place where the Jews are to eventually build a temple, a temple that God has said would be His house. Naturally the Arabs are going to begin to rally together saying, We will not stand for this! They are going to begin to demonstrate, create terrorism as a retaliation against the Jews, and all such like; but I cannot help but believe, God can remove Peres and Rabin when He needs to, in order to make way for that which is prophesied. Politicians will fail; but God’s word will never fail.


WHEN ISRAEL AGAIN DOES VALIANTLY


When I look back at Numbers 24, there are four prophecies in the Bible, that begin to come into focus. Old Balaam, when he was called by Balak to come and curse Israel, tried three times; but God would not let him curse them. Finally he said to Balak, Come, I want to show you what these people are going to do to your people in the later days. He was talking to old Balak’s people, which were the Moabites. Turn to Numbers 24. It will plainly tell you what it would be. Let’s turn there, verse 17. “I shall see him, but not now: I shall behold him, but not nigh: there shall come a Star out of Jacob, and a Sceptre shall rise out of Israel, and shall smite the corners of Moab, and destroy all the children of Sheth. (18) And Edom shall be a possession, Seir also shall be a possession for his enemies; and Israel shall do valiantly.” That takes in this whole area right in here. (pointing to map) They did not take it in the six day war; but I am saying right now, The very minute the world begins to put the finger of pressure on the Israeli people, demanding that they negotiate and give these Arabs in the old city the same domestic, social freedom that they have the others, there is where God no doubt will draw the line. Since it is not going to go the way the world leaders think it is, God uses it to create a condition to disunite the western world in their opinions and decisions. Actually He blows them completely out of the picture. God is definitely going to cause Israel to have to go alone. When she does, Israel is going to see one alternative. She has to put this Arab problem to sleep once and for all. The only way they can do it is to attack it from every area where any military or political opportunities can influence these people. There is no doubt that Israel will be compelled to go much beyond any expectations; because by that time over here is where a lot of the pressure is going to come from. Just keep in mind, as I said before, The Palestinian Arabs that live in the land today, and have for centuries, came from the other side of the river: Not only out of Saudi Arabia, but out of all this region. Eventually Israel is going to be compelled because of circumstances, to put them back there where their ancestors came from. The world will not like it; but they will have God on their side. Keep this Numbers prophecy in mind because it sets the agenda. Then let us go to Jeremiah 48:47 for another. In Jeremiah, we have all these major people that are in the country of Jordan mentioned. “Yet will I bring again the captivity of Moab (Notice this.) in the latter days, saith the Lord. Thus far is the judgment of Moab.” It says, In the latter days. That is why I said earlier, We have been living in the last days ever since these various verses of prophecy have been applicable through time. However as we are now closer to the end we can say, We no doubt are living in the latter days these prophecies point to. From this point to the year 2000 is only seven years. Then if prophetic time figures out so the two days of Hosea 6:2 runs out between 2004 and 2005, as we have every reason to believe it will, many of these things we are talking about will take place at a very rapid pace. Israel will be revived in the first half of the seventieth week of Daniel; so all of this has to take place before then. Israel will not be taking any land after that week starts. Well we have Hosea 3:4-5 to look at next. The same prophet that prophesied about the two days of prophetic time wrote what we are going to read here. “For the children of Israel shall abide many days without a king, and without a prince, and without a sacrifice, and without an image, and without an ephod, and without teraphim.” That has certainly been fulfilled. From the very beginning, 728 B.C., when the ten tribes were taken into captivity, that ended Israel’s ability to ever have a king. Then we come on through time, and 2000 years ago when the two southern tribes were destroyed, that took away their priesthood. It took away their sacrifice. It brought an end to their temple worship. For almost 2000 years now, Israel has literally abided without having any of these Biblical things for national identity, both religiously and politically; but notice verse 5, what it says.”Afterward shall the children of Israel return, and seek the Lord their God, and David their king; and shall fear the Lord and His goodness in the latter days.” That prophecy is for the latter days; so you do not necessarily apply it way back in the B.C. period. It is not a prophecy that speaks of causing national restoration. It is a prophecy that looks through all of this to a precise time. Therefore if these things that have been neglected, are to be gradually restored, then we have to realize they have to have Jerusalem under secure political control, and especially the temple spot; for there and there alone is where they can reconstruct the alter, animal sacrifice, and prepare to build the temple, to get the stage set and ready for the coming of their Messiah. With that in mind, let us try to look at this objectively. As Israel is going to be compelled to do something about taking this land beyond the Jordan, at the same time that opens up the northern regions of Jordan (That is what it is called today.) for the eventual immigration of another influx of Jews to come into the land of Israel. We just have to let the scriptures speak; so open your Bible’s to Zephaniah 2, and notice what it says about Moab, when Israel does that. We are looking at the 9th verse. “Therefore as I live, saith the Lord of hosts, the God of Israel, Surely Moab shall be as Sodom, and the children of Ammon as Gomorrah, even the breeding of nettles, and saltpits, and a perpetual desolation: the residue of my people shall spoil them, and the remnant of my people shall possess them.” Why is it to be so? Look at verse 10. “This shall they have for their pride, because they have reproached and magnified themselves against the people of the Lord of hosts.” None of this matches the notion most of our world leaders have about Jordan. Look at verse 11. “The Lord will be terrible unto them: for He will famish all the gods of the earth; and men shall worship Him, every one from his place, even all the isles of the heathen.” Keep in mind as I stress this, that right now the Gentile world is sound asleep. I am talking about the religious realm. I am not talking about the drunk out on the street. I am talking about the religious category of Gentile people that think they know so much about the Bible: They are sound asleep. Naturally if you were to ask some Biblical scholar today, one of the seminary category, What do you think about this verse of scripture? He would probably say something like this, Well, if there is such a thing as the Millennium, I believe that is when He will fulfill that. Then I would have to say, You poor, spiritually blind character, you have prophecy after prophecy that tells how it is going to be; and you seem to think you can just play around with them. If there was any reason whatsoever for these prophecies being written, it was to give the true people of God a picture of what is on out ahead. Therefore there is no room for theories. When the Millennium is set up, the prophetic time factor has ended.


PROPHECIES OF THE BIBLE CANNOT FAIL


Well we all know there is going to be a temple built; and if there is going to be a temple built, Israel is going to need money. They may not know where the money will come from; but God knows exactly where it is, and how to put it in the hands of those Jews. He has already told us in His book where much of this money will come from. Right now, the way the political picture looks (to those who do not know the scriptures) those people will say, Well it will sure be a miracle if God gets anything out of there. That is what He is talking about in the 7th chapter of Micah. It is pointing to the same period of time that Numbers 24 is pointing to. God says this, In that day He will show unto Israel great and marvelous things, insomuch that the heathen shall come crawling out of their holes with their hands over their mouth, confounded at all their might. Just think of our own nation, how less than three years ago we were in a war, in the Gulf, fighting a war that Hussein himself said would be the mother of all wars. You know about all the high tech weaponry, and how God allowed that weaponry, and those men and women to obtain such a victory. Hussein referred to us as infidels and said you will wallow in your own blood. What a boast. Yet God reversed it. Only a little over a hundred casualties in the whole thing. Some of them did not die in the desert. Some of them died in a warehouse where they were sleeping when a missile hit. My point of illustration is this, Suppose God had reversed that the other way and all that high tech weaponry would have failed? How many of our troops would have come home from there? Think of it, Micah 7, the heathen. That is not the poor bush man in the African Congo jungle. It is this big man walking on Wall Street with his securities, and with his capacity to trade and invest in stocks and bonds. Politicians and world leaders who like to sit around their conference tables with their high priced liquor and champagne, are the ones God’s word declares He will confound, when they behold what He does for Israel. That is why I have to believe as time is getting shorter, it means the pressure is building up. God is going to honor His word. As He does, and as He begins to turn Israel loose, as it says in Numbers, Israel will do valiantly. Where will that be? On the field of battle of course. Therefore as God begins to show His power on their behalf, in just a few short days of time the world leaders will be astonished. I get excited every time I think about how all of this is going to turn out. Every time I think how God gave us victory in the Gulf War, I just have to rejoice. There were times that tears would come to my eyes and I would think, God, Thank You! When the bombs and rockets began to drop and they began to see on the screen how we could put them right through the front door, some had to take another look at their position. Oh Bro. Jackson, they said they did not all go through the front door. Enough went through the front door that it got the job done; and that is what counts; so do not argue with me. It got the job done a lot quicker than anyone thought it would. At first they thought the thing might last a year or so. At first they thought there would be thousands buried in the desert. Well not a one was buried in the desert. The point is, God has a way of causing mankind on this earth to look toward Him, when He gets ready. I believe that is what He is getting ready to do. He is just getting everything in place, getting everyone interested in the great drama that is about to unfold. When He does turn that little nation loose, I can see the generals sitting back planning the strategy. When God said He will famish the gods of the earth, the number one god of the Middle East is the religion of the Islamic Arab. That is the one religion that is causing all the ruckus over there. Do you know why? Because all these Islamic Arabs are saying the promise of Abraham was not to Isaac, it was through Ishmael. That is why Mohammad was a descendant of Ishmael. They believe in Jesus. They believe in Moses to; but they are saying Mohammad was God’s last prophet and there will never be another one. That is all a lie of the devil. It is a counterfeit to Judaism, just as Catholicism is a counterfeit to true Christianity. Therefore it remains to be seen just exactly how God will deal with those round about Jerusalem, who are of that Islamic belief. I will say again, The Middle East nations are overrun with those who look to Mohammed as their prophet; but they are not all Arabs. Let me explain this. Of those round about, that Jerusalem will become a cup of trembling to, Jordan ranks number one. They are true Arabs. They are the number one opposers who are true Arabs. Then those on down into Saudi Arabia are also Arabs. They are all descendants of Abraham by the other side; but the Egyptians are not Arabs. How many of you know that? It is true they are under the same religion. The Libyans, who Khadafi is the head of, are not Arabs. They are just plain Libyans. The Persians and Iranians are not Arabs. Neither are the Turks, even though they are under the Islamic belief. But as I say that, keep in mind, God knows exactly what He is doing. When He turns Israel loose, and she begins to do these gallant, valiant feats and come out victorious over her enemies, do you know what that is going to cause the Arabs in those regions round about to realize? That there is no way they can resist Israel. He is our brother. One of these days off down in Saudi Arabia, which is one of the wealthiest nations on earth, as you read Isaiah 60, it plainly tells you when the time comes, that Israel will start building their temple, out of that region of Saudi Arabia here comes gold, and incense to be offered upon the alter at Jerusalem. Israel could never get one penny out of Saudi Arabia without some drastic change. The political stage is not set yet. Somewhere in front of us, as God uses Israel to slaps that Islamic belief, it will not take them ten weeks, ten months, nor ten years. They will do in hours what we normally have had to do in months because it is God’s way of showing His mighty power as He shows unto Israel great and marvelous things. I can see Saudi Arabia. I can see the Jordanian Arabs. I can see them all begin to say, You know, it looks like Isaac was the one after all. At that time, out of Saudi Arabia, Dedan and Sheba, here comes gold. Translate that into oil dollars, OPEC dollars is what it is all about. Also out of the regions of another, you read in Isaiah 60, here comes goats, here come camels, here come sheep. Why? For Israel to offer upon the alter. I dare any politician to go to Jordan today, to any of those Bedoin tribes and say, Would you like to donate a few sheep or goats to Israel? She is getting ready to offer sacrifice to Jehovah. They will say, Are you crazy? Who do you think you are talking to? When you read these prophecies, and you see how things are right now, you cannot help but realize it is an impossibility for such a things to be fulfilled, unless something happens to change attitudes and beliefs of those who are included in the prophecies. There has to be a key that unlocks the mystery and changes the heart’s of those who now oppose Israel. It is very obvious that their heart’s are not going to be changed by politics and diplomacy. Their heart’s are going to be changed only as God uses Israel on the field of battle, to show those Arabs one more time, that never again will they bow to your dictates, and to your terroristic tactics. Israel will push her borders back far enough they can get the rest of them with their airplanes. It would not surprise me if they are the ones that will put old mad man Hussein to sleep forever. When it is all over, then Saudi Arabia, the Moabite people and all those regions will no longer be trouble makers. Let me just make a few more comments along this line while we are talking about this. Keep in mind, World leaders today have shown their intelligence, their political power as well as their military initiative; but if for some reason God uses Israel to do marvelous things over there, He is doing it for two strategic things: opening the hearts of the Arab world and these people in these regions to get ready to contribute their part in Isaiah 60, and at the same time, He is also doing it to touch a few heart’s among Gentile nations. Not that He is going to touch everybody, but to touch a few heart’s. When the time does come for the old city of Jerusalem to be rebuilt, and then inhabited by Jews instead of Arabs, Isaiah 60 plainly tells you the sons of strangers, those that actually were enemies of Israel through other decades, will come and help build up her walls. That has to be a reality and not just words we read in the Bible. When in our present world right now, we have no professional architects, nor engineering and construction men that have the capital, the equipment, and other means to look toward Israel and do one earthly thing in connection with renovating that city, we still know God is going to bring it all about somehow. When God gets ready to get them involved, then He will show His hand in present day world event and affairs of mankind. He will cause it to be done in a way that people realize, God is with Israel. Then you are going to see professional tradesmen, and actually people of every walk of life suddenly become very anxious to do something to help Israel. That is why I have said that when that time comes for God to do these things, people of the rest of the world are absolutely going to begin to realize that their religious beliefs are not worth two cents. As I look across into the Orient and can see Buddhism, I see Confucianism and all those kinds of religions, yet think of the Orient: When that hour comes, people to the ends of the earth are made to realize that the God of heaven is with the Jewish nation. I cannot help but see rich, Oriental, professional construction men getting into the picture; because even right now Japanese are bidding against our own construction men for jobs in the country, or anywhere else we have sent them. That is why I have to say, Was it not so when King Solomon built his temple, that help came from all sorts of places? Professional tradesmen of every profession out of all the various nations around about, contributed and volunteered. That is why I have to say, God knows exactly how to set the stage, to get all of this done. In Haggai 2, Haggai prophesied when he looked at the little temple that was being dedicated, and saw how those Jews were very hurt because it was not as large as they remembered the ancient one to be, saying, (3-9) “Who is left among you that saw this house in her first glory? and how do ye see it now? is it not in your eyes in comparison of it as nothing? (4) Yet now be strong, O Zerubbabel, saith the Lord; and be strong, O Joshua, son of Josedech, the high priest; and be strong, all ye people of the land, saith the Lord, and work: for I am with you, saith the Lord of hosts: (5) According to the word that I covenanted with you when ye came out of Egypt, so my spirit remaineth among you: fear ye not. (6) For thus saith the Lord of hosts; Yet once, it is a little while, and I will shake the heavens, and the earth, and the sea, and the dry land; (7) And I will shake all nations, and the desire of all nations shall come: and I will fill this house with glory, saith the Lord of hosts. (8) The silver is mine, and the gold is mine, saith the Lord of hosts. (9) The glory of this latter house shall be greater than of the former, saith the Lord of hosts: and in this place will I give peace, saith the Lord of hosts.” He knows exactly where every OPEC dollar is. He knows exactly where every professional contractor that is a professional tradesman in stone masonry, pile driving and all of those things are. The Jewish society back in the land today, when they lived in their nations of dispersion, did not themselves take up those different trades. They have been teachers, professors of science, doctors, lawyers, bankers, real estate brokers and all such like. That has been their profession; but to be construction contractors that have built big buildings, that was never in their mind. You just have to realize that every one of these prophecies provide us with a window we can look through to an era of time when God begins to gather together everything necessary to put the whole picture together. We are getting close to that time. You can depend on that. Nothing mankind does in the meanwhile, will hinder God’s plan and purpose. He has a time for every bit of it to be fulfilled.


THE SEVENTIETH WEEK OF DANIEL


Let us go to the 12th chapter of Zechariah. We have titled this message, “Looking Through Windows of Prophecy;” and we have prophetic scriptures written in different places that we have been looking at, which finally points us right to the seventieth week of Daniel. This is not to give you the idea that this is where these scriptures are fulfilled; but realizing that they each belong to a certain period of time, it is how we look through these windows of prophecy toward the next episode that really makes the difference. These scriptures here are actually what set the stage for there to be a statehood of Israel in 1948. Then it was these scriptures here, how we see them, that begin to show forth the developing of the state, which has brought it up to the present hour. However all these prophecies are written with certain details that to the average reader seem to be so unimportant. That is why I said when we started out, that you simply cannot write these scriptures out on a sheet of paper, drop them in a container and shake it up, and then draw one out and expect it to be fulfilled just any time. Sure the Lord said He would do thus and so; but each scripture has a time and sequence involved in its fulfillment. You cannot yourself put one scripture in front of the other one because they unfold in a precise order. That is why, by the time the world and nation of Israel has reached the hour that she goes into the week of Daniel, and the world’s antichrist signs an agreement with this nation of Israel, that starts the week, all these scriptures will have been fulfilled, and in place. In place means they are in the process of being fulfilled and the end purpose is then inevitable. Let us notice here in the 12th chapter of Zechariah, starting in verse 2. We have read it already; but notice where the emphasis is. “Behold, I will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling unto all the people round about, when they shall be in the siege both against Judah and against Jerusalem.” We brought out already, what verses 2 and 3 pertain to; so let me just say, In 1967, when the six day war was fought, Israel, in six days, took all this area over here and pushed her borders to the Jordan River, to the Dead Sea, and all the way down to the Red Sea toward Egypt. She took the Gaza Strip, which is territory she is supposed to have. When you read the 2nd chapter of Zephaniah, you see that the land of the Philistines, which was the Gaza Strip, is destined to be Judah’s inheritance in these last days. At no other time in biblical times had Israel ever been able to conquer the Philistines to the extent that they could control the land. The Philistines were always there, ready to pounce on Israel and cause her all kinds of problems; but in the last days, God has said she would smite that land and this land would become a possession of the house of Judah. This area down in here is all the actual inheritance of Judah, the tribe of Judah, for these last days. The fact that Israel and the P.L.O. have agreed upon basic principles of peace in connection with areas of Jericho and the Gaza Strip, ought not be a cause for alarm; it may turn out to be only a means of hurrying the process of what these prophecies we have been looking at will require. The entire endeavor has actually brought the anti peace Israelis, and the anti peace Palestinians (who do not want to settle just for autonomy in the land) to the forefront. The anti peace Palestinians want to hold out for the complete destruction of the statehood of Israel. Therefore with those two extremes in the picture, we could very well see this present thing backfire in the near future; and actually be a means of setting these prophesied events in order. We need to notice the wording of some of these prophesies in the Bible and allow the Holy Spirit to put a picture in our mind’s of how to look at them. Take verses 4- 6 of the 12th chapter of Zechariah for instance: where it speaks of how God in that day will make the governors of Judah like a fire in a sheaf of grain and a torch in a pile of wood. In other words, somewhere there is an hour of time coming, that these present leaders in the statehood of Israel are going to be replaced by another category of governors who will not be giving their ears to western diplomatic influence every time the sun comes up. They are going to be compelled to do something that will cause them to fulfill these scriptures. “In that day, saith the Lord, I will smite every horse with astonishment, and his rider with madness: and I will open mine eyes upon the house of Judah, and will smite every horse of the people with blindness. (5) And the governors of Judah shall say in their heart, The inhabitants of Jerusalem shall be my strength in the Lord of hosts their God. (6) In that day will I make the governors of Judah like an hearth of fire among the wood, and like a torch of fire in a sheaf; and they shall devour all the people round about, on the right hand and on the left: and Jerusalem shall be inhabited again in her own place, even in Jerusalem.” In 1967, though the army of Israel took old Jerusalem, they did not drive out the inhabitants; and neither did they bring the Mosque of Omar to ruins. As we have already pointed out, three fourths of the old city is inhabited by Arabs; and the Mosque of Omar is sacred to them; so Israel cannot just move in and fulfill these scriptures without something first taking place to make that a necessary measure. Otherwise they would be faced with a holy war; and they would have the whole world against them. We can say this, God just did not permit them to go that far in 1967; but in the near future, maybe the next go around of fulfilling these prophecies, there is definitely going to be something take place that will allow the old city Jerusalem to be inhabited by Jews. That is why you have to read Isaiah 49, and Isaiah 60; because somewhere leading up to the time the week of Daniel is to start, they go together. When the temple is in the process of being built, so will the walls of old Jerusalem be going through a rehabilitation process; and the old city is in the process of being renovated, getting it ready for that Messianic appearance; and the inhabitants of Jerusalem will no longer be Arabs: but Jews. They will be Jews of a lineage that goes back to ancient times. David was of the tribe of Judah, and the inhabitants of Jerusalem were basically related to the lineage of King David. Now let us look at the 7th verse. “The Lord also shall save the tents of Judah first, that the glory of the house of David and the glory of the inhabitants of Jerusalem do not magnify themselves against Judah.” In the 1967 war, Israel (basically the tribe of Judah) pressed her borders so that she not only reaches up into Lebanon and over here into the Golan Heights; but also way down south. Well right now they are being pressured to compromise in these certain areas we have been talking about; but God’s word says He will cause the tents of Judah to be restored: which actually means He will restore the territory and the eventual occupancy of the entire area of what Judah occupied in former days. All of the land is to be restored to its original Jewish inhabitants, even every tribe. We just have to understand that God had a reason for Judah being restored first. He said He would save Judah first, then He would bring Ephraim. When He said He would establish the tents of Judah, that means their place of occupancy. He guarantees that, and that is what they have been doing since 1967 as more and more Jews begin to move outward into the various isolated areas of the old area of Judah. It is actually Jews going to various areas they feel like their lineage entitles them to possess. We notice here that is why the world keeps telling the leaders of Israel, you are moving people out into occupied territory. Well it is true: It is occupied in the sense that it is beyond the boundaries the United Nations relegated; but you have to understand that Israel was forced by her attackers to occupy the rest; and we can say this was God’s way of giving Judah her rightful area of occupancy. To rightfully understand that, here is what it all means, if they had taken Jerusalem in the 1967 war as they did all this other area, there would have been many Jews, that out of sentimental longings to see the old city rebuilt, and also to see the temple rebuilt, and to be able to live near where the temple is, that would have made this their primary vision and all their efforts would have been devoted to that. Therefore if that is what they had devoted all their time and effort to, then many of those Jews would have stopped thinking about the rest of what God has ordained for them to do, and would have gone strictly to the city; and we know that is not what God wanted. We can say this, if He is going to use this tribe of Judah to be the beginning of His plan of restoration to the nation as a whole, then she is definitely going to have to have territorial conquests whereby the actual heritage of Judah be given first a primary opportunity to settle in the regions of Judah where they feel they belong. By doing it that way, He avoided this thing of people putting their priorities and personal feelings above His will and purpose. That is what He is actually talking about here. In other words, if people would have gone to Jerusalem first, they would have said, Who wants to think about that wasteland out there? I am glad I live in Jerusalem. You know how people are. People in general are all alike: we always look for the easy way out. That is man’s way of doing things. Therefore God by His own word, has let it be written like this: He will save the tents of Judah first, meaning the area of their ancient occupancy. They have had twenty some years to establish themselves; but the world has not been content with allowing Judah to keep building and building and building. Time and time again they have been forced to promise western leaders they will not press for any more occupancy or tents or dwellings in the occupied areas. Nevertheless if God’s word says He will restore her first, then God means to do exactly that. I just have to believe that in the time that has come and gone Judah and her occupants that are destined to be influential in fulfilling these prophecies have had the opportunity to do it. Now it no doubt is getting close to the time when the Lord is saying, It is time to start working on Jerusalem. Anyhow, regardless of what the situation looks like today, especially in the light of this peace proposal the Israeli’s and Arabs have signed, here is where it all stands presently. When you look at this thing they have signed, this agreement to allow the Palestinian Arabs in the Gaza Strip area, and the Arabs living in the Jericho territory to have self government, it does not mean Israel is giving up her borders there. She will keep her military there; and she will still keep the authority to control that area of land for her own safety. It just simply means those Arabs that are now living there, will have their own city mayors, their own police department, and their own courts to settle their own civil and judicial affairs among the Arab people. But as far as them owning the land and becoming a state, that is out of the question. Israel has not promised anything like that. However it was mentioned in the beginning of this process, that sooner or later Jerusalem will be contested for; and I believe that is a sure thing. If this present thing is worked out and eventually put into force, and things settle down to the point where there is peace among the Palestinian Arabs in those two areas where they are allowed to have self government, there is no doubt whatsoever the Arabs in old Jerusalem are going to begin to demand that they be given equal treatment: so they may also be allowed to govern themselves. Now if that is the way it turns out, and if we are as close to the end as it looks like we are, here is what this would amount to. First that would require the Israeli police force to vacate the old city, so the Arabs could have their own police force and rule themselves in the old city just like the other areas in discussion. Yet right here in these prophecies we have been reading, it plainly tells us, that in that day He (God) will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling unto all the people round about. That means when the time comes close that God wants this city to change occupants, so the city can be renovated and become inhabited by Jews to make ready for their Messiah, these particular prophecies like Numbers 24, Zephaniah 2:8-11, Jeremiah 48:47, are going to become activated. No doubt somewhere there will come about such a pressure that Israel will realize she is definitely going to have to take this thing in hand and stop listening to western leaders. Then there will only be one thing she can do: She will make a military sweep across here and she will put this Jordanian country, and all these other people to rest. When I say rest, it means God is going to cause Israel to give them such a military licking, not over a prolonged period of time, but it will be a war of such miraculous proportions these Palestinian and Jordanian Arabs cannot help but realize that God is with the Jewish people. That hour is coming; therefore I would like to stress to every believer, whether you read this or hear it on tape, or view it on video, When Israel reaches that hour when these scriptures are fulfilled, this is going to put Israel in complete control of the whole Middle East, and everything that pertains to her ancient borders. It will not be some long drawn out affair. Not at all. Just one giant sweep and Israel is going to put her enemies to rest. God is going to work and do it in such a way that it will fulfill what it says in Zephaniah, verses 8-11: that in that day He will famish the gods of the earth. Now Bro. Jackson, why do you keep stressing that? All because there is no way this side of heaven you will ever get Saudi Arabia and the people in this part of old Jordan to ever contribute one earthly thing to the rebuilding of the temple in Jerusalem, as it says in Isaiah 60, unless God first does something to get that Islamic belief out of the picture. This belief that the Islamic people have today, is not a belief of those people in ancient times. Those people in ancient times had the same belief toward Jehovah that the Jews did. The only thing was, they still held on to the idea that the covenant that God promised Abraham back in Genesis, was to come through Ishmael, and not through Isaac. That is why in the seventh century A.D. after the Christian era had already been in effect for almost seven hundred years, a man by the name of Mohammad, out of the tribe of Ishmael, rose up and started that religion. I will liken it to perverted system of Judaism. It is to Judaism what Catholicism is to the true Church of the Lord Jesus Christ. It is an anti force to antagonize, jeopardize, and stand in the way of what God has ordained; but God has a way of putting it to rest. I have to believe when He fulfills these scriptures right here, He will do it in one giant sweep. He will display His power in such a way that those Arabs will definitely know God is on Israel’s side and definitely not on their side. When you take the prophet Micah in the 7th chapter and read what God would do for Israel in the last days, it did not happen in those other wars; but it will happen here; because in that hour, God says He will show great and marvelous things insomuch that the heathen will come crawling out of their holes with their hands over their mouth. They will be confounded at all they have experienced. With that in mind, let us ask ourselves the question, Why is God holding this thing off for so long? We have to get over here in time: ready for the last week of Daniel to start, before God sets the stage for it.


WHAT RIGHTS DO THE JEWS HAVE


These boxes on our chart are spaced far enough apart for us to print the various scriptures that are to be fulfilled before the last week of Daniel starts; but remember, Each of these boxes just brings you a little closer to that week. Since 1967, when Israel pressed her borders out like she did, she has been constantly, every month, every year contested by those who say, You have no right to be there: You have to give it up. You have to return to your 1948 borders. Time and time again, heads of Arab states have said the same thing. That tells me Israel has not been living back in this land with the inhabitants dwelling safely. They have been living in jeopardy. That is why some time back, when they had that rocket bombardment from Lebanon, thousands of Jews had to quickly go into bomb shelters and stay there for hours. That tells me Israel right now is not living in her land in safety. It is because she does not have secure borders. Up until now, the Jews have been willing to tolerate the presence of Arabs in places they scripturally ought to have: simply because it is not yet time for them to have all of their land. Ezekiel 38 and 39 still have to be fulfilled before the week of Daniel can start; so do you know what that tells me? Some time before those scriptures are fulfilled, something has to take place that allows Israel to be dwelling safely in her own land. Just notice Ezekiel 38:8-12, as God speaks to the leader of Russia and her coharts concerning Israel. (8) “After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword, and is gathered out of many people, against the mountains of Israel, which have been always waste: but it is brought forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely all of them. (9) Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee. (10) Thus saith the Lord God; It shall also come to pass, that at the same time shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought: (11) And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates, (12) To take a spoil, and to take a prey; to turn thine hand upon the desolate places that are now inhabited, and upon the people that are gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the midst of the land.” That will never be a description of the people of Israel until after something has happened that allows them to get their enemies out of their midst and away from their borders. That is why I said, Do you know what that tells me? That tells me this, that between now and where we will be then, in time, Israel is going to pass through a short interval of time that God is going to cause those leaders to get their heads together, take a good look at their situation and circumstances and say, We will go it alone, without any help from western allies, for our own safety’s sake. When God turns them loose, you rest assured, He will turn them loose in a way that His power will be with them. When they get finished, they will have pushed their potential enemy far enough away from their places of living and dwellings, they will no longer have to worry about these antagonists, these hostile Arabs anymore. Something has to trigger a thing like that though; and that causes me to ask myself, Could that be why God has saved old mad man Hussein from receiving what he deserves? God may want to show this world that He has a little nation that is very capable of taking care of him when He turns them loose. They could very well be the one’s that will put him to sleep. They will not go to within a short little distance of Baghdad and stop short of doing their job. No. They will know exactly where that old boy is, if it comes to that. They will go right in after him and put him to sleep. Most of the Christian people in the western nations do not realize that for many centuries there has been a long existing rivalry between two camps of this Islamic belief. After Mohammad, the first one, died and the next leaders, (sort of like what we call bishops) came along to take over the leadership of the faith, eventually, as it began to spread out into the various territories, there came to be a division. At first, it was preached and proclaimed among mainly Arab people: Those in Saudi Arabia and those in the area we know as Jordan. But later as it began to spread out and go into Egypt, and across North Africa, Ethiopia, and then to Syria, Turkey and those regions, there developed a difference. Those people were not Arabs; and they are not Arabs today. I want to stress that: They are not Arabs; but they do have the same religion the Arabs have. They are Muslims: following the religious practices founded by their prophet Muhammad. Now the people in this region, down in here like this, they are known as the Sunnite Moslems; but those like over here in Persia, Turkey and around over here are the Shiites. They are the ones you hear so much about in the news. The Shiites are the ones ready to press for a holy war. Out of that element of Shiite Moslem comes the terrorist type people. This ought to tell the western Christians why even today, though Saudi Arabia has not been as antagonistic against Israel as Persia and those, she still holds to that faith of Islam. The same way with the regions here in Jordan: they are of the Islam faith. With that in mind, let us try to look at it this way: Here are all the Arabs, the Ammonites, the Moabites, and the Edomites. Then from there we go to Saudi Arabia, all of that is actually descendants of Abraham by the flesh. Somewhere if God is to get one goat, one ounce of gold, out of those regions to fulfill the scriptures you read here in Isaiah 60, then you have to understand that between now and that time, God is going to use Israel to do something over here. Not in Saudi Arabia, but right here. Because here are the ones that Jeremiah, Isaiah and those prophets all spoke about, how they had done the Israelis back in the beginning of the Babylonian invasion. God said He remembered them. Because of that, these same areas would become a possession of Israel in these latter times. So that is ahead of us; and not very far away. In all probability we are going to begin to see things start changing in the Middle East. However soon we are to see Jerusalem put in position to eventually be inhabited by Jews and the temple rebuilt, that is how soon we can expect God to turn Israel loose, to do what she will have to do. When He does, there will be miraculous things done on the field of battle once again. That is going to be God’s way. I have to stress this, brothers and sisters, whoever you are, wherever you are, read your Bible! When God does these things, He is doing it for two purposes. To change the heart of these people, who right now are Israel’s hindrance to these scriptures being fulfilled. If Israel is to be living in safe borders and in the land dwelling safely, keep in mind, it means when Ezekiel 38 and 39 is fulfilled, Israel’s enemies who are all in this area, will no longer be her enemies. They will have been put to rest. That is why when Israel does that, Israel will loose that potential hazardous thing of Arabs being constantly harassing her all the time. That does not mean God has destroyed the Islamic belief in all these other nations; but it will definitely put these Arab states to rest. Furthermore as He does this, He will do it in a way that He will be glorified, because this is some of the ways God begins to prepare the heart of people in the world, to cause them to begin to realize He is with Israel. Turn to Isaiah 60. When we read this, I would like for us to read it with the fact in mind that Isaiah 49 goes right with it, and at the same time. Why? Because Isaiah 49 tells us in two different places how the inhabitants of old Jerusalem will be far removed. While Israel is allowing these Arabs to live there self governed, there is no purpose in Israel removing them. When they are allowed over in the Gaza Strip to live there under self government, Israel is not removing them; but as we get closer to the hour when Jerusalem must be put in prophetic position, to be inhabited as it states in the 49th chapter, there is no way that city can be actually renovated and made new, as long as you have three fourths of it occupied by Arabs. That prophecy cannot be fulfilled with Arabs sitting there. That is why we have to realize Israel is going to be compelled by circumstances in that hour, to see what she shall do in order to guarantee this thing to be a success. So as she puts everything to rest, as I have said before, Right there is where they all belong, because that is where most of them came from. A lot of the people in the Gentile world do not even realize that. They say, well they were born there. Sure they were born there, but their ancestors did not come from the land of Israel. They came from across the river. That is why you have to look at it like that. When we look at Jerusalem, and God says He will make her a cup of trembling, just wait until the hour comes that the Arabs lay Jerusalem on the conference table saying, We want our independence. We want self government too: like the others have. You can rest assured, if we are close to the hour this prophecy is to drop in place, there is going to be problems in Jerusalem. There is no doubt it will help set in motion Israel’s necessity to use her military forces. When that time does come, God is going to cause her to go forth in such a miraculous way, He is literally going to strip that Arab world of that old Mohammedan belief that Mohammad was the last prophet. They all believe in Moses. They all believe Jesus was a teacher; but they believe that Mohammad was the last prophet. They deny that there has been a greater One than Mohammad; so God has to strip that belief out of them. He will do it when He causes their eyes to behold how He magnifies Himself before them. Let us read here in Isaiah 60, the 5th verse. From the 5th verse on, I want to move you through time. From the 5th verse on, you are right here somewhere. (pointing to chart) Israel has the city. Israel is ready to build the temple and this whole Arab world knows what she is doing. Among the Gentiles, there is a people here also, who will know what Israel is up to. “Then thou shalt see, and flow together, and thine heart shall fear, and be enlarged; because the abundance of the sea shall be converted unto thee, the forces of the Gentiles shall come unto thee.” The word converted, there, has nothing whatsoever to do with their soul’s salvation. It is talking about material possessions, material things being converted from something they were destined to be used for, and given into the hands of Israel, to be used to help fulfill a prophetic cause. (6) “The multitude of camels shall cover thee, the dromedaries of Midian and Ephah; all they from Sheba shall come: they shall bring gold and incense; and they shall shew forth the praises of the Lord.” Let us not forget what it says in Haggai 2, a scripture we used in our other message, how those two prophets stood there when that second temple was dedicated, seeing people standing there that had seen the first temple, and they were saying in their heart, This is such a small place compared to the one I saw when I was a child. The prophet Haggai was anointed to speak these words, The silver and gold is mine saith the Lord. Meaning, when it is time for me to have a larger house, and a better house, I will bring the gold and silver necessary. God knows where all of it is. God is not in the process of trying to find the Lost Dutchman’s Mine somewhere out in our western desert. Even though the western nations are bankrupt, God still knows where all the money is. I have to believe they will talk about how to lower the deficit from now until Jesus comes. Listen to this; and ask yourself a simple question, In the light of the way the Arabs are right now, can you imagine how anything could ever cause these scriptures to be fulfilled? Just notice, “The multitude of camels shall cover thee, the dromedaries of Midian and Ephah; all they from Sheba shall come: (where is that? Saudi Arabia. Mohammad came from this place, Midian.) they shall bring gold and incense; and they shall shew forth the praises of the Lord.” When? When Israel is right here, inhabiting and changing the old city and is in the process of building her temple. That causes me to ask the question, How will the Arab world be persuaded to do that, when presently they feel the way they do about the people of Israel? I challenge anyone, Take a trip to Saudi Arabia today, and say to the king, I am sent as an emissary from Israel: We want to build our temple and wonder if you would like to contribute anything? What do you think his response would be? I say he would call for his body guards and have them escort you right out the door. You know how they feel about Israel today. It would require something out of the ordinary to get them to change their mind’s. Well there is coming an hour, (and we do not want to put it way over here in the Millennium) when they will contribute generously to Israel’s cause. It is going to be right here, (right at the time for the week of Daniel) because, when you read Revelation 11, you plainly see that John was given a reed to measure the temple and the altar and them that worship therein. That goes to show, when those two prophets prophesy in the first part of that week, the temple has been erected and the altar and sacrifice is back in operation. It will be just like it says, out of Midian and Sheba, Saudi Arabia, comes gold and incense to offer upon His altar. Well let us go further, where it mentions the people of these other regions. (7) “All the flocks of Kedar (That is of one of the sons of Abraham by Keturah, his second wife.) shall be gathered together unto thee, the rams of Nebaioth (That is another son of Abraham by Keturah.) shall minister unto thee: they shall come up with acceptance on mine altar, and I will glorify the house of my glory.” Actually, when you put that down in every day language, here comes sheep and goats from these regions, in the far regions of the country of Jordan, way back in Bedouin country, where evidently there are sheep today if you could see them and see the light of the scripture, you can say, One of these days out of these flocks there will be sheep, voluntarily chosen by their owners who will say, I want to take them to Jerusalem, because I want my brethren, the Jews, to have some of these to offer upon their altar. You need to be mindful of the fact that Israel does not even have an animal breeding program yet. They are talking about it. They are talking about getting the red heifer. Yet talking about getting her and actually taking the necessary steps to activate such a program are two different things. That is what they will have to do in order that they might have the red heifers as well as all the sheep and goats they will need. These things are things offered on the altar of sacrifice every day, once that hour arrives. Just think though where these would be coming from. From the very regions where today a Jew could not get enough wool to make an ear muff, let alone what God has said here. I say, That should tell someone something: like, that God intends to strip that bunch of Arabs of that old Islamic belief. In other words, when He can make them look like they have prayed to Allah so long and he hasn’t heard them, maybe they will remember their ancestors prayed to God the same as Abraham did. Anyhow it says, “They shall come up with acceptance on mine altar, (Listen to this: Here comes the silver and gold) and I will glorify the house of my glory.” There is only one house God is talking about there; and that is the temple of Revelation 11, that John saw, and the angel said, “Rise, and measure the temple of God, and the altar, and them that worship therein.” When you go on down through Isaiah 60, you find other verses like verse 10 for instance: “And the sons of strangers shall build up thy walls, and their kings shall minister unto thee: for in my wrath I smote thee, but in my favour have I had mercy on thee.” In other words you find a description of how God, by the same process, has touched the hearts of Gentile people. Not to the point of making Christians out of them; but He has touched the hearts of Gentile people to make them sympathetic, and cause them to become concerned. When we were building this building in 1967 and that six day war was going on, and it was announced that it was over, more than one voice on the radio and television was saying, That had to be an act of God. It had to be an act of God: is what they were saying. They do not talk like that anymore; but they soon will again. They have forgotten all about how God intervened in that war for Israel: which just goes to show man’s heart is hardened. After twenty some years, man’s heart is so hardened they cannot see God doing anything anymore. They have learned more about the dinosaurs in the last few years than they will ever know about God. What they have found out about dinosaurs has caused some archaeologists and scientists to change their view. Well I have said before, No doubt they will keep on changing until Jesus comes. Then they are going to change a lot more; because He is going to make them see something that will line up with this book. These scriptures sure give us a chance to see that God has a way of touching Gentiles when He gets ready to though. Thinking back through the years, Israel, while they have been scattered among the nations, never did take up the trades of professionals, in the sense of being architects, designers of buildings, construction engineers, and that type of things. No. They have been doctors, scientists, professors, investors in world money, school teachers and all such. Those things have been their professions. Running a department store, running a fruit stand, and you name it: there is where you would find the Jewish people in their every day activities. I ask you though, Have you ever heard of a construction crew foreman by the name of Rubenstein? That is just a name that came to my mind; and I only use it to make my point. I use it to identify it from some Gentile name. You do not find men by that name on a construction job. Why do I say all that? Well when you read verses 9 and 10, which say, “Surely the isles shall wait for me, and the ships of Tarshish first, to bring thy sons from far, their silver and their gold with them, unto the name of the Lord thy God, and to the Holy One of Israel, because He hath glorified thee. And the sons of strangers shall build up thy walls, and their kings shall minister unto thee: for in my wrath I smote thee, but in my favour have I had mercy on thee,” it causes you to see some things in a different way. Now this lets me know God has Jerusalem back in hand. The Jews have control of it. They are demolishing everything that looks like run down slums. I have to say it like this, Somewhere across this nation we live in, and somewhere around this world in different nations, whether in Europe or the Orient, by the time God does in the Middle East what He is going to do, and Israel takes that military swing and does valiantly on the field of battle, and God shows wonderful things insomuch that the heathen put their hands over their mouths and are confounded at all they see, Don’t tell me there will not be some wealthy construction investors of different sorts have their heart’s touched and want to help those that God is fighting for. When that war is all over and they begin to hear that Israel is now ready to take Jerusalem and begin to renovate it and renew it, I cannot help but believe there will be some professional contractors, men of architectural trades that knows how to build and get the job done, men who have the equipment and all the means to get to work, that God will just simply reach out and touch their heart’s, like, I need you. Come to Jerusalem. Let us read it again. “And the sons of strangers shall build up thy walls, and their kings shall minister unto thee: for in my wrath I smote thee, but in my favour have I had mercy on thee.” Yes saints, even though the nations are broke, somewhere across this earth there will be certain world leaders that God will touch and cause them to want to do what these scriptures say. Remember, God knows exactly where all the gold and silver is. (Isa. 60:11) “Therefore thy gates shall be open continually; they shall not be shut day nor night; that men may bring unto thee the forces of the Gentiles, (The word forces, does not apply to military forces, it applies to material forces.) and that their kings may be brought. (12) For the nation and kingdom that will not serve thee (in the process of what we are talking about, the rebuilding of the walls and the temple) shall perish; yea, those nations shall be utterly wasted. (Listen to this next verse.) “The glory of Lebanon shall come unto thee, (The only glory Lebanon has is an ancient park. It was a park that was turned into a national park many years ago because they say there are cedar trees there 5000 years old. Out of that same forest, cedar trees were cut in the days when King Solomon had cedar timbers brought from Lebanon. They stated in one article I read, that this park has, according to their estimate, several hundred of these ancient trees. Can you not see why it was turned into a state park. God did not want everyone around cutting all that beautiful timber: He wanted to preserve some of it to go into His house.) the fir tree, the pine tree, and the box together, to beautify (Just listen to these words.) the place of my sanctuary; and I will make the place of my feet glorious.” Do you know what it says in Haggai chapter 2? God says this, The glory of this latter house will be greater than the former. When you read the following verses, they will tell you how God will glorify that house. He will do it by upgrading the types of material. Where they used wood in Solomon’s temple, they will use iron. Where they used iron in Solomon, they will use brass. Where they used brass before, they will use silver. For silver, they will use gold this time, and on and on like that. He will update the beauty and splendor of that temple. That is all to be done by Israel as that week Daniel is ready to become activated.


WHEN WILL THE EZEKIEL 38 WAR BE FOUGHT


We will be going into Ezekiel 38: to take a look at something else that must transpire before the week of Daniel is activated. I realize people will say, Bro. Jackson, I just do not understand: Why does God wait that late to do these things? When He sets these scriptures in motion, that brings us close to the week, Israel is in the process of rebuilding the city and the temple. Brothers and sisters, I refuse to be a fanatic; but if you can see these scriptures like they should be, there is no doubt in my mind that it will take that Ezekiel war being fought just a few short months before the week of Daniel actually is initiated. It is that type of condition being brought on, that causes the western world, out of impatience, to negotiate with Israel for some kind of world peace plan. You have to keep in mind all the miracles that God will have done to bring Israel to her position by the time that Ezekiel war is over that causes many people of the world to begin to realize that God is with Israel for the duration; but none of that will change the devil’s plan. There were a lot of people that heard the same men say what I heard said about the six day war, that did not see one single solitary thing. They would not acknowledge God, no matter what happens. They will always say, Oh, they are all a bunch of fanatics. They always have to bring religion into it. There are people that think like that continually: masses of them. Then there are a lot of people who think this Ezekiel war is something that will be dragged out over a long period of time. When you really read that 38th chapter, it is another war of such miraculous proportions, I can say that the Israeli army is not even in position to defend itself by the time it is over. God does the defending. That is how you have to look at it. Who starts this war in Ezekiel 38? Not the Arabs down here in Jordan and Saudi Arabia: they are at peace with Israel by that time. When you read chapters 38 and 39, you see that it is Gog in Russia, the leader of the land of Magog, Meshech and Tubal and those, that start this thing, this sweep against Israel. Then you see that it is the people down here (the Arabs that are already at peace with Israel) that will say to them, What did you come here for? Did you come to take a spoil, to take a prey? That lets me know those people are at peace with Israel. They are ready to speak in defense of them; because they have already been put in their place prior to that time. It will be this other bunch of Moslems over in Persia, the old Shiite bunch, that will be coming with Gog to fight the Ezekiel 38 war. They are the ones that were behind the bombing of the World Trade Center. They are the same ones that would bomb some of the tunnels underneath the Hudson. They are the ones that even planned to bomb the U.N. building. They have a lot of things in mind. They want to terrorize this western world. It is that old Shiite bunch. God is going to put them to sleep also before very long. Believe me saints, He will do exactly that. That is why you see old Iran (Persia) aligned with Russia. You see Ethiopia. Right now you would not think so. You see Libya, which is on the other side of Egypt. You see the house of Togarmah, which is Turkey. That is where Christianity started out when it came to us Gentiles. However today, there are more Islamic people in Turkey than there are Greek Orthodox “Christians.” That is why it is those Islamic people who are going to say, Now we will show that nation of Israel that they are not so mighty. Well maybe not; but they have a mighty God fighting for them. That is exactly the way God has designed it. Remember saints, The Bible tells us that God Himself will put hooks in their jaws and bring them against Israel. (Ezekiel 38:4) “And I will turn thee back, and put hooks into thy jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army, horses and horsemen, all of them clothed with all sorts of armour, even a great company with bucklers and shields, all of them handling swords.” You who live to see those two prophetic days of Hosea chapter 6, verse 2, coming to a climax to make way for the last week of Daniel’s seventy weeks will be here to see this Ezekiel 38 war fought. You will see a war that is going to shake this entire world. When I say that, I can just hear my critics say, That Jackson has gone crazy: He is ready to predict this and that. Well as I have said before, Just stick around: Time will tell the story. When you read Ezekiel 38 and 39, just remember, if Israel’s intelligence was good enough back in 1982, that they knew there were caves in Lebanon filled with munitions, supplies ready for some kind of secret attack on Israel, it will still be good enough to meet the next challenge. Israel knew by their intelligence, that ships coming from different parts of the world had been coming through and unloading at Beirut, Lebanon. They were loaded with certain munitions, but their surveillance photography could never spot where they were stored. Why? Because they were underground. When Israeli intelligence found that out, that is why there was a war of 82: They went in after those PLO’s; and you know the outcome. They found rifles, ammunition, mortar, and all kinds of weaponry. They were ready to sell it to help them pay for the war they fought in 82. That was in the Jerusalem Post. Now if their intelligence is that good, that they can know that somewhere there is a bunch of people getting ready to launch an attack against them, and they knew how to take care of that, then think of this Ezekiel 38 thing like this, There will not be big convoys of trucks coming from Russia down through Turkey, and big convoys of infantry and troops coming out of Libya across Egypt toward Israel. Neither is it Ethiopian troops coming across the Red Sea by amphibious landing. Neither is it soldiers from Iran, (which is old Persia) coming through to Syria in a long convoy. The Israeli Air Force would knock them all out before they could get there. Common sense will tell you that. On the other hand let us just say, If Russian technicians have been compelled by conditions at that hour, to realize, If we are to attack Israel like this, then we will have to bring about a surprise attack; and the only surprise attack they can muster up will be a complete air drop. An air drop is none other than bringing in huge airplanes loaded with paratroopers, ready to drop about ten thousand in certain spots, with all the equipment they will need for such an attack. I remember, back some years ago, many of the Trinitarian preachers began talking about the Ezekiel war; and they were telling that Russia was raising horses by the thousands, getting ready for that time, because the Bible tells how he will bring horsemen with the shield and bucklers and all that stuff. Brothers and sisters listen to me: You do not burn metal shields. That is a lot of nonsense. The prophet at that time, portrayed the picture according to the only kind of military things he could see in his day. God uses that kind of language; but for our day, when you talk about horses in a situation like this, convert those horses to horse power. Think of those huge diesel tanks and all that type of stuff. Imagine certain planes set at a certain spot loaded with paratroopers and all kinds of supplies. Every wave of them are planned to cross over Israel in a certain dropping zone. Well God will not keep them from coming against Israel; but He will sure make them sorry they did. Let us take a better look at some of these scriptures here in Ezekiel 38. We do not want to be repetitious; but there are things in this chapter I would like for us to take a serious look at. I am talking mainly to the young people now. Why do I say that? If I could have gone to church when I was inducted into the army, and could have known the scriptures of prophecy that were already hanging over mankind, the scriptures that begin to set the stage for a picture of events that this horrible war is going to help shape when time and conditions are in line for it, I am sure I could have lived with a different picture and concept about the whole thing. During the war, we did not hear much about how many Jews were being killed because there was little accuracy in knowing what was going on, in the information realm. It was not until the war was over and the files of the Germans and things like that began to fall into the hands of the Allied Intelligence, that these things begin to be leaked out to the news media. Even then there were things held back until the intelligence forces felt like everything was secure, the way they wanted. They did not want to picture something that had existed, if it had the possibility of frightening people. I am sure today that intelligence sources in our country, as well as in others, know things, that if they were known to the world we might be sitting here today with a different concept of how to look toward the future. The Bible has been constructed in such a way as to keep hidden certain things until such times a they will soon become applicable. That is because God did not give the individual prophets the whole story from beginning to end, but rather anointed each one to write of certain future events; and that way the Holy Spirit is the only One that can put the whole picture together. Many of the end time prophecies were written hundreds of years apart; and were not given as a continuous thought apart from other things. Various holy men, as they were moved by the Holy Ghost to speak a present tense rebuke to a certain generation, would also speak certain things here and there that would apply only at the end time. That is one reason your intelligent mind’s of this day and hour get things so mixed up: they have nothing inside of them to sort out the verses of scripture and put the picture together. Yes saints, God certainly knew how to hide the revelation of His word from the wise and prudent and reveal it to all who would walk with Him in present day truth down through the ages of time. There was no reason for saints of other ages to have the revelation and understanding of end time prophecies the way God has seen fit to reveal them to us in this hour. That is why many times people can read over these certain verses of scripture without even realizing the depth of what they pertain to. However the closer we get to the end of time, the clearer they become to the true bride people. Certain things just begin to stand out and fit right in with other things you are looking at. The importance of them is for our learning as time moves on. I do not wish to bore people with these things, and especially not the young people who listen to me; but I do feel that since we are so close to two thousand years since the crucifixion of our Lord and Savior and the beginning of the grace age, we need to be aware of the fact that prophesied events pointing to the end time are going to be coming to their climax very rapidly from here on out to the end. Therefore all those who desire to be ready to meet the heavenly Bridegroom when He comes for His bride, ought to earnestly meditate upon these things the Holy Spirit is revealing to the Church in this hour of time and let our time be spent in endeavoring to be pleasing to Him. Let me again say, We are not attempting to set a day and hour for the return of our Lord for His bride Church; but we definitely are saying to you that the scriptures declare very clearly, that after two days (2000 years of the grace age) God will again be dealing exclusively with the Jews in the seventieth week of Daniel, to give them the revelation we have been so blessed to receive: That the Jesus their forefathers crucified, is in reality the Messiah they have all longed to see. Will they all receive the revelation? No. But those foreknown of the Father will. If Jesus would come to the nation of Israel tomorrow, as He came almost two thousand years ago, there are those in Israel right now that would deal with Him the same way their forefathers did. They would get rid of Him somehow. However when He comes back in person, He will be coming as King of kings: to rule this old earth with a rod of iron; and there will not be one single person on the face of the earth that can resist Him. All the forces of heaven will stand with Him as He takes control: the Grace Age Bride Church included. For those who have made themselves ready, there is a glorious event just ahead; but for those who have spurned this revelation, and those who have out rightly rejected the wooing of the Spirit of God, there is much anguish ahead for them.


ALL THINGS ARE FALLING INTO PLACE


When we look at Europe today, the ten horned beast, geographically, is all in place. It is just that a few more diplomatic and economic factors still need to be worked out. Nevertheless all those things will work out precisely the way God wants them to when the hour has arrived that the world’s antichrist in western Europe is definitely to be introduced to the world. Needless to say, There is a precise order for the various events that are yet ahead; and God Himself is the only one that knows exactly when and how they will be brought to pass. We can only project an outline based upon what the Spirit of God has revealed to this date. The little chart we have drawn up will help you follow the chain of events right on into the week of Daniel; but beyond that week you have the wrath of God and the Millennium. I realize this chart may not appear in proportion to the various times represented on the time line; but we had to make it larger in places in order to get in all the scriptures; because we are dealing in a generation here in the end time, a generation that will live to see the end. We have gone back to 1939 in our projection of this generation; because that is when these verses of scripture really began to come into focus; and when God began to set conditions in motion that will eventually bring about the fulfillment of them all. Then we come to this junction in time, 1948, the time we look to as the rebirth of the nation of Israel. Here is how we look at the rebirth of the nation of Israel after the terrible war period. These are verses of scripture that stand out exclusively. Here is a chapter that deals exclusively with the city of Jerusalem itself, something which no doubt is soon coming up. This is an episode we are approaching. Actually it is because of this chapter and prophecy concerning Jerusalem, that we really begin to look at how this will all take place. These are mere windows portraying how you look through time as these verses of prophecy begin to hang over that period of time, to see them in their fulfillment. This line represents 2000 years of calendar time from 33 A.D., the crucifixion of Christ, to the year 2000 A.D. While it is pointing here, we want you to understand when we break this calendar time down, we are looking at 2000 years of prophetic time, and you go to Hosea 6 where it says in verse 2, after two days shall the Lord revive us. That is coming up. When you read that, you have to ask, How could God revive a people if they are still scattered among the nations? Well my point is, we have a fixed scripture that tells us where this revival is going to take place. No other time than in the first half of Daniel’s seventieth week, could this scripture apply. That is why the 11th chapter of Revelation fits right in there, along with the 7th chapter. The 7th chapter will tell you exactly how many certain men will be sealed away with the seal of God (the Holy Ghost). We also have to realize that there is another element of Israeli’s that are portrayed in the 12th chapter of Revelation; and they are portrayed as the woman, having two wings of an eagle. So both the 7th chapter and the 12th chapter must be included all in the same time factor, right in here. In the first half of that week the 144 thousand servants of God are sealed in their foreheads; and in the middle of that week they flee to the nations preaching the everlasting gospel; and the woman element flees into the wilderness, into a place God has already prepared for her, that she may be fed and protected while the antichrist is trying his best to annihilate all who have trust in God. That is why the last 3 1/2 years of that week are commonly referred to by those who have that revelation, as the great tribulation. The Bible speaks of it as a time like there has never been before, and never will be again after that.


THE TWO DIFFERENT CALCULATIONS OF TIME


Let me at this time remind you once again that we are dealing with two different calculations of time from the advent of Christ to the culmination of two thousand years. Calendar time, which is what the world uses, is 365 1/4 days to the year; and that runs from the time of the birth of Christ, in that controversial span of a couple of years that historians have trouble agreeing upon. Some say He was born two years before the death of king Herod, others say three years and so on; but for the sake of expressing what we are looking at, we will just say it is two thousand years of calendar time from the birth of Christ to the year 2000 A.D. Then when we look at prophetic time, which is the time all of God’s prophecies are measured by, a prophetic year is exactly 360 days to the year: which is a difference of 5 1/4 days to the year. Therefore as we look at these prophecies, and at the two thousand years Hosea spoke of as two days, we have to figure that two thousand years from the crucifixion of Christ which was the end of the 69th week of Daniel. Then when you get finished calculating those calendar years and converting them into prophetic years, the two thousand prophetic years will not finish out until somewhere between 2004 and 2005 A.D.; and that will put time at the entrance of the seventieth week of Daniel. It may sound confusing just to hear it; but if you care enough to figure it out yourself, you will see that it is very simple. You will have two thousand prophetic years between the end of the 69th week of Daniel and the beginning of the 70th week. When we do get one of the chart’s we are using into your hands, I believe it will help clarify anything some of you may still be unsure about. It is very unique, how those two thousand years of prophetic time will coincide with two thousand years of calendar time, with such a small margin of difference at the end. That of course would mean, if that revival for the Jews is not to take place until the 2000 prophetic years has reached completeness, that the revival (which is the first half of the week) would not start until around 2004 and 1/2. Naturally we cannot be dogmatic about this: for it could possibly overlap a little: maybe as much as two years. Nevertheless I am persuaded that we are looking at a span of time of no more than 11 or so years from now until the last week of Daniel becomes activated. That means the bride Church has no more time than that to reach her final phase of perfection: for when God turns His attention back to the Jews, the Gentile bride will not be around here much beyond that time. The reason I give a two to three year span there at the transition time is because it says, “And after two days He will revive us.” When you go to Daniel 9:26, where it tells you, (talking about the weeks of Daniel, especially this 69th week which falls in the category of the 62 weeks plus the 7, it says, “And after sixty and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off.” The word after, does not mean much, much later. I In that case it meant exactly, and immediately, the very day that time factor was to terminate, Christ was crucified. Of course we have to agree that it does not take 3 1/2 years to kill a man. Why do you say that Bro. Jackson? Because He was crucified in a day’s time, but this revival is not to take place in a day’s time. It is to take place in a 3 1/2 year period of time. That is why I give you the option of a possible overlap of the two thousand prophetic years into the week of Daniel. In other words, by the time those two prophetic days have terminated, the 3 1/2 years of the first part of the week could already have been set in motion and the revival taking place: which could mean the revival started around 2002 A.D. “After two days will He revive us: in the third day He will raise us up, and we shall live in His sight.” Either way, the reason we are looking at it in this light, if we do not figure this prophetic time as beginning at the crucifixion of Christ, you have to carry it another thirty some years to 70 A.D., when the Roman army destroyed the city and the temple; and if you do that, this generation Jesus said would not pass away until all these things be fulfilled, could not last another thirty some years. That would put the week of Daniel all the way over here to 2035; which obviously would not work out with the other scriptures. It would mean those Jews that endured the Holocaust would have to live to be around one hundred years old, to keep it in that generation. The point is, a generation, as Jesus spoke of it, should really be somewhere around seventy years: not a hundred. Therefore using that as a guideline, we Gentile Christians really need to keep our eye on what takes place in the Middle East. Though they have agreed upon a plan for the Arabs to govern themselves in Jericho and the Gaza Strip, Jerusalem is not yet ready to negotiate with them about doing the same thing in old Jerusalem; so this could very well be what brings Zechariah 12:2-9 to the forefront. We have read some of these verses already; but notice this 9th verse. “And it shall come to pass in that day, that I will seek to destroy all the nations that come against Jerusalem.” Verse 2, we have talked about, how God said He will make Jerusalem a cup of trembling to all them that are round about. Again He says, I will make Jerusalem a burdensome stone to all them that are gathered together against her. That means public political opinions. Listen to those world leaders, how they are bragging. With their chest stuck out in a proud way they are saying, We are achieving peace. Well that is what they think. They are only preparing to eventually blow the Middle East into what God wants it to be like. We need not look at what is taking place as though the Jew is ready just to give up: God is behind this thing from beginning to end. He is setting the stage for the next prophesied event. He is moving all the actors and players right in position. That is why I am convinced that Gentile Christians do not have time to play around: like some have in past days. No sir. It behooves every Gentile Christian to begin to live each day like it could be his last. I do not mean to frighten anyone by making some kind of hypothetical picture out of this; but saints, Let’s live for God while we can. Let’s go to work living for God. Let’s go to bed living for God. Let’s go to the cornfield living for God. Let’s drive nails, living for God. If you are going to fish, live for God while you are fishing. One thing is sure, God is going to cause some strange happenings over there pretty soon. In one scripture it says, He will hiss for His people. Do you know what the word hiss, means? It is God’s way of getting attention. He does not yell out, He whispers. It is usually only that sensitive ear that will hear a hiss. The thing is, Those who are supposed to hear the hiss will hear it, and the rest will know nothing at all about it. I just have to say this, He that wrote the book knew the end from the beginning: He knows how to bring every minute detail to pass. When we read over in Numbers, God says Israel will do these things: They are going to possess the Moabites, the Edomites. We brought it out earlier in the message. In Jeremiah 48, it says the same thing. Hosea 3:4-5 says Israel will abide many days without a king, without an ephod, without a prince, without a teraphim, and so forth. Afterward shall they return and seek the Lord their God, in the latter days. That is right in front of them. We are entering that era of time, the latter days. We have been living in the last days all along; but now we are in the latter days. This is where things will speed up. In Micah, which is not up there on the chart yet, in the 7th chapter, verse 12, (which we need to read before we go any further) it fills in something else for us. Let us look at it now. It actually goes along with these other scriptures. That one verse goes with this category of scriptures. When Jerusalem reaches the hour that it becomes an international problem, how are we to look upon it? It means God has allowed time to come around where Jerusalem is going to become the city that Israel will absolutely remove all those Arab inhabitants from. Isaiah 49 plainly says they will be far removed. Therefore what is the purpose of removing them? It is so Israel can set up that prophetic program of renovating the city, tearing down the desolate ruined walls and things that mar the looks of it, and restoring the city to its former beauty, getting it ready for the coming of the Messiah. Do not think when that hour has come, that men will sit around fussing about what ought to be done for another ten long years. God has a way of bestowing His power, getting attention to the type of tradesmen and craftsmen He needs to get the job done. Now as we look to the hour in front of us, you young people might just as well get your eyes wide open to what is taking place. I am not talking amiss. I wish I could have seen something back in the years of WW2 of what you are getting ready to behold in the hour you live in. Listen to this 11th verse. “In the day that thy walls are to be built, in that day shall the decree be far removed.” It means God’s curse that He placed upon the children of Israel in ancient times, wherein He said as you turn your back on me, I will turn my back on you will no longer be operative. As I took great pleasure in blessing thee, I will take pleasure in cursing thee: He has said also. You read that in Deuteronomy. God gave them their warning while they were coming through the wilderness, what He would do for them; but He also prophesied to them of the last days: showing how merciful He can be. Here, He speaks in this verse specifically that this miraculous display of His power is going to be displayed, leading up to the hour old Jerusalem is definitely to be renovated, being rid of those Arab inhabitants that have made it waste, living there for centuries just letting the city run down and become a desolate slum-like place. That is really what it looks like in many areas, a slum. It stinks like a hog pen. Do you think God is going to allow a beautiful temple to be built on the temple mount while that hog pen around it is allowed to set there like it is right now? No He will not. If we will just look up, there is a picture unfolding before our eyes. You are not going to hear this on Trinity Broadcasting, what I am saying to you in this message. I wish I could preach it on Trinity Broadcasting the way I see it today. (12) “In that day also he shall come even to thee from Assyria, (This is talking about the Jews returning.) and from the fortified cities, and from the fortress even to the river, and from sea to sea, and from mountain to mountain. (Notice now, how He breaks that thought to take you to another thought as we read verse 13.) Notwithstanding the land shall be desolate because of them that dwell therein, (That is talking about the Arab inhabitants in the land.) for the fruit of their doings.” God is looking at every bit of it. Then He tells how He will again display His power in that hour when Jerusalem’s walls are to be rebuilt. Israel will be in the final stages of her immigrants coming home: because old Jerusalem, which is facing renovation and the walls being constructed, is then going to face the opportunity to be inhabited and possessed by Jewish immigrants coming from the ends of the earth.


THE IMPORTANCE OF EZEKIEL 38


Let us now go back to Ezekiel 38. How many times have we read this chapter without really realizing what it is saying, even though in about three or four different places it repeats itself? This lets me know this chapter is not a chapter that can be applied just anywhere in time. It is a chapter that can only apply right at the ending of these latter days: just before time takes Israel into the week of Daniel. While this era of time when Israel is fighting, that is how these scriptures are fulfilled. We might say this, Between this unfolding and that unfolding, could be limited into two or three year intervals, but no more. Many people are wondering, How can Ezekiel 38 be fulfilled the way we have thought, when the Russian empire has already fallen apart? I have to say this, You just simply do not know your geography. No, saints, you do not think like that. It is because you have lived in the 20th century, when the Soviet Union, which we commonly refer to as Russia, ran all the way from eastern Europe to the far East Orients. That is not what God is prophesying to here in this chapter. He is talking about that area that starts in the area of Moscow. Moscow is a name that is derived out of the name of the primary people, the Muscovites. The Muscovites are the descendants of Meshech. That is how you have to look at it. (38:1) “And the word of the Lord came unto me, saying, (2)Son of man, set thy face against Gog, (Now the word Gog means ruler. I do not know whether it is Yeltsin or who: time will tell.) the land of Magog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal, (There you go, Meshech. So you are looking at a precise area, not all of Communist Russia, but a precise area in and around the Moscow perimeter. That is what God was looking at when His prophet saw this. He brings it right down a strategic line coming right toward Israel.) and prophesy against him, (3) And say, Thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I am against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech (the progenitor of the Muscovites, which is the area of Moscow) and Tubal: (4) And I will turn thee back, (Now He pronounces the end before the beginning, in this verse. The end is, I will turn thee back. But in order to turn them back, they have to be brought forth.) and put hooks into thy jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army, horses and horsemen, all of them clothed with all sorts of armour, even a great company with bucklers and shields, all of them handling swords.” May I say this, The prophet saw this in the 6th century B.C. He did not know what an armored tank looked like, or a weapons carrier. God let him see a military army coming, as Ezekiel was used to seeing them. That is the way you have to look at this to give it proper application in our day, when weapons of warfare are such as Ezekiel never could have imagined. You have to transpose the language to modern day military technology. I remember some twenty years ago, how you could hear some of these prophetic preachers on Radio and TV, saying, Russia is in a great program raising horses by the thousands. They are buying blood to infuse into these horses because they are getting ready for Ezekiel 38. I would hate to be on a horse coming down through Turkey and Israel’s Air Force coming at me. Brother you had better have something other than a horse carrying you at a time like that. Well Bro. Jackson, you know a horse would not show up on radar. No but they will show up on infrared sights. I hope you have not already forgotten the Gulf War. That should have taught some people something: if they paid attention to what was reported. You simply cannot hide from that. That is how they found some of the army tanks that were camouflaged in sand pits, dugouts, covered over. It plainly said they had to start those motors every so many hours to keep the battery charged, especially in that desert country. That would leave that motor generating heat. Here comes these airplanes in for the kill. All of a sudden on these infrared finders, they see this spot on the ground, heat generating up. They know there is something there that shouldn’t be there. What do you think they are going to do? They blow it to pieces. I have said that, because I know this is going overseas. I want it to go overseas. Brethren, do not look for horses. Look for horsepower, described in every conceivable fashion from jet engines, to diesel engines propelling tanks and trucks and weapons carriers of whatever sort. They are coming on horsepower, modern technology. Where it says, “Even a great company with bucklers and shields, all of them handling swords,” you just have to convert those swords to modern rifles, automatic weapons and such like. I verse 5, we come to the lineup of nations that will be coming with Gog against Israel, so notice who they are. “Persia, Ethiopia, and Libya with them; all of them with shield and helmet.” Persia is way over here, actually to the right of Israel if you look at a map. It is still Islamic. Libya is west of Egypt, Ethiopia is down south of Israel. We have to realize this though, Togarmah and Gomer, is the land of Turkey, so it is north of Israel. Why does the Bible mention those four strategic areas? Because at that time they will all still be under the influence of the Moslem religion. Somewhere as we said earlier, when God fulfills these scriptures and Israel makes her military sweep and takes all this land, which she will do in a few days of time, that is going to put that old Islamic religion in the Arab world to sleep. From right there all the way into Saudi Arabia, you have Arabs. But Persians are not Arabs, and neither are Libyans, Ethiopians nor Turks. They are Islamic in their religious beliefs; but not of the Arab race of people. Therefore it is under these scriptures that Israel is going to put these things to sleep. By the time there is an Ezekiel 38 war, the Arabs will already be at peace with Israel. They will be in harmony with Israel because they will no longer be under old Mohammad’s religious spell. You might say, Bro. Jackson, Are you sure about that? Well if you had been listening, I have repeated it many times: showing how it will come about. That is what Zephaniah 2:11 is talking about, “The Lord will be terrible unto them: for He will famish all the gods of the earth; and men shall worship Him, every one from his place, even all the isles of the heathen.” Keep in mind this whole Middle East thing is not merely a racial thing, it is a religious thing. It is religious oriented. All the Arabs right now, along with the rest of the Islamic world together, combined, they are many millions of people strong. Nevertheless God is going to strike them out, we might say. Not all at once: but in sections. Therefore the first thing we look for, is when Numbers and those verses of scripture are fulfilled. That is soon coming up in front of us; and you are going to get an opportunity to see first hand, how Israel is used by God on the field of battle, and really see how God will invest in them wisdom, that will make the battle Gideon fought with 300 men look like kids play in proportion to it. We will go ahead and look at verses 6 and 7, over here in Ezekiel 38. We cannot take time to read the whole chapter; but there are some verses we do need to look at. “Gomer, and all his bands; the house of Togarmah (That is Turkey.) of the north quarters, and all his bands: and many people with thee. (7) Be thou prepared, and prepare for thyself, thou, and all thy company that are assembled unto thee, and be thou a guard unto them.” The word guard, as used here, means an overseer, an instructor, or an adviser. So when you read these four different areas of people that are going to be in collaboration with Gog and the people of Magog and so forth, you should realize when we leave the area of the Muscovites, and start this trek going south, we begin to come into the areas of old southern Russia, and naturally you come into the midst of a people that are Islamic in belief. They were Islamic when the Communists ruled; and they are still Islamic. That is what you have to see. Then when you come into Turkey, you see there that Islamic belief. Therefore as we look at this lineup and try to picture the whole situation, we just have to come to the conclusion that this war is not a result of Russia getting angry about something and taking it upon herself to punish Israel. No. Because if God said He would put hooks in their jaw, this means no matter whether she wants to participate in the endeavor or not, God is going to force her to play her role, in the precise hour of HIS choosing. Simply because, from these four different areas of the Moslem world, at that hour of time, there will be millions of those Moslems chanting, We want Israel destroyed! We want Israel destroyed! We want Israel destroyed! By that time, they will have seen how the Arabs themselves failed in their attempt to do that very thing, and how they have since changed their attitude about it all, and are in agreement with Israel. I know my critics will say when they hear this, Jackson has gone crazy. Well I challenge them to present their version of the fulfillment of these prophecies and make it line up with the rest of the word of God, and at the same time portray a picture of what is to be the final outcome of all of this. Otherwise they should just be willing to stick around ten more years, and then be ready to come and tell me what they see then. This thing is coming about in a way that will wake the world up and make the world realize, Israel’s God is the God of all gods. He puts up whom He will, and He puts down whom He will, Just like the Bible says. If He can put in the heart’s of men, in the last days, to fulfill His word, then He will see that every verse goes in place precisely in the appointed time. So with this picture in mind, God says,”Be thou a guard,” an adviser, an instructor unto them. Sure Russia is going to furnish these other areas all the high tech military equipment, because they themselves are not manufacturers, that puts Russia in a unique position in the whole endeavor. None of these others are manufacturers of high tech military equipment. Russia is. So that is why we have to understand, this would let us know why Omar Khadafi in Libya, has strutted around in the past number of years, looking for just one chance to get into Israel, thinking he could make a name for himself. The hour will come when he will get his opportunity, if he is still alive; but he will not enjoy the name he makes for himself in doing that. Verse 8 tells us of a visitation. Notice, “After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years (We are living in the latter years. God was not talking about 1939, 1948, nor 1967: He was talking about a later time, here she comes. It is not going to be long after that though, that this will come into focus. We have to separate the two so we can deal with them in their proper setting.) thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword, and is gathered out of many people, against the mountains of Israel, which have been always waste: but it is brought forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely all of them.” Yes, In the latter years thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword. We should all be agreed upon what land that is talking about; so from here on, is where we will begin to notice how emphatically certain words through the prophet are spoken. God puts emphasis on them. We do not find it worded like that in any other prophecy. Do you know what that tells me? Since 1939, there has been the birth of the statehood of Israel in 1948, and there has been a constant conflict from that time until now. Look at the 1967 war. Did it settle the problem? No. Israel just pushed her borders out a little further than those allotted to her. That is why you see them running on this line. I want you to know, When WW2 was going on, and there was a small segment of Jews beginning to immigrate to the land of Palestine, buying up land, settling in these kibbutz compounds, the Arabs soon came against them. It was a spirit at work. The Arabs began to realize the Jews were coming home to fulfill Biblical prophecy, and they set about to prevent it. Every kibbutz that was built, (and you that have been with us over there, know this) had barbed wire enclosures around it. Is that not true? In the 1967 war, when Israel took the Golan Heights, out there in the desert valleys where they set up those new villages, What did you find around those cities? Chain link fences with gates. We have seen it with our own eyes: we are not guessing about it. You have all no doubt seen what I am referring to, as you watched World News on TV. That lets me know one thing for sure, Israel, at that time, was not dwelling safely. Now it is important that we study the scripture, and pay attention to safely. I emphasize it, because it repeats itself again, safely. Right now they are not dwelling safely. They are trying to establish a period of such; but it will not be that way for them until they have pushed their borders completely out to the extent that they enclose every prophecy related to their borders. In Ezekiel 36:10-11, we find God speaking to the land instead of the people. Listen to it. “And I will multiply men upon you, all the house of Israel, even all of it: and the cities shall be inhabited, and the wastes shall be builded: And I will multiply upon you man and beast; and they shall increase and bring fruit: and I will settle you after your old estates, (That applies to all of Israel’s ancient borders.) and will do better unto you than at your beginnings: and ye shall know that I am the Lord.” Saints, that is why it behooves us to watch these various things unfold. As we think about this Ezekiel 38 war, notice the terminology in verse 9: “Thou shalt ascend (What does the word ascend mean? It means to come forth, something like that.) and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee.” But remember, That will only take place after the Israeli’s are dwelling safely in all of their land: not even feeling that they need a wall to protect them. Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm: That was the part I wanted to read. You do not have to watch the horizon six months to know a storm is in the making. Storms do not take that long to materialize. The language is telling us, that when this event finally comes about, it is going to be something put together very quickly. Why? Because that is how God will move upon the scene and the heart of the players who are to enact this and set it in motion: After Israel is dwelling safely in her land. Let us now go back to these prophetic scriptures and rehearse what Israel will do. Not what Gog and Magog will do, it is what Israel will do in this day and hour just ahead. It is right in front of us. We may be closer to it than we even realize. They may sign their little peace proposal with the PLO; but in the weeks and months that follow, total chaos can break out in the Middle East. There are too many of the PLO’s in other places: that if Israel will not let them immigrate to those self governed places, they are going to set up a fuss also, just as those Arabs in old Jerusalem are going to do. We want self autonomy also: will be their cry. They are not going to get it though. The only thing they can look for is a truck to come along, and the Israelis to load them up and haul them somewhere else. Our point is, This present peace effort may be just the thing God is going to use to ignite the fuse on something that is destined to blow wide open.

1994-02-Looking-Through-Windows-of-Prophecy-Part-2

Looking Through Windows of Prophecy, Part 1 – 1994, January

Looking Through Windows of Prophecy, Part 1 - 1994, January

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

I BELIEVE WE ARE ALL GOING TO LEARN SOMETHING AS WE LOOK AT THESE VARIOUS PROPHECIES THAT LEAD RIGHT UP TO THE WEEK OF DANIEL WHICH IS YET TO BE FULFILLED. WE ARE USING THIS CHART TO HELP ILLUSTRATE THE PROGRESSION OF TIME; AND EACH OF THESE LITTLE FRAMES REPRESENT THE FRAME OF A WINDOW. TIME MOVES FROM LEFT TO RIGHT AS WE DEAL WITH THE MESSAGE AND ENDS UP IN THE SEVENTIETH WEEK OF DANIEL. EACH OF THESE WINDOW FRAMES REPRESENT A SPAN OF TIME ALL WITHIN A PERIOD OF TIME CALLED THE LAST DAYS. OVER AND OVER IN THE OLD TESTAMENT SCRIPTURES, YOU WILL READ PHRASES LIKE, IT SHALL COME TO PASS IN THE LAST DAYS; AND, IN THE LAST DAYS IT SHALL BE THUS AND SO, AND ON AND ON, BUT IN THE LAST DAYS. THEREFORE WE NEED TO REALIZE WE HAVE BEEN LIVING IN THE LAST DAYS DURING THIS WHOLE DISPENSATION OF GRACE TO THE GENTILES. IT IS ALL REFERRED TO AS THE LAST DAYS. PETER USED THE 2ND CHAPTER OF JOEL ON THE DAY OF PENTECOST, IN REFERRING TO WHAT WAS GOING ON RIGHT THEN: THE OUTPOURING OF THE HOLY SPIRIT. THAT IS THE SCRIPTURE HE USED TO SHOW THOSE JEWS THAT SCRIPTURE WAS BEING FULFILLED; SO LET US LOOK AT SOME SCRIPTURES THAT ARE READY TO BE FULFILLED HERE IN THE LAST OF THE LAST DAYS.


WHY WE NEED TO STUDY PROPHECIES


Within that space of time known as the last days, we will enter into a time factor wherein there are various scriptures, four of them we will consider, pointing to the later days. In other words there are many references to the last days; but we want to consider these that speak of the latter days. This means that in the latter days of this period of time which is called the last days, we will see certain prophecies fulfilled that could not have been fulfilled at any other time in history. As we mentioned before, We have all heard about this so called peace thing that has been signed by the government of Israel, as well as the PLO, or Palestinian Arabs who live inside the land, basically in the Gaza Strip and the regions of Jericho, referred to as the West Bank. There is no giving up of any land in that. That is a social and political thing. They are trying to see, you might say it is Israel testing the temperature of the water, to see what really is the various attitudes of these Palestinian Arabs. That is why it is a social, and/or a political thing. That is, they will allow the Arabs in the Gaza Strip to govern themselves, to have their own police force, and deal in their own domestic problems and Israel will stay out of it. It will work the same way with the Palestinian Arab in the region of Jericho. You have Jericho way over here, (pointing to chart) and the Gaza strip way down here; so for the sake of looking at this, let us just say that this much will work; but there is still another spot to consider. That is the old walled city Jerusalem itself. Israel took that back in 1967, the same time they took the Gaza Strip, and the old land of Jericho. Therefore I cannot help but believe that if these Arabs in these two areas covered by this agreement do settle down, and it does work out socially, the Palestinian Arabs that live in the old walled city part are going to demand the same treatment. I have pointed out to you many times before, that three fourths of that old city is populated by Arabs. Therefore there is no reason to think they will not demand the same treatment as the others. Then, when that does start, we are looking at how God looks upon all of that. I believe time is running out for this whole world system of human government and such like, as well as for the fulfillment of these various prophecies. Therefore if and whenever those Palestinians living in the old walled city begin to set up a demand for the same self government, this would mean they have no intention of ever leaving that city. They will have every intention of staying in that city; and that will not work. Isaiah 49 tells us what is going to be their future. They will be far removed from there. Two scriptures in the 49th chapter speak of how those that made Jerusalem waste will be far removed: so we know there will be something in the near future that will develop politically and socially among these various Palestinian Arabs that will set their course. One thing is sure, What God has spoken through His prophets of old will come to pass no matter what politicians of the world may do. Naturally they think they are doing something worthwhile, but that is because they have no confidence in what is written so clearly in the scriptures. Well, we have confidence in them, so let us examine their contents in the order we have laid out on this chart. The reason we have designed it in this fashion is because we have 15 different prophecies all leading up to this period of time and still there are more in the Bible. These are major prophecies; but there are other minor prophecies you can fit right into these groups as we go along. The ones we have listed are prophecies that bring out details about certain things that are to develop within the overall restoring and bringing the Jews back to their homeland and establishing Israel as a nation. We are going to start in the beginning of this, and show you how these various prophecies, spoken over centuries of time, apart from what the next prophet would say, and yet show us how accurate they are, if we can just perceive them to accomplish certain things in their respective period of time. I used this illustration in Norway and spoke of it here already- how you cannot take any of these prophecies at random, jot them down on a piece of paper, each one individually, put them in a can and shake them up, then reach in and draw one out and expect God to fulfill that particular prophecy anywhere other than the precise time it was given for. That is not the way prophecy works. Prophecy has a certain pattern and a certain sequence; and there is nothing that can alter God’s plan and purpose for them. That shows how God has designed to bring certain things about at a precise time, and in a certain way. Many times their fulfillment will take people by surprise; but God knows what He is doing. We are going to start with what I think is one of the best prophecies that will introduce us to this picture that we are going to begin to explore. Therefore we are starting way back here (pointing to chart) before 1939; but as time progresses we will notice how these scriptures drop into their period of time and begin to be fulfilled. The ending of it all is right there; and the bride of Christ is gone from here. If you will notice this purple line on the chart, this is the prophecy that we took the title of the subject, “Time is running out” from, found in Hosea 6. Let us turn to that scripture now, because we want to establish the line itself. We started out when we preached that message using this first verse, which portrays a spiritual motive, an attitude of dispersed Jews scattered over the earth. When you think how the Holy Spirit caused this prophecy to be uttered 780 years before the advent of Christ, even before the ten tribes were carried off into captivity, and realize how looking down through the span of time He saw the day when this 20th century would come into focus and God’s people, Israel, would be dispersed to the ends of the earth, and the attitude of the people at a particular time, you have to know that this whole thing is a perfectly outlined plan of the great Creator. These things are not just by coincidence. Somehow or other this prophecy portrays the prayerful attitude that would begin to drop on that particular generation of Jews as they would begin to say, “Come, and let us return unto the Lord: for He hath torn, (that is what their being scattered accomplished) and He will heal us; He hath smitten, and He will bind us up. After two days will He revive us: in the third day He will raise us up, and we shall live in His sight.” That prophecy, from 780 B.C. runs straight down to the day when the week of Daniel ends everything pertaining to this time factor. We cannot go beyond this point. The term after two days, will end right here: after Israel has heard their two prophets that will prophesy to them in the first 3 1/2 years of the seventieth week of Daniel and the wrath of God is poured out upon unbelieving and wicked mankind. Right here in the first part of that week is where Israel is going to be dealt with by the two prophets and there is where they will be revived and an element of Jews in the land will be brought back to a spiritual understanding of why they have been in dispersion for so many centuries, and why God dealt with them in the way He did. Notice it says here, “in the third day,” that means following that week, as it closes out with wrath of God and then the Millennium starts. The third day is the Millennium that continues on beyond this point of time; (after the week of Daniel ends) and lasts for another day (one thousand years). This is why we have this purple line running like this on our chart. We will let that scripture rest there as we go ahead and look at some others.


WATCHING SYMBOLS TAKE ON MEANING


Open your Bible’s to the 2nd chapter of Joel. In the first chapter God speaks how there is going to be an army of locusts, cankerworm, palmer worm and caterpillar come and devour the tree and the vine. All that is symbolic language, that those four different type of insects portrayed is symbolic of the four world empires God used through time, the Babylonian, the Medes and Persians, the Greek, and then the Roman. Those four empires definitely did devour and destroy and pluck away the very life expectancy of the nation of Israel. It looked like that nation could never survive all of that and be restored again. Yet here is a prophecy that speaks differently. Turn to Joel 2, verse 25. In the former verses it begins to collectively tell what God has in mind; but to cut the subject short we have to pick these three. “And I will restore to you the years that the locust hath eaten, the cankerworm, and the caterpillar, and the palmer worm, my great army which I sent among you. (They are all symbols of world empires that devastated, Israel, not only a social nation together, but destroyed their ability to live in the land. It destroyed their right to have a king, and it destroyed their right to call Jerusalem their holy, beloved city, when it was these four empires that constantly ruled over that land. Therefore God promises them something better.) And ye shall eat in plenty, (Naturally this prophecy has a two fold picture. First there has to be a process of restoration. Then there are the benefits the people are to enjoy out of this restoration.) and be satisfied, and praise the name of the Lord your God, that hath dealt wondrously with you: and my people shall never be ashamed. And ye shall know that I am in the midst of Israel, and that I am the Lord your God, and none else: and my people shall never be ashamed.” Naturally that prophecy is a continuation, a promise. Not only did He promise to restore, but He promises that in doing this restoration they are definitely eternally safe forever and they will know from that day on God is with them forevermore. We can say then, that this prophecy holds a key promise. It goes along with that Hosea prophecy wherein the people begin to say, Come and let us return unto the Lord. We can see how all these have to link together. Remember, you cannot take these prophecies from here, (pointing to chart) and put them over here. Why? Because there is a time factor involved. Everything we will read is confined to a time factor that maintains the sequence. That is why we have these windows on our chart. Each window represents a period of time, a precise period of time wherein these scriptures do have an earthly fulfillment. You cannot place them 15 years ahead of their hour, or 15 years behind their hour. There is a precise time when they fall in line to be fulfilled. In the two scriptures we have read we can see how somewhere back in here these two begin to line up. The spiritual minded Jew could look toward that. In 1968 when we went to Israel and talked with this Rabbi you have heard me speak of, (His name was Benjamin David.) He told us when the Zionist movement first began back before the dawning of the 20th century, 1800 and something, when the Jewish fathers scattered all over the world began to collectively gather together and design the strategy for Jews to set about returning home to the land of their father’s, they had all this hostile opposition. The Arabs owned the land. It took them a long time to agree, and come to a solution as to how they would set about the task of acquiring the land. That is why in their initial beginning they had altogether planned on beginning to move throughout the earth, going to the various major areas where Jews lived, and speaking in the synagogues, laying forth this plan they had devised. The rabbi we talked to said when those old teachers and fathers began to make these speeches in many places, they were booed down, as if the Jew at that time said, Well I am not about to listen to that kind of nonsense. To dramatize it a little, it might have sounded something like this, (because if you and I were faced with such circumstances, I can see just how we human beings are prone to react). Do you mean I am supposed to leave everything I have worked to accomplish and go follow that bunch of fanatics and do all of that? Ha! No indeed! Not me! Let us just see how that fits into scriptures. There is a scripture that begins to bring this out. I want to say this, If there is any Jewish friend or person that plays the tape or sees it on video, or maybe would read it some time, please keep in mind, I am saying these things with deep respect for what God has done in restoring Israel to where she is today. Regardless of what some Jews might have in their own personal opinions about the Zionist movement, which I know very little about, other than things that I have read here and there and what this rabbi told me, I know enough that I am able to see the scriptural setting. God has used all of that to bring Israel face to face with the hour she is now living in. He had His own way of doing what they were endeavoring to do; so He just let them stir up the mind’s of a few of those who would be affected: then He made His move.


JEREMIAH’S PROPHECY CONCERNING ISRAEL’S REGATHERING


Let us go to the prophecy of Jeremiah. In Jeremiah, the ten northern tribes at this time had been carried off into captivity over a hundred years beforehand. The two southern tribes were being attacked and Jeremiah was prophesying. In this 16th chapter, here is a promise again, but it is a promise that deals specifically as to how God will set this restoration in motion. Jeremiah 16, verses 14 to 18. “Therefore, behold, the days come, saith the Lord, that it shall no more be said, The Lord liveth, that brought up the children of Israel out of the land of Egypt; But, The Lord liveth, that brought up the children of Israel from the land of the north, and from all the lands whither He had driven them: and I will bring them again into their land that I gave unto their fathers. (I was just reading in the Jerusalem Post, In one of those southern provinces of Russia, near Afghanistan, the Jerusalem Post told how they had just brought so many thousand Jews out of that province. They just made the announcement. They told in this article how many more Jews are left in that province, they are making preparation to bring them out. You do not hear much in the world news today just how many Jews are coming back, but it says most all of those came back to the land of Israel. Here God is telling, not in dramatic, elaborate ways, but just in a brief sentence what He will do.) (16) Behold, I will send for many fishers, saith the Lord, and they shall fish them; (That was the beginning of the Zionist movement. What is a fisher? He is a man that casts out bait. How many realize that? He baits. He is not going to catch anything unless he can successfully use the right kind of bait. Will you agree with me? That is why we have to understand those early fathers and leaders of Israel’s future, at the beginning, just before the 20th century started, as they began to collectively get this vision, the time is coming we must make preparation to go home, back to the land of our fathers. They knew they had a job. It was global, so they planned to send men they felt could speak and teach and instruct and convince the masses. As that rabbi said, Many times they were booed down, made fun of. In other words, God sent out messengers who were like fishermen. They had to bait their speech with the proper illustration, giving it a meaning, otherwise that Jew was not going to bite it. Watch what is next.) and after will I send for many hunters, (a hunter does not use bait. He uses a weapon to kill. Do you catch the meaning?) and they shall hunt them from every mountain, and from every hill, and out of the holes of the rocks. (17) For mine eyes are upon all their ways: they are not hid from my face, neither is their iniquity hid from mine eyes. (18) And first I will recompense their iniquity and their sin double; because they have defiled my land, they have filled mine inheritance with the carcasses of their detestable and abominable things.” That is why you see the year 1939 up here on the chart. The Zionist movement, up until this period of time when WW2 was set in motion, was basically depending on speeches among gatherings, slowly spreading the word, and getting the people convinced that it is time to go home. They had set a long range strategy that as the Zionist movement, from the wealthier Jews throughout the world would contribute from their various sums of money, their aim was to send volunteers, Jews that were willing to go back and face the hardships and buy back this land acre by acre, mile by mile. If God would have left it to be done that way, there probably would not even be a nation of Israel today. We must remember though, He had a plan, and He had a way to set it in motion. Therefore in 1939, in the month of March, (I believe it was in the Jerusalem Post in 1989) the article stated that this was when Hitler actually started the conflict, and the Jew reckons their dilemma starting about that time. In the month of March came Hitler’s forces moving into Austria. Some of the first people that began to be rounded up, questioned and you might say brought under scrutiny, was the Jewish people. Little did the Jewish societies that lived throughout Europe then even realize at that point in time what was in the making. But from March of 1939, and on into 40, 41, 42, Jews from all over the vast regions of eastern Europe, wherever Hitler’s army went, were rounded up by the SS troops and treated worse than animals. The world probably does not have enough books printed to really tell how the German troops rounded up those poor Jewish people, hunting them until they found their hiding places. Even though there were many that were successfully hidden in basements, attics, caves and such like, there were great multitudes that were not hidden well enough to escape the scrutiny of their pursuers. Those that could not find a hiding place, that is what it means there, He will hunt from every hill and valley. God knew that if something like this did not take place, the Jewish people of the 20th century would be just like the Jews in Egypt: that would have been satisfied to stay there. People get settled in a certain place, and in this case many owned property and had livestock: so they would not have been anxious to leave all of that to go back there and face uncertainty? No sir. That is why we can say, (and not because we enjoy thinking about how many million Jews were martyred, and for what reason? It looked senseless. It was brutal.) They would not have left there without what happened. They had not caused Hitler’s problems; but to Hitler, they were an opposition to his future, to what he had planned in Europe. He felt like he had to get rid of the Jewish race, so when he set about to round them up, all the way from Denmark, everywhere they could find then, Norway and wherever, they would round them up and put them in concentration camps. Then finally into the death camps. Some were burned alive, martyred in various ways, just butchered and tortured. I read one place where as the war was coming to a close, they had rounded up Jewish children for a reason you could never imagine. The German army was getting so low on blood supplies for wounded soldiers, they took the Jewish children, lined them up and tied them, then drew all the blood out of them to use for blood transfusions for their wounded soldiers brought in from the front lines. What a tragedy. What a brutal thought, to think that a tyrant like Hitler could devise and carry out such a plan. The point is this, When God sent hunters, he did not send them with a hook and bait, he sent them with weapons to kill. By the time WW2 had come to a close in 1945, six million Jews had been butchered. Europe had been ravaged. That left the remaining Jews in that area of the world crying for the opportunity to go home. God knew exactly how to set it all in motion. By that time, those that were left alive were ready to go home. This of course brings us to another prophecy that is related to this gradual restoration. We want to look at enough of them to give you a picture of what to expect as time for the Gentiles comes to a close.


OTHER PROPHECIES THAT HELP FORM THE TOTAL PICTURE


Let us turn to Ezekiel 34:11. This is a prophecy of generality. It just speaks of a promise, how God would deal with the nation in all of this. I am going to start in the 11th verse, and read only enough for you to get the point. “For thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I, even I, will both search my sheep, and seek them out.” We can see that this is actually how God began to deal in respective areas of the earth, whether it was in Yemen, or areas where it looked impossible to get that Jewish element out of there. God definitely did move in a supernatural way in many cases, to be able to get those Jews out of there before the door was slammed shut. (12) “As a shepherd seeketh out his flock in the day that he is among his sheep that are scattered; so will I seek out my sheep, and will deliver them out of all places where they have been scattered in the cloudy and dark day.” Those years and months that closed out WW2, what a tragedy it was when the Jewish people, at that time, did not have a government. Yet they were trying their best to make contact with the isolated, dispersed Jews that were scattered all over the world; and let them know it was time to come home. Keep in mind, The U.N. had petitioned a certain piece of land in the land of Palestine that set the stage in the beginning. That is what opened the way for the rest. Having said that, Let us move quickly to another prophecy. It is in the 36th chapter, verses 8-12. Here is one thing we can say and look at with confidence, It does not matter what world leaders are doing right now, and how they are all patting Israel and the Palestinians on the back for what they have done. I am looking at something here in God’s word that lets me know God will over-ride every bit of this when His hour of time does come. When His hour of time arrives for Him to drop down one of these prophecies and set it in motion, there is not a thing that our president or any man with all the wealth of the world can do to change it. Watch what this prophecy says. Verse 8, “But ye, O mountains of Israel, ye shall shoot forth your branches, (This was spoken long before it was ever to be in operation.) and yield your fruit to my people of Israel; for they are at hand to come. (9) For, behold, I am for you, and I will turn unto you, and ye shall be tilled and sown.” In 1939 coming on up to 1948, which is the date over the next window on our chart, in the valley of Jezreel, which is the planes of Megiddo, where the battle of Armageddon is to be fought, and the valley also which was the bread basket of the ten northern tribes, 800 and 900 years before Christ, it was more or less like a wilderness. That valley was to the ten Northern tribes of Israel what our states like Iowa and Nebraska are to this nation: where so much of our corn, soybeans, wheat and all that is grown. It is our bread basket, so to speak. Yet in Hosea, when you read that, you see that God speaks of how the valley of Jezreel would become sort of like a wilderness, all grown up. After the ten tribes had been taken out of there, slowly that land ceased to be tilled. Then through the centuries, coming right on into the 20th century, different guides have told us it was just a wilderness; and that it even became a swamp. They had crocodiles in there. It was not until after 1948, when the people which were there at that time did become recognized and were allowed to become the state of Israel, that this situation began to change. The Jews began to slowly buy up this land and take steps to change in back into a productive valley; and when you go there today, you see that every acre of it is now in full production. You know what it says in Hosea. It tells how the judgment of God would rest on it, but in the days when God is reclaiming it, great shall be the day of Jezreel, when God restores it and brings it back into productivity. That is why we associate that with this prophecy. “And I will multiply men upon you, all the house of Israel, even all of it: and the cities shall be inhabited, and the wastes shall be builded.” Do you see now why we do not have to be alarmed at what politicians of the world are doing? God has this whole thing under control. He will only allow carnal minded mankind to go so far: Then He will bring about circumstances to turn it all right into the stream of His will, that which these prophecies tell us of. When we think of the Golan Heights, that is a little strip laying right in here next to Syria. It is across here, on this side of the river. They took that in the Six Day War. The Golan Heights is actually territory that belonged to the ten tribes in ancient times, before they were captured and taken out of there. On top of that, there is more of this land over here, that goes like this, that they take, (pointing to chart) plus down in here. Benjamin is on this side, over here. With that now, let us notice what this prophecy says. (11) “And I will multiply upon you man and beast; (This shows us there would have to be a period of time as God begins the restoration process of the land, to house the people, and the people to occupy the land. There will have to come a time that the nation gradually becomes more and more in population, not counting the Arabs that are there, but counting the Jews that are found there. That is why He would multiply man and beast upon it.) and they shall increase and bring fruit: and I will settle you after your old estates, (In other words, God is looking at the deed. Take that back to Genesis, where you find the deed God promised Abraham when He brought him out of the land of Mesopotamia into this land. I will give you all this land from such and such a place.) and will do better unto you (Just listen to this.) than at your beginnings. (I will do better. That lets me know there is no way this western world and all its military power can change the picture of God’s word. He said, “I will do better unto you;” and that is exactly what He meant.) and ye shall know that I am the Lord.” Of course it goes on and says more there, but I believe we can begin to see as we have read these various prophecies, and begin to see how we can look through this first window as the time began. When 1948 came, these things were already set in motion. Therefore we want to look at something else.


ISAIAH


We find the next prophecy we want to look at in Isaiah 66. Here is a prophecy that shows us something more. We are reading verse 8-12. This is why we drew these windows on our chart. Try to keep in mind the particular window is only a means for you to look at an overall period of time related to certain years when you can recognize how God worked to set that prophecy in motion. Here, Isaiah prophesied like this, “Who hath heard such a thing? who hath seen such things? Shall the earth be made to bring forth in one day? or shall a nation be born at once? for as soon as Zion travailed, she brought forth her children. (9) Shall I bring to the birth, and not cause to bring forth? saith the Lord: shall I cause to bring forth, and shut the womb? saith thy God. (10) Rejoice ye with Jerusalem, and be glad with her, all ye that love her: rejoice for joy with her, all ye that mourn for her.” Naturally there is more in that prophecy that is related, as that has a continuous application straight on through. But the point was, we have to realize there was a precise time the nation became politically known to the world; and that was the year 1948 when they were given statehood by a vote of the United Nations.


ZECHARIAH


Let us go to Zechariah 10 for another verse. We want to show how to look at Zechariah 10 as we look through this window, coming on to our right. We will read verse 3. “Mine anger was kindled against the shepherds, (The Lord is reminding the Jewish people why they had been dispersed.) and I punished the goats: for the Lord of hosts hath visited His flock (First He reminds them why they have been out of there, but now that He has brought them back to start a new beginning He speaks to them like this.) the house of Judah, and hath made them as His goodly horse in the battle.” That lets us know that Judah was the tribe that God had His eye on in the initial beginning of the restoration of this nation. We can see how this prophecy begins to figure into this. At this time, since this is 1993, and 1967 is back up there, (That is the one war she took this land which the world is wanting her to give up some of.) but the point is this, This prophecy lets us know God had a precise reason for bringing Judah back first. That is why in Europe and central Europe it was basically those two southern tribes that were dealt with so severely in the manner they were. That was the people God wanted to get back there first because Judah is going to be a tool for God to use. That is why it says here, “and hath made them as His goodly horse in the battle.” Well actually a lot of people say, I just do not understand what that means, “goodly horse.” Saints you really would have to know something about horses in warfare to see why it is mentioned like that here, but God knew there would be enough who would know, that others could learn from them. I will illustrate what is meant. I have read two particular instances, I have referred to them in another message some time ago. Out in West Texas, there is an old frontier fort which is a museum now. Inside that museum is a stuffed horse. They stuffed this horse because the fort was built in the days when the covered wagon trains were going across the west to California. This was an outpost of soldiers to help guard the passage through the wilderness against the Indians. The story goes like this: A cavalry captain and a group of soldiers on horseback were scouting the country, looking for Indians that might be on the prowl. Somehow or other this captain was shot by an Indian arrow. The arrow went through his leather boots, the calf of his leg and through the leather skirting of the saddle and entered the horse’s body. What does that tell you? The man was fastened to the horse. He could not dismount. Most horses, being injured like that, would have gone wild, rearing up and only God knows what else. The captain realized he had to get out of the area because he was in a predicament where he could not fight the way it would be necessary to if he remained there. He headed back to the fort with these Indians on his trail. The article I read said that horse seemed to have stamina enough that it could always stay in front of the pursuer, yet when the officer would see the Indians dropping back, he would rein the horse in to save his energy. Through the night the horse kept going. As daylight came the next morning, he rode this horse through the gate of the old fort. They had to take the arrow apart in order to get the captain off of the horse. When they got him off the horse, the veterinarian took the horse and began to work on him. He had to cut the arrow out of his side. They tried to save the horse’s life because of it being such a gallant animal, but the horse died in the process because it had lost too much blood. The whole outfit thought so much of the horse because of how he had so gallantly ran to get his rider out of danger they wanted to do something other than just bury him and forget about him. He was truly a goodly horse in battle. That is why it is written like this here in Isaiah: He (God) has made Judah His goodly horse in battle. Remember saints, Those Jews returning to their homeland were people who had spent time in jail, been in prisons, beaten and abused. As they were privileged to get back to the land of Judah, somehow or other they had been molded into vessels that would press the battle. They did not become rattled and go hysterical when danger lay before them. They had a reason for wanting to fight. That is why God could speak it like this in the prophecy. This was a bunch of Jews that had been brought out of concentration camps and were already at death’s door when the war ended. Therefore when God brought them out and returned them to their homeland, they were not like this compromising bunch of political Jews we read about in the News all the time: they were ready to fight for what is rightfully theirs. When we read in history of the time those Jews began to come in there, you find that there was battle after battle fought. It seems that as those Arabs became more hostile to the Jews in the land, they determined not to allow the Jewish state to have a beginning at all. Yet the Jewish people, basically the tribe of Judah that God was dealing with, were likened unto the goodly horse in battle. They just simply refused to give up until the job was done. Because of that we can say this, From 1948 when their statehood was initiated and on, and especially in the years of 1953 and 1956 there were conflicts between them and the Arabs that stood out; and each time they encountered those conflicts they became stronger and stronger and ever so much wiser. Then because of that, they were being added to all the time. Today, they are a great nation and the nations of the world do not know what to do with them. Let us now go to verse 4 of Zechariah 10. “Out of him (Judah) came forth the corner, (This is symbolic language. If God is going to build something, if God is going to do anything with or for the Jews He is going to use Judah first.) out of him the nail, (What is a nail? It is something that holds something together.) out of him the battle bow, out of him every oppressor together.” Well I do not understand that, Bro. Jackson. Let us look at it this way then, When I read of the various conflicts these Jews have had since they were brought back there and dumped in this land, (The U.N. had gave them this so much land.) they had no weapons. The weapons they did have were obsolete WW1 rifles. Some of them were so obsolete they could not even get ammunition for them. In those years there were various miracles testified to, as to how God preserved those Jewish people. Up in the northern part of Israel, (Some of you were with us when we went to the Kibbutz on our tour) up close to where the end of the Sea of Galilee is, that Kibbutz still has an old tank displayed there. That was an Arab tank that tried to break through the barbed wire barriers the Jews had erected there with trenches below. I remember the guide telling us how the people inside of this Kibbutz had been shut in for several days expecting this final onslaught by the Arabs. They had determined they would do their best to save the ammunition. They made Molotov cocktails with what they had to work with. There was a girl around 13 years of age. She was hidden in a trench, and when that Arab tank came plowing through the barbed wire barrier, she waited until that tank was over her. Then the minute it passed over her she raised up out of that trench, crawled up on the back of the tank and threw that Molotov cocktail down where the motor was, and the tank went up in flames. I could go on and on like this. Up in Safed, (I read this in the book “Exodus,” how those defenders there fought the Arabs. They were down to the last few shells and bullets for their old rifles. One man made his way through enemy territory to Jerusalem to ask some of the commanders of the Hague, the underground army of Israel, (if it is spelled right) for some ammunition to defend themselves with and they turned him away empty handed saying to him, We do not even have enough ammunition for ourselves. He went back and told the news to his people, but that was not the end of the story. To show you how God can use that people to fulfill His word and to help us understand His language, “out of him came the battle bow,” just listen how they were inspired to go about defending their existence. They had some dynamite. They had an old bucket. What good is that? you may say. They rounded up all the nails, bolts, nuts and such like and put them in this bucket. They put the dynamite in there with them and fixed a fuse. Then they made a catapult, something like a giant mouse trap. At a particular time when they expected they could render the most hurt to the Arabs, they launched that bucket of nuts and bolts, not knowing what the outcome would be. However when that thing landed where it did and went off, the Arabs began to cry out, They have the atomic bomb! They have the atomic bomb! Needless to say, Safed was spared. I could go on and on like this, and I tell these things for the glory of God: I am not making jokes out of it. It is a fact God used these Jews in means and ways the average person could never perceive. That is why you have to read that prophecy like this, “out of him came the battle bow,” as the instruments of defense, to defend themselves. Just look how it is today, They have some of the fastest fighting planes in the world. They have some of the highest technology to be found anywhere. When the day comes God ever turns Israel loose, and He will one of these days, I am going to tell you, it is going to make our Gulf War look like kids play. They have high tech capabilities now. It is no longer a bucket of rusty nails, nuts and bolts and dynamite. It is all the other things put together. The point is, In this prophecy, God brings Judah first. That was going to be the beginning. Out of him is all these qualities He can use to set everything in motion. Let us continue on. Verse 5, “And they shall be as mighty men, which tread down their enemies in the mire of the streets in the battle: and they shall fight, because the Lord is with them, and the riders on horses shall be confounded. (6) And I will strengthen the house of Judah, (I will stop right there to say this, In 1967 God showed the world just how far Judah had come since 1948. In the 1967 war, God showed the world just what Judah had climbed to. When God turned Judah loose in 1967, it was not with buckets of nuts and bolts. It was with weapons they knew how to use and were just as capable of using as anyone could be. Yet on the other hand, when you look at the military balance from the standpoint of logic, it looked like it was impossible for Israel to defend herself; because she was out gunned, she was out planed, she was outnumbered on the field of men; but God gave her wisdom. That is why when you read that verse, “They shall be as mighty men which tread down their enemy,” it is because God is fighting with them. Most of you in here know by reading various magazines and by the things shown on TV how in that six day war, God fought with her. You can see that verse of scripture coming right into focus and how that little nation has grown since then.) and I will save the house of Joseph, and I will bring them again to place them; for I have mercy upon them: and they shall be as though I had not cast them off: for I am the Lord their God, and will hear them.” This lets us know as we look back at what God did to Russia when He broke down the iron curtain and tore that kingdom all to pieces, that it was all a part of His overall plan. Since then, thousands of Jews have come out of that region back into the land of Israel, which naturally causes a situation in the land that western leaders, along with the Palestinian Arabs do not like. The Arab did not want Russia to let those Jews come home. As they began to come home, then immediately many of these Jews wanted to go back into the areas they feel their ancestors came from. They want to build there, but the western world leaders are pressuring Israel. You cannot do that. That is occupied territory. I can say tonight, the day will come when the western world will have to shut up, because God is going to give it to them according to their former boundaries. That is what the word estate means, according to their ancient boundaries. That is exactly what God is going to restore to them. As God saves Joseph, we have to realize there is something in this thing of saving Joseph, something most people overlook. “and I will bring them again to place them; for I have mercy upon them: and they shall be as though I had not cast them off: for I am the Lord their God, and will hear them.” That means when God finishes what this prophecy speaks of they will be back as though they had always been there. (7) “And they of Ephraim shall be like a mighty man, and their heart shall rejoice as through wine: yea, their children shall see it, and be glad; their heart shall rejoice in the Lord. (8) I will hiss for them, and gather them; for I have redeemed them: and they shall increase as they have increased.” Joseph is one of the names that the ten tribes in the north were known by. Another is Ephraim. They are interchangeable, all the same thing. Of course when we speak of the ten tribes coming home, we do not know how many there are to come home; but we do know all of that lies in the plan of God. When we go into the 12th chapter we notice it is speaking of how God will save Judah first. Then it speaks of the house of David, because it is talking about the inhabitants that are going to dwell in Jerusalem. I will say this much at this time, The Jewish people that will eventually live in the old city of Jerusalem, will not be just any Jew that wants to live there. They will really have to have a genetic heritage that qualifies them to live in old Jerusalem. Keep in mind, when you go back in the Old Testament and King David took this ancient Jebusite city, after he took it, it was referred to for a long time as the city of David. Then later when it became the capital, it took on the name Jerusalem. Originally the inhabitants of the city were basically people related to King David. Knowing that David came out of the tribe of Judah, there is a certain family line in the tribe of Judah that pertains to King David’s line. When you read the 12th chapter, and when the hour does come that God is going to cause Israel to pick up all these Palestinian Arabs and deport them, to get ready for this old city of Jerusalem to be renovated, redecorated and re-inhabited, just remember, not just every Jew running there, wanting to live there, will be allowed to; because there is a certain line of Judah, those that are related to King David, that will inhabit the places the scriptures speak of. Naturally there are people living in New Jerusalem which is spread out over the hills of Zion, from all over the world today, but there is a meaning to all of this and it will soon be brought to the surface.


END OF NATURAL MAN’S GOVERNMENT ON EARTH


In dealing with a message like this certain things just keep feeding into it as you go along, things that are not even on your mind when you begin. That is what I appreciate about the Spirit of God. Once He gets you started in the right direction, He can feed in whatever is fitting. We will be going into Hosea, chapter 6 in a few minutes, but first let me say this: There have been some things take place in the last few days, such as what looks like a temporary peace between Israel and the Palestinian Arabs in certain occupied areas. They will not call it temporary, but I am afraid I have to because of what I see in the scriptures. I have brought with me some pages from the Jerusalem Post, which I will read from just to show you what the government of Israel is really saying and what they mean. We have put a tape up here which represents an extension of this line on our chart. This part which looks like a Bible represents the 70th week of Daniel, the first 3 1/2 years and the last 3 1/2 years. They are two distinct periods of 3 1/2 years each, that make up the seventieth week of years of Daniel’s prophecy of seventy weeks, which all together make a total of 490 years of God’s dealing with the children of Israel because of their transgressions. We have to realize though, that the 70th week of Daniel, wherever in time it is negotiated and signed by Israel, sets in motion the last seven years of man’s carnal minded human government on the face of this earth. There is no need for anyone playing around with time from that point on. It will be exactly seven years. You can suppose and what if all you want to, but you will not change anything whatsoever. When that seven years comes to its climax, that is the absolute end of this dispensation, and it will be time for the Millennial reign of Christ to begin. Jesus Christ Himself comes back to earth as this seven years is closing out. He comes endowed with the authority to pour out the wrath of God upon all wicked mankind, judge what is left, and set up His reign as King of all kings upon earth. That is why we can read in the Bible that Jesus Christ Himself is the one that destroys this man of sin by the brightness of His coming and by the word of His mouth. We just have to realize that this is not some 2, 3, 4, or 5 months of time, like we natural minded human beings would do things. The seven years has to be absolutely understood as a precise time factor. That is why Jesus said in Matthew 24, pointing to the last days, “Immediately after the tribulation of those days,” thus and so. He was not talking about other periods of time when there has been severe persecution and tribulation by different societies, brought about by different human governments. He was talking about this 3 1/2 year period called the great tribulation, that the antichrist rules the world and tries his best to eliminate everyone who professes belief in God. Therefore when Jesus said immediately, He did not mean six months later. Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the sun be darkened and so forth, then shall appear the sign of the coming of the Son of Man in power and great glory. In other words He is literally coming as we would see Him in Revelation 19. He is coming to take over the government and kingdoms of this world. He will be the King of all the earth in that hour. That will bring about the end of all corruptness in government, when He sets up His righteous rule upon earth.


WHAT HAPPENS AFTER TWO DAYS


Right now, I want to familiarize you with something that will stand out vividly in the time factor we are now living in. Open your Bible’s to Hosea 6. We are using a chart representing this entire time factor: so let us read these words from Hosea’s prophecy. We must read this in order to familiarize ourselves with the prophetic setting. The first verse is dealing with how somewhere in the ending of time there would be a spirit begin to move upon the Jewish people, as they were scattered throughout the earth in dispersion. They would begin to work together and plan to set things in motion to return to the land of their father’s, saying, (Hosea 6:1) “Come, and let us return unto the Lord: for He hath torn, and He will heal us; He hath smitten, and He will bind us up.” That is absolutely pointing to the beginning of the Zionist movement, that began to be initiated by various rabbis and religious leaders, universally, scattered around the world, within the Jewish societies, as they began to perceive by certain things around them that time was running out and they needed to do something to prepare the heart of the Jewish people all over the world, to get ready to return to the land of their heritage. Notice the prophecy in this second verse. It was prophesied almost 800 years before Christ. It is prophesied before the ten tribes of northern Israel were taken into captivity. Therefore no Jew at that time knew what this was pointing to, but we know now that it was looking down through a great span of time to the last days. That of course is the time we are now living in. (2) “After two days will He revive us: in the third day He will raise us up, and we shall live in His sight.” They will live in His sight because He (Jesus) will be here on earth. He will be sitting in Jerusalem in the rebuilt temple, as King of kings, and Lord of lords ruling the whole earth. We need to take a good look at that prophecy, after two days, since that is a prophecy in the Old Testament, and at that time the prophet had nothing in mind that could possibly acquainted him with the fact that there was going to be a period of time we Gentiles would refer to as the Grace Age. We can say this, since we have a fixed point as to how to apply this prophecy, and the fixed point is the 70th week of Daniel, no other place will Israel be revived. I hope you all realize that. It is the 11th chapter of Revelation. There is where the revival takes place. It is in the first part of Daniel’s 70th week. It is also portrayed in the 7th chapter of Revelation where there is 144,000 sealed away. Where does it take place? In the first part of Daniel’s 70th week, which is a three and one half year period. A three and one half year period is not solar time. It is prophetic time, meaning 1260 days. Just bear with me and I will do my best to definitely differentiate between what is called solar time and prophetic time, because prophecy does and is, many times, terminated and interpreted as we look at things through prophetic time. Here is something to consider. Why would the Bible speak so specifically in the 11th chapter that He will give power unto His two witnesses, and they will prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days? That is absolutely half of the seven years of prophetic time. Keep in mind though, it is not half of seven years of solar time. If you were to multiply three and one half years of solar time, you will have more than one thousand two hundred and threescore days. Check it out yourself. You can see this is a prophetic formula. That is why it is worded that way. Why does it say in Revelation 13, and power was given unto this man of sin that he should continue forty and two months? Keep in mind, forty and two months does not mean solar time. It has to be a balanced 360 day year. Therefore each one of these months is looked upon as 30 days each, which would also make it one thousand two hundred and threescore days. With that in mind, it is important that we look at Biblical fixed times. Here is where people miss it. Not that I am all that smart, but I am persuaded by the scriptures that we are getting close to the end of time. Even people in the world will say, On the eve of every two thousand years doesn’t something always seem to take place? If we look at it from a Biblical setting, that seems to be the pattern of things. Would you not say so? Well we are seven years away, solar time, from the year 2000 A.D. after the advent and birth of Christ, which this period of time is identified by. In that time, it is solar time, that is what constitutes a year. We can say this, When that prophecy says, “after two days”, that does not mean two days of 24 hours. That is two prophetic days of one thousand years each. We take that from the epistle of Peter, that a thousand years is as one day and one day as a thousand years. A day in that respect is not talking about a day of 24 hours. It is talking about a dispensational day. The prophet that prophesied it did not see the Grace Age as we see it, therefore when he uttered this, it became applicable to how God will deal with Israel at the end of this dispensation. Think also of this, With the week of Daniel fixed, as to when this revival is going to take place, then we must realize this, If we are measuring prophetic time back 2000 prophetic years, is has to bring us back to some calculated point of beginning. Will you agree with me? That is where the big question is; and it is all in the Bible, if we will look at things right. In this respect, the beginning of this is questionable from our standpoint. The fixed end is here. We know that is where the revival takes place; and we know the Millennium follows that. That of course is the third day. That is when He will be here. That is when He will rule and reign; and that is when the nation of Israel is going to shine above all other nations of the earth. That is why the 3rd verse reads like it does. Israel will be fully restored and we could say, She will be the envy of all other nations of the earth.


WHERE THE TWO DAYS START AND END


Let us just take this week of Daniel and go back through time. As we go back through time, there are two points in history where we can bring this. We can either bring it back to 70 A.D., the time when Jerusalem was destroyed by the Roman army under Titus, and it fell on August 10, 70 A.D., the city was demolished, the temple made ruins, and the remaining Jews were sold to the various nations into slavery. That set in motion a long period of Jewish dispersion that was prophesied in the 1st chapter of Hosea. However if we choose 70 A.D., we now have a question. If we take these 2000 prophetic years and just go back to 70 A.D., here is what we come up with. It means that the week of Daniel cannot start until somewhere around 2035 A.D. That presents a problem. We have a chart fixed up that we will be giving you copies of, showing you how to look at this. The reason I am going to say this next thing is this, The world does not have that much time left. Everything is being moved in place and the world does not realize what is going on. The very fact Israel has now been brought to a precise time factor that she is faced with some kind of ultimatum causes me to ask, What will she do? Will she, in concessions, give up land? Will she back off from land she is supposed to have? We have to realize, as all these other prophecies we have read in other messages feed into this picture, I am convinced that once God gets conditions just right, as He has in the past, He will see that Israel is forced by circumstances to take more land instead of giving up some of what they have already. As they were compelled in 1967 to take land, which they did not even plan to take at that time, then somehow or other, though it may look now that somewhere in the near future Israel could be pressured to give up, on the other hand, if we are looking at a prophetic picture the right way, things are going to be different than that. There are many things we could look at right now; but we have to realize that what appears on the surface, to the natural eye, may look questionable, misgiving, and uncertain; but there are prophecies that point in the last days, and when God does these things in the last days, it is not going to take Him 40 or 50 long years to do them. In the Middle East, things will always work different than the way we Gentiles would expect them to work. When God does something with Israel, it is not spaced out over years of time in respect to certain specific events. Therefore with that in mind, we do not have enough time, the way other things are fitting together, to say the week of Daniel cannot come until around 2035. If we are measuring this two thousand years of prophetic time, back to 70 A.D. then take that span of time, break it down into prophetic time, it will take you through to around 2035 before the week can start. Therefore here is why I say it cannot go that long. These prophecies, as we look at this, through these frames we will call windows, we could go back to 1939, that was a precise year. As I read in the year of 1989 when the Jerusalem Post came out in the month of March and the writer of that article, a headline article, 50 years ago this month the world entered an era of time from which there is no return. When I read that, I said there is a precise time factor in the minds of the Jewish editorial writers, historians, commentators and such, that something was set in motion. Because in Austria Jews began to be rounded up and questioned. That was the beginning of a process of God fulfilling prophecies that will develop in the last days. That is why when you go to Jeremiah 16, verses 14-18, and read there about the gradual restoration and the people of Israel coming back in the last days, first He said He would send fishermen. We see what that is talking about. Naturally it is symbolic language, but the symbolic language has to be understood in earthly events. So when the old Zionist rabbis, philosophers, and leaders began to go to the various Jewish societies scattered through the world and began to say Gentlemen, the time has come we must prepare to go home. I will never forget what that rabbi told me in 1968: that when they did that, many times they were booed. It sounded foolish to a lot of Jews. Then we come to the year 1939. What does the prophecy of Jeremiah say? After that He will send hunters and He will hunt them from the hills and the valleys. If you could read the dark years between 39 and 45 how the Jew looked for every crevice, nook, cave, and cellar, and attic, in every kind of circumstance scattered throughout central Europe and western Europe, to hide from the SS and the Gestapo officers. They were rounded up by truck loads and train loads and shipped through the country to certain points to face death. They were slaughtered in worse ways than animals at the Louisville Stockyard, being carted off to some meat processing factory. That is why we have to see what the hunters were. God was putting pressure, putting a fear upon the Jewish society. Keep in mind, in these last days as these things began to come to an end, we have to make them fit the words of Jesus in Matthew 24; and He plainly tells us there as He refers to the fig tree, the rebirth of Israel, and the rising of Israel in national power and them beginning to climb to world preeminence, Jesus said this, When you see all these things coming to pass, this generation (the generation seeing those things) shall not pass away until all these things be fulfilled. That means the great tribulation, the wrath of God and all of that. All of the things He was speaking of were for the last generation of these last days. Not something that is going to be carried over in the Millennium, but everything that is pointing to the last days, and what constitutes the last days will be fulfilled. This now living generation will live to see it all climax. In other words, When it is all wrapped up, there will still be some left alive that saw the FIG TREE (ISRAEL) start to put on leaves and get ready to produce. Naturally there are a lot of people with different ideas of what a generation is. One will say it is forty years, another will say it is fifty years. Another wants to go to a hundred years. It is not a hundred years. It is true when you study the genealogy of Christ and how they relate that in Matthew or Luke, forty years between this man and forty years between that man, and so on and so forth, it is true that it refers to a generation. However when we look to the advent of Christ and how things were fulfilled in His first advent, from the time Christ was born, which set certain prophecies in motion, and as time progressed and He comes to His baptism, then He is anointed and ministers three and one half years. Then He comes to Calvary. All along through those years certain prophecies that spoke of this were being fulfilled. Then we could sat that from His birth to 70 A.D. we have a span of seventy years at the most, God has exclusively dealt with the Jewish nation that has been restored in the land. Therefore at the end of seventy years, he sent the Roman army and destroys them. They are scattered, never to be dealt with any more until only in the last days. So my point is this, The reason I illustrate that 70 A.D., that is not where we terminate this line. (pointing to chart) As I say, we would have to push the week of Daniel over here to 2035. That is where it figures out to be. On the other hand, if it has to be to a fixed time, the only other fixed time you can find in the Bible, that you could measure that span of time from, and have scriptural, logical, sensible means, you have to take it to 33 A.D.: which is the time when Jesus was crucified. Now if we can see what happened and understand prophetically what had happened, 33 A.D. in the advent of Christ, brings Israel to the end of Daniel’s 69 weeks of prophetic time. That was God’s measuring stick to them. Now let us study that for a little bit, the measuring stick. That 69 weeks you read about in Daniel 9:25-26, definitely had a beginning point in time, but you will notice that it does not stipulate exactly when this 69 weeks or 483 prophetic years would end, as far as giving them any kind of chart to go by. However, if they would have recognized the decree that came in Nehemiah’s day, and they would have been spiritually walking in the light of that, do you know what that yardstick should have told some of those Jewish leaders? If they really had believed their prophet, they should have understood that somewhere as they began to get down in the last 35 or 40 years of this point of time, they could begin to look at one another and say, Gentlemen, I perceive that by the word of God, we must be entering an era of time that we can expect our Messiah. That is how it should have been because they had a fixed point to look at. Remember Gentlemen, the decree that Nehemiah came with to build the walls? They were not ignorant of that. That was recorded in their chronology. It is just that a fixed ending was not written. Nevertheless it was described in a concealed way by showing them that as this 69th week, (the 483 years) is coming to a climax, the Messiah would be cut off. Because of their own spiritual ignorance, they failed to recognize the time they were living in. That very scripture is where Paul, in Romans 11, got his revelation and understanding, that blindness in part had happened to Israel. He did not lay all the blame on to them, because he did say, in part. For how long would this blindness prevail? Until the fullness of the Gentiles has come in. Those rabbis, which should have been watching those 69 weeks come about, when they began to hear of this man that began to preach and do miracles, should that not have caused them to go to the writings of the prophet Daniel and investigate more closely? Should that not have caused them to begin to wonder, Could be our Messiah? It had the opposite effect, they began to find all kinds of fault with. Their traditional school of thought would not let them see a thing. I will have to say, The Gentile religious world today is under the same kind of blinding cloud. There are writings in the Bible that have been there for hundreds of years, ever since the prophets of old picked up a pen and wrote them, that should be enough to show a spiritual minded person a few things; but Gentile religious mind’s are just as blind as any Jewish Pharisee you can read about in the Bible. They cannot spiritually tell daylight from dark as far as putting together any kind of prophetic picture from the scriptures. As far as the Jews recognizing their time of visitation, if the main body of their leaders had recognized what was happening, where would we Gentiles be today? The gospel was presented to the Gentiles as a result of the Jews rejecting their Messiah, but all of that was in the foreknowledge of the great Creator, so it did not come about because He did not know what else to do. You just have to realize that the plan of salvation and restoration is a very intelligently devised plan that no mortal could have been the author of. Those rabbis had the seventy weeks of Daniel but I am sure they looked at those scriptures the same way Gentiles look at the words of Jesus. Gentiles read those things Jesus gave as signs to watch for: to know the season He would be returning in, but Gentile scholars have spent hundreds of years developing theories about what they mean and they have passed right by the signs along the way that could have been a clue for them, to let them know where we are in time. Naturally they are conscious of some of the signs, but they have no order to them. They observe some of the things we see in the News day by day; and that causes them to say, Time is short: Jesus could come any minute now. Well, time is short, that is sure, but the rapture will not take place before Ezekiel 38 and 39 are fulfilled, so even though we are persuaded that this generation will see the wrap up of all that is written of this dispensation, we still have to realize that God is not going to get in a hurry and bypass something His prophets have been inspired to speak of. It is the same way with those Scribes and Pharisees in the days of the first advent of Jesus on earth: if they had read the writings of their prophets the right way and been ready to receive the Messiah, look what that would have done to all these other prophecies that were to be fulfilled between their rejection of the Messiah and the time when they (Israel) would recognize and accept Him. We have the revelation of Daniel 9:25-26, so it seems as clear as anything could be, “And after threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, but not for Himself;” and naturally we think they should have realized what was going on when they began to hear all the fussing and false accusation. Jerusalem was in an uproar because of Him. As time approached for the observance of the Passover, people were even asking Jesus, before He left Galilee, Are you going to Jerusalem to keep the Passover? He stayed behind. The rest of the family went ahead. So He went more or less in a concealed way. When He did come to Jerusalem, everybody in Jerusalem was saying, Do you think He will come? What was going on? Jerusalem was in an uproar, they were going to get that man and put Him where they thought He needed to be. We are tired of this devil coming around here, wrecking our tradition, our beautiful religious ceremonial program; and getting the people all stirred up and confused. They were basing their ideas and actions on the Bible, but they were doing it without a revelation. They stood in the streets, there was their Messiah, but they treated Him like an enemy. The man that was to be cut off exactly at the ending of the 69th week, was crucified there between two criminals, and those Jews did not know He was their Messiah that fulfilled those 69 weeks. My point in going through all that is this, (You will have to follow me all the way.) we have got to understand that 33 A.D. when Jesus was crucified, ended the 69th week, and there is an interval of time between the closing of the 69th and the initiating of the 70th one. There is a span of time which the prophet did not know the length of, between those last two weeks of prophetic time. But now that we are coming toward the end of our Grace Age, we have to begin to measure this backward, because we have a fixed point where it ends. The question is, Are we smart enough to take it back through time and come to an understanding of where it began? Just as they did not know how to end their 69th week, we are in the same position with the age of grace. Are we going to be caught sound asleep like they were? That is the point I am trying to illustrate. You take it back to the end of the 69th week, which I say falls exactly 33 A.D. Now if 33 A.D. is the point God had in mind when He had the prophet prophesy the language of these prophecies, and we see that Israel is going to be revived at the end of those two dispensational days, then here is how we can look at this time. From 33 A.D. we come to the year 2000 A.D. Using solar time, that is 1967 years of 365.25 days each. When you multiply 1967 years x 365.25 days, you get 718446.75 days. Then when you divide that by 360, (the number of days to a prophetic year) you come up with a total of 1995.68 prophetic years from the year Jesus was crucified to the year 2000 A.D. calendar time, which means that when the year 2000 arrives, we will still be 4 years and 291 days of prophetic time short of the two days (2000 years) of Hosea 6:1-2. That would mean that those two days of 1000 prophetic years each would expire between 2004 and 2005 A.D., starting of course with 33 A.D. when Jesus was crucified. (This is the year most scholars agree upon as the year of the crucifixion.) If after two days Jehovah is going to revive Israel, that means you can look for the 70th week of Daniel to start between 2004 and 2005 A.D., for in that week is when they are going to be revived; and it will be through the ministry of the two Jewish prophets of Revelation 11: 3-7. Do not be confused by all of these numbers. The 2000 years of calendar time are measured from the time of the birth of Christ, not His death, and they are 365.25 days each. The reason the two days of Hosea’s prophecy cannot start before the time Jesus was crucified, is because the 69th week of Daniel’s prophecy did not end until Jesus was cut off. Just remember the words of Daniel 9:26, “And after threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off;” and you will see that Hosea’s two days could not start before then. With that in mind, I want you to think seriously: the year 2000 is only seven years away. I know one thing, if we all live another seven years the calendar is going to proclaim boldly 2000 A.D. I am wondering what the calendar publishers, even the world in general, is going to be thinking when that second Millennium is completed and the world is still going about its every day affairs? I cannot help but feel they are really going to put on the dog. Well we made it to 2000 A.D. so let us celebrate. By the calendar, they will be right; but by God’s method of keeping time, the world will still be approximately 4 1/2 prophetic years short of 2000 years since the 69th week of Daniel came to an end. Nevertheless if the 70th week of Daniel is to literally start at the ending of the two days, do you know what that would means? That would tell you that by the year 2005, the last week of Daniel should be in place. That is just simple calculation based upon that which the Bible gives us to go by, and it in no way is an effort to try and predict the day and hour of the Lord’s return. We will make sure you have the chart to look at as you try to concentrate on the conversion of solar time into prophetic time. I know some will say, Why does it have to be so confusing, but I say this: We ought to thank God that He has enabled us to see what we see. He has not changed His method of keeping time. It is man that keeps changing things. That is why I am so thankful that the Spirit of God caused Daniel and John to specify the exact number of days involved in the prophecy given for this last day wind up. When you see that the word of God has the 70th week of Daniel divided into two equal periods of 1260 days each, you should have no trouble figuring out how God keeps time. When you talk about the first 69 weeks of Daniel’s 70 week prophesy, you are dealing with 483 years prophetic time. Bro. Jackson: Why is it so important for us to know all of this? Because we are dealing with events Jesus said would all take place in one generation, and you cannot stretch a generation to the extremes some people’s ideas would stretch it to. It is true man measures this time factor from the birth of Christ to where we are now as solar time, but when we begin to look at the grace age, it did not start until the death of Christ Jesus, and if it is to be 2000 years long to harmonize with those prophecies and you use solar time to calculate it by, that would push the climax of the grace age and the fulfilling of that last week of Daniel too far into the 21st century for it to still be in the generation that saw the fig tree (Israel) put forth leaves and start the count down. With all of that in mind, as we begin to recognize the time factor man is living in, then this chart only represents, or illustrates how we perceive these prophecies that are related to it from the year 1939 up until now, and then on to the end. Therefore to state my point again, if the beginning point of measurement goes back to the crucifixion of Christ, as I believe it does, and not to the destruction of the temple in 70 A.D., then this should all work out as we have it portrayed. Simply because, if we move it up to the destruction of the temple, then this week of Daniel cannot come about until around 2035 A.D., and I just have to say, That takes the future and the coming of Christ for His Millennium reign far beyond our generation. There are those sitting here listening to me that belong to the same generation I belong to, and I realize I do not have to be alive to see the wind up of all of this; but some of us have to be: to fulfill the words of Jesus in Matthew 24:32-34planning for the future “Now learn a parable of the fig tree; (Israel) When his branch is yet tender, and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer is nigh: So likewise ye, when ye shall see all these things, know that it is near, even at the doors. Verily I say unto you, This generation (the generation that saw the start of Israel being put back together) shall not pass, till all these things be fulfilled.” What things? The things He was speaking of just prior to that, the great tribulation being one of them. I do not speak from the standpoint that I have to be alive to see the end of all of this, but I am looking at a generation that people my age represent. I remember 1939 and the years following, when Hitler and his henchmen were determined to do away with the Jews altogether. That is why somewhere right in here is the beginning of a generation factor related to this prophecy, both to the Gentile side as well as the Jewish side. If you were to go to Israel today, you would find Jewish people in their late sixties, who were young children in the concentration camps in Hitler’s hour. You could talk to some that survived the holocaust. They lost their parents, they have grown up from childhood, some from infancy, without their parents. They can tell you of the horror they experienced in that hour, how they lost their daddy and mother, and the suffering they witnessed. That is why we cannot push this line representing the grace age all the way over to 2035. That would take all those people out of the picture. It goes beyond the generation that has lived to see these end time things come about. In other words, keep in mind, when time starts that there are certain signs spoken of in the Bible that are to be markers representing the things Jesus spoke of in Matthew 24, that generation that begins to see those markers, at least some of them will live to see the end of it all. Sure there will be a lot of them die off before they get to the end, but some of that generation will be around to testify to what took place that started the end time wind up. Some that saw it, from the Gentile side, will be raptured, but others of that generation will go right on into the great tribulation. Somewhere as this thing is all over, and all these prophecies are fulfilled and everything in place, there will be some of those people still alive. There has always been a living testimony somewhere to bear witness of what God has done. Just like when Jesus was born, I would say there were a few children living in the neighborhood that eventually throughout the country side began to hear the story. Like, There was a woman that gave birth to a strange baby boy down in Bethlehem. Did you hear that story? Yes. Notice, it never went on record as far as the government, but do you think those sheep herders went back out there the next day and herded sheep saying, Oh, forget the whole thing. It is all a hoax. No. Those sheep herders never could forget how they heard the angels sing, and how they were told of the birth of a baby which would be a Savior to them. It is recorded in the 2nd chapter of Luke, beginning with verse 8. “And there were in the same country shepherds abiding in the field, keeping watch over their flock by night. And, lo, the angel of the Lord came upon them, and the glory of the Lord shone round about them: and they were sore afraid. And the angel said unto them, Fear not: for, behold, I bring you good tidings of great joy, which shall be to all people. For unto you is born this day in the city of David a Saviour, which is Christ the Lord. And this shall be a sign unto you; Ye shall find the babe wrapped in swaddling clothes, lying in a manger. And suddenly there was with the angel a multitude of the heavenly host praising God, and saying, Glory to God in the highest, and on earth peace, good will toward men. And it came to pass, as the angels were gone away from them into heaven, the shepherds said one to another, Let us now go even unto Bethlehem, and see this thing which is come to pass, which the Lord hath made known unto us.” Yes saints, those shepherds (which were eye witnesses) told that story for as long as they lived. Furthermore I seriously doubt that they were able to sleep that night, after hearing such news. My point is this, From that hour on there was a story that began to spread throughout the countryside. There is a woman in this land that gave birth to an unusual child. Of course if we look at the overall religious society of Israel in that day, it was just like our Gentile society is today. They would hear such a story and say, Oh that is nonsense. I do not believe any of that. Right here in the Jerusalem Post I just received, a writer, here in 1993, discussing his own nation as it exists today, made me think of the Sadducees of old. They claimed to be Abraham’s seed but they did not believe in angels, they did not believe in the hereafter, nor did they believe in spirits. Yet they were ready to say, We are Abraham’s seed. So what! I would just as soon heard someone say he was an Apache Indian, if that is all the respect he has for Abraham. If Abraham could come back and hear such as that, he would probably run him out of the country with a stick. To think a Jew that wants to lean on his genealogy, has no more revelation than that. Right in the Jerusalem Post yesterday that writer wrote this, Was the birth of the statehood of Israel a miracle? Was it an act of God, or do we associate it only as a process of man’s human negotiation?. Any man or woman in their right mind would know that it had to be an act of God. After time had gone on for almost 1900 years since the destruction of the temple and their captivity, and then out of the chaos and disaster, and devastation of a war, the world is literally pressured to do something for the Jews, there is only one logical conclusion: God moved on those world leaders precisely at the right time to set the prophecies in motion. That is why 1948 brings us to a time factor, the time when the nation was reborn. It fulfills Isaiah 66, starting with verse 8. “Who hath heard such a thing? who hath seen such things? Shall the earth be made to bring forth in one day? or shall a nation be born at once? for as soon as Zion travailed, she brought forth her children.” Yes, a nation was born in one day, and that certainly caught the attention of a lot of Jew haters. But more than anything else, it established the fact that we were living in that generation Jesus spoke of, that would live to see the climax of all He had spoken of. If we can look at this time factor with a spiritual eye, it will speak for itself the things we have been stressing in this message. As I say this I want to say, For goodness sakes, when we look at this and would perceive that somewhere around the year 2000 A.D. or 2005 A.D. this prophetic time is going to run to an end. By all logical reasons we can perceive that somewhere in that time factor that week of Daniel will be set in motion. It is only seven years to the year 2000. Then it would only be four and one half years more to 2005 and you have the prophetic dispensation in line. Just keep in mind, we are not trying to predict a day, a year, or a month that Jesus Christ is coming. We are Gentiles; and Gentiles have always been foolish people; but we who are Christians know better than to do that. All down through time Gentiles have played with something. They have to have a set time. Last fall, there were characters walking the streets of Louisville, standing in front of bank buildings, airports and all sorts of places passing out tracts which stated, Divine revelation given to an Oriental boy, (which was just a kid) lets us know that October 28, 1992, the end of the world is coming and Jesus is coming in the rapture. Well saints we are still here and I will tell you why. It is not time for that yet. People who project those things are hanging their calculations on something that is unrelated to such a prophetic picture. They will go into certain things of the Law, they pull out certain types and say, according to the type here it must be such and such. You cannot use the Law like that. The type is in the Law, but until the nation of Israel returns to a time factor in which they are offering sacrifice on an altar again, and they have a priestly order functioning in their role, those things in prophecies of the future tense are still hanging suspended: just as though a stop watch had stopped all activity. Sure there are Jews back home, but they are not offering sacrifice. So with that we have to realize for that particular point of type, that would be out of the Law writing, like Leviticus, for it to be actually used as a help in understanding the coming of the Lord, then that portion of the law has to be active, which it is not now. Do you understand what I mean by that? There is no altar yet dedicated. There is no sacrifice on it. Therefore any type pertaining to Leviticus that is pointing to the fall of the year, beginning in the seventh month, is not active at this time. That is the way you have to look at it.


WHAT CATHOLICISM IS PROMOTING


I was given a paper awhile ago that causes me to feel the way I do about some things that are going on. The reason I am wanting to deal with things like this is because you are going to see in this religious world, another spirit rise up. It is coming from the realm of Roman Catholicism. I read a little sketch of it already. They too, are making predictions. Just this past July 1st, a priest in Portugal, at the place called Fatima, claims he was communicated with for a period of two hours by the virgin Mary. Out of that, he got a forty page sermon, supposedly from her. The predictions and things she informed him of, things that are about to be manifested in the human societies on earth. I tell you saints, some of it will never be because it is of the devil’s doings. He is just using it to get a bunch of people that do not know their ABC’s as far as the Bible is concerned, to believe in a myth of some kind. That is why I have to look at this Catholic spirit in these last days the way I do. It is coming on the scene, it is hovering over a bunch of spiritually dead Protestant people that no longer know a thing about real salvation. They are just religious. They just have a form of religion in their mind’s. What they have is not in their hearts. You are not going to live this Christian life just in your mind. It has to be something that motivates you from within your heart. Catholicism has always been a thing of the mind; and this Catholic spirit is definitely coming on strong. To think that in a nation that was known for centuries as a Protestant nation, you can now buy these magazines on the News stands that make all sorts of claims that any true Christian ought to reject at once. Yet Protestant societies just gobble it all up. This priest that supposedly had this experience was so shook up by what he heard, because certain things were supposed to start in 1995, then 1996, 1997 and right up on to the year 2000. He speaks of devastating things taking place. Well I do not have to read that kind of things from his report: I find it is all in the Bible already. The fact that the Catholic Church now says so, does not mean anything at all to me; nor does it make the Catholic Church anything. I will say this, Everything written in this Book (the Bible) is going to come to pass whether the Catholic Church and apostate Protestantism agrees with it or not. Out of what they project, there may be certain things come about as they predict; and naturally people will rally around it because the world of religion looks to that old system as something special. The point is, This priest was so shook up when he notified Pope John Paul II and told of his experience, the pope was really a very nervous man. This priest related all this to him; and just think, he came to America, knowing all of that, and not one thing was said about any of it in Denver. Nevertheless when he began to downgrade America, and began to look at America’s leadership, how America should take the leadership role in helping establish world peace, you have to realize that man was looking at something right down the road. I have said this before, I do not know that this man will actually live long enough to be the antichrist; but let us just say, If he is the man, he is going to be an old man by then. You have to realize, human beings only live so long, and the year 2000 is seven years off. That means that man is going to be in his 80’s. Therefore there has to be certain health qualities that he will be beginning to enter into. I believe health wise, I would not see him as a man healthy enough to go through the whole week of Daniel; but if he sets a stage for something, then if God took him off the scene, the next man would step right in his shoes, and he would have a vision to carry out only what Pope John Paul II has started to do in these last days. The religious world will flock around that. Let me get back to our line of thought, looking toward the end through windows of prophecy. We realize that in 1967 the Jewish nation was faced with something she did not plan, but it worked for her good. She was living in a petitioned land, something like this. That was an area that many Jews, from the beginning of the 20th century, from Poland, Russia, different places of the world went back to and slowly bought up acre after acre of land. That was the Zionist movement’s original plan: buy it up through centuries of time. They were buying up the waste land from the land owners, which was these Arabs you hear so much about in the News. That was not necessarily God’s way. Not that He was against what they were doing: it was the fact that this method was too slow to accomplish all that was written in the scriptures pertaining to the end time. Well you know what happened. The United Nations Assembly was pressured to petitioned the land and grant the Jews a certain area they could come back to. However since the Palestinian Arab in there did not want a statehood, they did not want those Jews to be back there, so their idea was, We will destroy this state. At that time, King Nasser of Egypt was the leader. You know the whole story. In six days time Israel, that had been living in a petitioned land, yet from 1948 to 1967, God had allowed her to grow and prosper from nothing but obsolete weapons so primitive they were barely able to fight and defend themselves, to an hour when she had aircraft that was some of the best in the world, was able not only to defend themselves, but also to attain a great victory over their attackers. Think of it, in six days Israel defended herself, pushed her borders to the Jordan River here, to the Red Sea here, and took the Gaza Strip and old Jerusalem, which lays along right in there. Keep in mind Jesus prophesied in Luke’s writing, as He spoke to the disciples concerning the last days, “And Jerusalem shall be trodden down of the Gentiles until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled.” It started with the Babylonians. Then it went to the Medes and Persians, then to the Greek, then to the Romans. He said it will be trodden down of the Gentiles until the time of the Gentiles be fulfilled. In June 1967, after almost 2500 years, Jerusalem was once again in the hands of its rightful owners. She had been under the control of some dominating empire all those years; and now Jerusalem was back under the control of the Israeli government. Think of it, the Jewish soldiers successfully drove the Jordanian Arab army out of there. Then when those soldiers stood at the western wall weeping, lifting their weapons in the air they cried, Never again will we see any flag flying over Jerusalem other than the Star of David. May I say this, the world of Gentiles may not have understood what that meant to the Jewish soldiers, but every time they go to school and study their histories, they study them strictly from the standpoint of who they are. That is why it was important for them to free that city. The only thing is, when they came to the holy temple mount area, they stopped short of going right in on that temple mount and running that Islamic bunch of leaders out of there and saying, from now on we will take this over. They stopped short so the Moslem Mosque is still standing there and the Moslems are allowed to go there for worship. The Israeli’s knew the world, at that time, would not stand for Israel to go in there and destroy the Moslem’s place of worship. That is why they stopped short of taking the whole city. They have lived in this occupied area and they put soldiers there and all this, and they have controlled the Palestinian Arabs; and since 1967 you have read the history of the turmoil and strife and western leaders keep telling Israel, In order to have peace you have got to be willing to give up some of this occupied territory. When they refer to Jericho, positioned along right in here, they are talking about a territory that goes something similar to what it was like before: plus over here is the Gaza Strip, the ancient land of the Philistines. As I said the other night, This is not giving up land. This is a social and political thing. I will read what the Jerusalem Post says. “Peres has said any package with the Palestinians should include Gaza and Jericho, a declaration of principle on self rule in the rest of the territories and the early assumption of authority complete with international economic assistance. (Now here is the sad part. I want to show you something. As Israel allows these Arabs living in this Jericho area and the Gaza Strip area to have self rule within those territories, then it means the western world is going to have to come along with finances and help to stabilize a life style and an acceptable economy within those areas. Do you see what that means? There goes some more of your tax dollars: just to fulfill what our leaders say Israel must do. We are going to have to pay the bill.) At the core of the reported, Peres, Abu ….. agreement would be the redeployment of Israeli forces away from the Palestinian population. (That means Israeli troops will no longer ride through Jericho in jeeps, keeping their eyes on the Palestinian Arabs. It will be Palestinian Arabs who will have to furnish their own police forces. The same way in the Gaza Strip.) We are not talking about total IDF withdrawal from Gaza and Jericho, however the Palestinians would control their internal security. We would be in charge of dangers being posed to Israelis, an official said. Senior officials rejected the idea that Palestinians outside the territories could simply immigrate to Gaza or Jericho. We would control the borders and the sea. We will not allow any right of return, an official said.” Now I ask you saints, Do you know what that means? Old Jerusalem, and I am talking about “old” Jerusalem, which is three fourths inhabited by Palestinian Arabs, would not be left in a very favorable position for fulfilling prophecy. Old Jerusalem is the ancient capital of the land of Israel. It is old Jerusalem that fills the prophetic picture, when we get to Isaiah 60. In Isaiah 60 it plainly tells us that the inhabitants that have made it waste, a desolate, run down place through the centuries, will be far removed. Now with that in mind, let me explain what I mean. With three fourths of the population in old Jerusalem being Arabs, (Remember, this is the Jewish capital.) When those Arabs look across and see the Palestinian Arab here in Jericho having their own independence, socially and politically, and they see their counter part here in the Gaza Strip doing the same, that is going to cause the Palestinian Arabs in Jerusalem to say, We want our independence also. They are going to say to the Israeli soldiers, Get out of here! When you see all these uprising, and those children throwing rocks, where do you think that is taking place? That is not in Jericho, that is not in the Gaza Strip. It is in old Jerusalem. Had you thought about that? The reason I brought that in, is because that will no doubt start a time bomb ticking away. I have another part here I want to read. Since we are talking about Old Jerusalem, keep in mind, on the south western slopes of old Jerusalem, they discovered a few months back the ancient ruins of what they perceived is the old palace grounds of King David. When King David took the ancient city of the Jebusites, there was a certain strategic place where he had his palace built. That was known as King David’s city. Archaeologically, a few months ago, they began to unearth some of this. There was a little problem that arose between them and the political bunch; but now in that same area they have archaeologically moved things back, and here is what it says about it. “Construction of phase one of David’s village, the luxurious residential enclave of the A…. project has been completed. Twenty five owners already possess their homes which face the old city walls and David’s citadel. (Right there is where King David was when he was having Israel numbered and they were dying like flies. Then when he looked out the window praying and God gave him the ultimatum to do certain things, and he saw that angel standing there with his sword drawn, that is where King David decided the tabernacle should be moved to. There, is where eventually a temple was to be built.) Joel Hallas, chief executive of the project anticipates that by Rosh Hashana, virtually all the purchasers will have taken delivery of their homes. The first model apartment of David’s village was sold shortly after it was opened. With the purchase of that first apartment, having taken delivery at the end of June, chief rabbi Israel Meir Lyle, joined chairman of Ladbrook, Cyril, Stein to affix a me…. to the elegant new apartment which opened at the beginning of July. Ladbrook will soon start the building of phase two of the project which will add 55 more residences to the development phase. Prices are to start around two hundred thousand dollars.” Well if you want to retire and move to Jerusalem, and live in David’s village, that is what you will be facing. Why did I read that? some may be wondering. Simply because it fits in with one of the prophecies we will bring in a little later.


PROPHECY OF ZEPHANIAH


Before we go into a prophecy given by Zephaniah, I would like to impress upon everyone who hears this message, that time is too short for anyone just to play around with time as though we know when Jesus is coming and nothing else matters. Let us not get our mind’s in that frame of thinking. We do not know the day and hour of the Lord’s coming, but we do need to realize at the same time that all these types and prophecies in the scriptures were put there to inform someone of something; so let us not become unconcerned about where we are in time. There are some in the religious world that will say, Well, how do you know if so and so means what you say it does? Or, Are you sure that is what that is saying? I can just see this spiritually dead religious world out here, so full of traditional ideas, yet without any idea whatsoever of how to look at time and prophecy the way the Bible portrays certain things. When I say that, there are critics that say, You talk like you know everything. No. I do not claim to know everything; but what I do know, I know it. I am not just guessing about it. Surely anyone who claims to have faith in God, would know that God would not be without some vessels somewhere that knows something; and I just have to say, I am going to be one of them. I refuse to accept this silly idea that it does not matter. A man that talks like that is actually saying God is some senile God that had to write certain things down on paper just in case He would forget that such and such was to be. He already knew what was going to be. He put all of this in here for you and me. I will say also, He put none of it in here for us to just play around with it and come out with a bunch of silly traditions. That is the very thing all down through the ages of time, that has caused sincere people to miss God’s plan. Yet at the same time He is not putting things in here to give you and me such accuracy that we will want to define the coming of Christ and put everything on a schedule. Just imagine, if I were going around saying, I know what date He is coming. No saints. He will not allow us to be that accurate. If the angels do not know, do not think you and I, as carnal as we are, are going to know any more than they know. I do believe with all my heart, that He is going to inform His true people of the nearness of His coming. That will be in respect to a particular season of time: not a day and hour. Common sense tells me that when there is snow on the ground, and the ground is frozen, I do not need to look for peaches on a tree. Common sense, in respects to prophecy of the scriptures, tells me that God put those prophecies in the Bible to reveal them to His children in the respective hour when they are applicable. However when I cease to feel that cold air, and I see the grass begin to turn green, and see some buds on the peach tree, I know winter is fleeing and summer is ahead. I can then begin to look for peaches to eventually form on that tree. Common sense tells us that certain things which are laid out in the Bible are there for someone to understand at the proper time. To some people in the religious world, most of these prophecies appear to be so unimportant. That is why they read right over them. They do not mean a thing to them because they do not see them related to anything that satisfies their theological, traditional outlook. Well I have to say, I find plenty in these prophecies that interest me; so let us look at some more of them. We saw in Zechariah 10, how God would set about to restore the nation of Israel in the last days, and how Judah would be first. That is exactly what He did. At the close of WW2, up to the years leading to the 1967 war, it was hard for Jews to get out of Russia or any of the area under Russia’s Communistic control. The basic part of Jews were mainly those out of Africa, some from South America and Europe. They were Jews related to the Judah tribe, or to the tribe of Benjamin. According to Zechariah 10, God said He would save Judah first because it was through the restoration of that tribe that actually began the rebirth of that nation. Then after it reached a certain point of time He began to set things in motion to save Joseph, which also is called by the name Ephraim. That of course applies to the other ten tribes of Israel which were taken captive before Judah. Then it says that together they would become a mighty man, meaning a nation. We have to understand how this began to come to pass, especially from the time of the 1967 war. That is why we probably should read a prophecy of Zephaniah first. Here is what took place in 1967. We find it in Zephaniah 2; and there are two parts of it that are applicable, and should be read along with the 10th chapter of Zechariah. In the year of 1967 in the month of June, Israel was faced with defending what little she already had: for her enemies had determined to drive her into the sea. Keep in mind though, that we are looking only at the tribe of Judah, which by then was well represented back in the land. She was living at that time, within the area that had been petitioned for her by the U.N. Israel was content to live within those borders prior to 1967; but the Palestinian Arabs that lived in the land were not content to have them there; so their idea was, We will drive you into the sea. This was not the Jews plan, this was the Arab’s plan. King Nasser of Egypt took the lead, followed by Syria, then Jordan. Three countries working together were going to drive a little group of Jews into the sea and be rid of them forever (they thought). When I was privileged in 1968, to talk to that Jewish general, which was one of the commanders of their armored division that went through the Sinai to the Red Sea, I learned a few things. He said, Our strategy, while feeling that we were outnumbered, was that we would hold out as long as possible, then gradually make our retreat and try to make Tel Aviv our Dunkirk. Meaning there is where they would expect some western nations to have sympathy on their plight and bring some amphibious means to rescue them from the beaches and take them somewhere else. However this was God’s time to demonstrate that He was still with them; and you every one know the outcome. That little nation Israel, which did not have the number of planes, the number of tanks, neither the number of men that could be expected to be victorious against such odds, astonished the whole world with what they were able to do in that short war. They were out gunned, out numbered in every way. Logistically there was no way they could meet such a force with any hope for victory, but when God took control of it and gave the Jews the master mind in how to set about the strategy, the outcome shocked all concerned parties. Remember the little chorus we sometimes sing, Little is Much if God is in It. That is exactly what that was. God was in that battle with Israel. He gave them wisdom to take the fighter planes they had and by using a strategy that took the Arabs and Egyptians by surprise, in a matter of a few hours they had completely knocked out the Egyptian and Syrian Air Force by destroying the planes on the ground, as well as tearing up the runways so they could not get the rest of their fighters off the ground. That cleared the way and gave the Israeli Air Force supremacy in the air, which in turn gave their ground forces an advantage over the enemy. To think that in six days they fulfilled a prophecy that the world did not even realize was in the picture. You are looking at it in a few verses of Zephaniah 2. (4) “For Gaza shall be forsaken.” The Gaza Strip is over here on the Mediterranean, right below Tel Aviv. It runs down toward Egypt. That was one portion of the land of Israel Jews were never permitted to capture, because when God did bring them into this land back in the days of Joshua, and the Jews began to compromise and save certain individuals from different tribes, God saw that He must do something, so He plainly told them there would be seven tribes throughout that land they would never be able to literally subdue; and the Philistine tribe was the major one. God at various times would use them to prove Israel, and we can read all through the years of time, Israel was constantly fighting some of those people. The Philistines were the most wicked, most powerful, fighting type of people they faced. Well here we are at the ending of time we see a different picture. Let us read the entire verse of Zephaniah 2:4, and continue on. “For Gaza shall be forsaken, and Ashkelon a desolation: they shall drive out Ashdod at the noon day, and Ekron shall be rooted up. (5) Woe unto the inhabitants of the sea coast, the nation of the Cherethites! the word of the Lord is against you; O Canaan, the land of the Philistines, I will even destroy thee, that there shall be no inhabitant. (6) And the sea coast shall be dwellings and cottages for shepherds, and folds for flocks.” That is not talking about Arab goats and sheep. That is talking about the eventuality of Jewish farmers and Jewish herds men that will move into those areas, which at this present time they have not done that. In 1967, from that very region came Egyptian troops: therefore they were compelled to fight the Egyptians from that angle. They drove the Egyptians out of the Gaza Strip, putting Israel in complete control of the land from then until now. Let us notice this next verse. (7) “And the coast shall be for the remnant of the house of Judah; (Remember that Zechariah 10 says God would visit the house of Judah, and that He would save Judah first. That is according to God’s process of restoration, to give this region to the tribe of Judah. All of this fits right into the total picture if we can just look at it right. The coast shall be for the remnant of the house of Judah, which had never been in ancient Biblical times.) they shall feed thereupon: in the houses of Ashkelon shall they lie down in the evening: for the Lord their God shall visit them, and turn away their captivity.” Now we are looking at a fixed prophecy: that the Gaza Strip is destined to be eternally, and securely possessed by the tribe of Judah. I read the article in the Jerusalem Post, how Peres the leader, along with Rabin, have agreed with certain Palestinian Arabs, to give them self government in those regions, in the Gaza Strip, as well as over in this other area. Now keep in mind the areas they took in the six day war, when they pushed everything to the sea over here, and to the river over here: that was the old areas of the tribe of Judah. That is why through the years since 1967, the Jewish government has looked upon all that region as belonging to Judaea, and they refer to the whole thing as Judaea. So looking at this prophecy we can see that the Gaza Strip is not only in the hands of Israel, which is basic to the tribe of Judah, but also as they took this in the six day war, all that area is to be under the complete control and possession of the tribe of Judah. There is where that prophecy stops. Now the rest of the prophecy, we notice in verse 8. That is why we have it up here on our chart, Zephaniah 2:8-11. We also have Numbers 24, and Jeremiah 48 to consider; but before we go there, here is what we have to realize. These windows on our chart do not actually represent to you wherein certain scriptures are to be fulfilled. Do not look at it that way. They are only symbolic of a span of time wherein certain scriptures are applicable. That is the way I want you to look at it. My point is, You cannot take one scripture and put it back here somewhere. It will not work there, simply because we see these scriptures are actually talking about what we will read in verse 8. Let us read it and show how it lines up. “I have heard the reproach of Moab, (There it is. What did the Lord have in mind when He said the reproach of Moab?) and the revilings of the children of Ammon, whereby they have reproached my people, and magnified themselves against their border.” There is Ammon. Do you realize that both these are descendants of Lot by his two daughters, through an act of incest? You can read that in Genesis. In ancient times the Moabites and Ammonites were tribes Israel had conflict with at times, but we notice also Edom. That is where the descendants of Esau settled. When we look across the river, which Israel does not necessarily possess, the very fact God says He has remembered the reproaches of Moab, when you go back to Jeremiah and you see the Babylonian armies coming to begin their invasion and to take away the children of Israel into Babylonian captivity, the people of Moab heard about it and here is what they did. There began to be a flow of Jews leaving the land of Israel, Jerusalem, trying to escape across the border to get away from the invading Babylonians. You can read about it in Isaiah, Jeremiah, and so forth. Well God was watching the whole thing, and when Jewish people trying their best to flee the invasion of that vast army fled across the River Jordan, hoping to find a bit of refuge in these areas among these people, when you actually go back in the Old Testament and read about that, instead of these people showing the Jews any kindness, they caught them and took them back over and turned them over to the Babylonian army. Their idea was, We will get rid of that bunch of Jews over there and when they are all gone, we will help ourselves to the land. That is a kind of hypocrisy. That is what it all summed up to be. God remembered every bit of it. Therefore Isaiah prophesied against those people. Jeremiah did too. Here we find Zephaniah prophesying. Keep in mind, in the ancient times Israel never did possess those areas where those tribes were. It is true along the coast of the Dead Sea and through here is Benjamin, as well as up in here. There are also portions of the ten tribes that run up into Gilead. Knowing this, we just have to watch as the Israeli government makes this temporary peace pact allowing the Arabs within the Gaza Strip, as well as this area of Jericho to have self rule. Actually it is a social, domestic, and political thing which is actually illustrated like this, The Jews are saying to the Arabs living in those areas, You can now have your own mayor, your own town council, your own police force and if any of you kill one another you are going to have to depend upon your own police force to handle it. We are not going to be there. Yet the Jerusalem Post tells us the Israeli military troops will be positioned along the border areas, always to supervise and see that there is nothing planned or plotted within the ranks of these Arabs to create a danger from those areas, to the Jewish people. So actually the Israeli government is not giving up the land for complete national independence; but only for the people to have autonomy, self government, while they will still patrol the land for security reasons. Therefore knowing that the government has stipulated that she is giving the Gaza Arabs and the Jericho Arabs complete freedom to have their own mayors and such, let us turn our eyes to old Jerusalem. As I said already, the old city is three fourths populated by Arabs. Now the old city is the city that is definitely going to be renovated, rehabilitated, and re-inhabited by Jews to get it ready for the coming of the Messiah, because Jesus will sit in a rebuilt temple in a newly built city as the Millennium starts. That is the way Isaiah 60 brings it out. Now let us look at these prophecies we have up here. We know this, when we come over here and see the week of Daniel, when we read the 11th chapter of Revelation, John was given a reed and told to measure the altar and them that worship therein. What does that mean? Simply this, Somehow, just prior to the time all else is in position for the week of Daniel to begin, Israel somehow or other is going to be given an opportunity to get rid of the Mosque of Omar that stands on the temple mount today. That will face Israel with the responsibility of starting to build the Millennial temple. Therefore as we look to these prophecies, just be aware that the year 2000 A.D., as measured by solar time, is only seven years away. Think of it. Just a little over seven years away. Yet the prophetic time we talked about, and have tried to explain in an understandable way using this chart, comes just a little more than 4 years short of the two prophetic days of one thousand years each the prophet Hosea spoke of. (6:2) “After two days will He revive us: in the third day He will raise us up, and we shall live in His sight.” That is why we have the chart drawn out this way, to illustrate how time is measured, and how time will harmonize with these various prophecies. As I say this, I see no way this world, as it is right now, can continue on for another 35 or 40 years before Jesus comes for His bride Church. If it goes another 35 or 40 years, think of it, the actual generation of humanity that has experienced all these prophecies being fulfilled already, (these prophetic signs that mark a generation Jesus said would live to see it all climaxed) will all be dead. Did not Jesus prophesy that very thing in Matthew 24, that this generation (the generation that saw these end time prophecies begin to be fulfilled) shall not pass away until all be fulfilled? You really have to look at the Jewish side, as well as the Gentile side of this picture. Therefore there has to be an element of that generation around to see the end of this age wrapped up. Therefore without presenting to you anything that would be unscriptural, I just want to impress upon you, that it will all have to wrap up somewhere around the turn of the next century; and not 35 or 40 years into the 21st century. I see it all coming about by the year 2005, which would constitute the full two prophetic days of Hosea 6; because we are looking at a time factor. If it is seven years to the year 2000 A.D. calendar time, and then we look at the end of the prophetic time, which would be around 2005, you are only looking at twelve years. So what does that tell me? The present world society is no doubt looking at a twelve year term of time that it can continue on as it is now. There is no doubt we are going to see great developments, upheavals, fast fulfilling of prophecies brought about by God creating circumstances in the political realm, that will literally startle mankind. Once God starts this thing in the Middle East, He is not going to drag it out over decades. No sir. As I said earlier, we are no doubt looking at a generation of time of 60 to 70 years. No less, and no more. From the birth of Christ, calendar time, by the year 70 A.D., Jerusalem was in ruins, the temple was gone, the Jews were sold into slavery, and Israel ceased to be a nation, and that all took place in a 70 year span of time. Well when you take that 70 years of time and place it over here at the end, and then go to Zechariah 12. To me, this is one of the important keys as to how to look at the time factor.

1994-01-Looking-Through-Windows-of-Prophecy-Part-1

Look For Clues, Part 2 – 1993, November

Look For Clues, Part 2 - 1993, November

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

WE ARE CONTINUING THE THOUGHT WE WERE ON IN LAST ISSUE. WE ARE LOOKING FOR CLUES THAT POINT TO THE COMING OF THE LORD.


This chart we are using is to give a little illustration of time: as we talk about the seven Church Ages in relationship to how it all climaxes here in the end time. Through the years when Bro. Branham was ministering there were many things said that many people misinterpreted. When he preached the seals messages and told how God had dealt with him in Arizona: when he saw that constellation of angels and things of that nature, you would be surprised the number of people that memorized all those things and have a feeling that those seven angels he saw definitely have to be connected with the seven thunders. I am aware of what Bro. Branham said; but I wonder if a lot of those people really do know what was going on? That is the question: Do people really know what was going on, or are they looking at something because they have a mental picture they are cultivating simply because they have read and memorized so much they figure this has to be in here and that over there: whether it makes any scriptural sense or not? If he had not said some of the things he said, they would all still have to go by the Bible. For too long people have assumed that everything he said had to have a meaning concerning how you and I see ourselves in these last days in relationship to what we believe. When I say that, I realize some people in their mind will say, Well Bro. Jackson, don’t you believe what he said? To that I have to say, When you question me like that, you have not heard me right. Therefore I am using this chart because it is the only way I can think of to try and illustrate to you what we are talking about. I ask you this question, When the Grace Age started, what did we have in the Old Testament that could give us any indication as to how the Holy Ghost would come? You have one scripture in Isaiah 28. Then you have another scripture, Joel 2. Joel prophesied that in the last days He would pour out of His spirit upon all flesh. Your sons and daughters shall prophesy, old men shall dream dreams, young men shall see visions and so forth. That prophecy is applicable to the whole Grace Age, as long as it lasts. When the day of Pentecost did come, it came with a manifestation of the Spirit of God and none of the disciples knew what to expect. They had read Isaiah 28, no doubt many times; but did they really know how to acquaint that with what was taking place? No. Everything that took place on the day of Pentecost was a complete new experience, unrehearsed, and not even thought of. Only when it came, were the disciples beginning to be able to put together a few things Jesus had said so a revelation could be formed in their mind’s. Did He not say, I have yet many things to tell you, but as of now you are not able to bear them? However, after the Holy Spirit, the Comforter is come, He was to lead the believer into all truth. The age of grace was then in effect; and you will notice that when the Holy Ghost came, He came with manifestations. After the Holy GHost came upon those disciples there in the upper room, they were heard speaking in other languages as they came down into the streets of Jerusalem. That manifestation caught the attention of a great multitude of people; and as they questioned it the apostle Peter stood up and spoke to them by the direction of the Spirit he had just received; and as a result of the whole thing 3000 Jewish men and women came to repentance. The apostle Paul later spoke of it remembering a scripture over in Isaiah 28:11 which says, “For with stammering lips and another tongue will He speak to this people.” This people, was the Jewish nation. Yet in the light of all of that, the nation as a whole would not believe. Anyhow what took place on that particular day of Pentecost is what set the Grace Age in motion. Then as you read the rest of the book of Acts and the Epistles you can easily see that it is the Holy Ghost that is leading in the establishment of New Testament Christian assemblies. There are many things written in the New Testament in such a way it causes people to read over it without seeing anything of significance until the generation is on earth that those things apply to: then the Holy Spirit begins to open it up to chosen one’s that are to be held responsible for the ministering of that truth to others. That has been the rule down through the ages; and now we are facing the end of all God has purposed to accomplish in the Grace Age: so He is revealing things that have been right there in the Bible all along: but were only meant for this generation to understand them. The reason I chose the title “Looking For Clues, is because we are looking for everything that can possibly be a clue pointing to what is to take place in the hour of time we are living in. We have to realize that the last days, in the overall collective term, is talking about an allotted period of time when we begin to see prophecy set in motion, but that allotted period of time can last for several years before it finally terminates. That is what causes a lot of people to miss the boat completely when they start trying to deal with prophecy meant for the last days. However as we look at all the things going on in the earth today, we are fully persuaded that we must be living in the later days of the last days. It behooves us then to keep our eyes open every day, to watch how God is beginning to do things among His people. The things He is revealing to us in this hour of time are the things that will close out the Gentile dispensation and return the gospel message to the Jewish people it was first given to. Not the same individuals: but of the same nation.


CHURCH AGE STAR MESSENGERS


Once the gospel came to the Gentiles, Ephesus stands out as the model assembly for the Grace age; and the first Church Age is called by that name. The apostle Paul was the star messenger to that age as the gospel was given to the Gentiles. The apostle Paul was taken off the scene around 66 A.D. of course: Yet that does not change the fact he was God’s star messenger to that age. There were five other Church Ages between the Ephesian Age and the Age of Laodicea we are living in; but just as Paul was the star messenger to the first Age, William Marrion Branham was the star messenger to this Age. That can be questioned by the church world of our day because most of the church world in general does not even read the book of Revelation to see the seven types characterized in the seven churches mentioned therein. Therefore when we come to this hour, they would look at us as though we are just a fanatical element of people propagating something that we do not have a thread of truth or proof to back up. That is what causes me to approach this message the way I am approaching it. Well saints, just remember what I said earlier: God is definitely going to play a trick on this age of Christendom, an age when you see all these well learned, well dressed, celebrity type preachers on Trinity Broadcasting, with all their beautifully arranged TV programs constructed and run by high tech mechanisms. To the natural minded person it is wonderful that man can have such an attention grabbing program; but I personally cannot see God having anything to do with any of it: other than to bundle tares. Naturally when you say something like that, you automatically make yourself look to the church world like you are some kind of crazy fanatic. You are actually looked upon as a fanatic when you follow scriptural truth. The church was not born in the midst of all that high celebrity type of fashion speakers. Those men on the day of Pentecost, Peter, James and those, were just fishermen before the Lord called them to follow Him. They were not learned men of the priestly order. No. They were common ordinary people of the street like you find in everyday walk of life. That is what made it look strange to the priestly hierarchy of Jerusalem. How could this people be creating such a dynamic influence on the Jewish society when after all, they were not ordained priests. They were not wearing the robes; and they were not sacrificing lambs on the altar; but they were pointing spiritually hungry souls to another Lamb that had already been sacrificed. They knew by divine revelation exactly what was going on; and I believe we likewise know what is going on in our day. Believing that, is what caused me to make those remarks about God using the image of Bro. Branham to speak to the bride Church here in the ending of this age. Why do I say that? Simply because Bro. Branham was the star messenger to this age. His message is what called us out of Babylon (denominational religion). We do not have to be fanatical to believe that: It makes good spiritual sense. Denominational religion is so well versed in what has already been, they cannot see one thing that is about to be. They are trying to base all their insight on what has been, rather than what the Bible shows is about to be. The apostle Paul a Jewish man led by the Spirit of God and chosen by God before the foundation of the world to be a light to the Gentiles, wrote most all of the New Testament Epistles. To me, this is vindication that he was God’s apostle to the Gentile people. With that in mind we can say also, It was the apostle Paul that established the seven churches in the area of Asia, the area we call Turkey today. It was the apostle Paul that established the churches in Greece and Macedonia, the region where so many problems are today. Those two areas were the Gentile areas of Christendom that were established under Paul’s ministry in that first age of Gentile Christianity. Paul was martyred, beheaded, in Rome, in 66 A.D.; but look what happened thirty years later. Thirty years go by and that brings time to 96 A.D. That is where the apostle John stood out. He was the last one of the old saintly patriarch disciples. He was an apostle; but he is not pictured as being a star to the Gentiles. He is one of the twelve that was chosen by Jesus to represent the various tribes of the nation Israel; but he was not a star to any particular age. Peter was the spokesman to the Jews; but it was the apostle Paul that became recognized as the star messenger to the Gentile Church Age known as Ephesus. When we come to 96 A.D. we find that without any foreknowledge of what God was about to do, authorities had taken this old man and put him on an island which was not very far from the mainland of Turkey. You can see it from the mainland. Anyhow there he was: put in a solitary condition just to wander among the rocks and lizards, and whatever else was there. They probably thought they were putting this old man out of commission. Little did they realize God was going to use him to see things and write down those things for people within the ranks of the professing church to read down through the centuries of time. The point is this, and I want all of you to think seriously, No one in Christendom at that time knew what God was about to do. In 96 A.D. John was on the Isle of Patmos and he already had the Holy Ghost. He had written the gospel of St. John; and the three little Epistles over next to the book of Revelation. That constitutes the record of his writings. Look what Paul wrote, a great number of epistles, touching many things within the overall gospel of doctrine and such like within the Christian faith. However for some unknown reason God does something very spectacular after the death of Paul; and has John write it down and give it to the Church. Being in exile on this particular island, John says he was in the Spirit on the Lord’s day when God began to show him prophetic visions and he was told to write it down. If you look in the marginal references it says, he became in the Spirit: which in reality means he continued to observe the worship practice he had been accustomed to in former days. However he made no special plans for the experience he had: God was the author of that. Keep in mind though, The day of the Lord and the Lord’s day carry two different meanings. We must separate the one from the other. The day of the Lord points to that period of time dealing with God’s judgment and wrath when Jesus comes to rule and reign as King of kings on earth. It is not a day of 24 hours. However the Lord’s day, it is an expression used by the early disciples as they gathered together for worship on the first day of the week. Why did they choose the first day of the week as the day they would gather together for worship? Because that is the day the Lord Himself rose from the dead. That is why you can tie it right into Leviticus 23. He had to rise on the first day of the week and the Holy Ghost come on the first day of the week. These two infallible types substantiate the fact of why the early disciples chose, without making it a law, without making it some cardinal teaching of the Church, to worship on that day. It was a practice they observed because they did it by divine revelation. The early Christians chose the first day of the week for worship because it is the beginning of a new creation, a new day, a new cycle. It is fulfilling something that has already been typed in the Old Testament. Nevertheless you still have a lot of Gentile people that are still hung up on Saturday worship. That is why they will write these teachings how that somewhere man, the Catholic Church, changed from the Jewish Sabbath to the first day of the week, calling the first day of the week a pagan holy day. Let me just say this, Every day of the week, as far as I am concerned, is God’s day. Otherwise you could not use the Psalm, This is the day the Lord hath made. You could only apply that to one day of the week. Anyhow John says in Revelation 1:9-10, “I John, who also am your brother, and companion in tribulation, and in the kingdom and patience of Jesus Christ, was in the isle that is called Patmos, for the word of God, and for the testimony of Jesus Christ. I was in the Spirit on the Lord’s day, and heard behind me a great voice, as of a trumpet.” In the first verses of this first chapters he gives an introduction of himself, (1:1) “The Revelation of Jesus Christ, which God gave unto him, to shew unto His servants (His servants had to be those pastors of the seven churches of Asia. Naturally his writings have been given to ministers and ministry through the various generations and ages; but when John wrote this later, keep in mind, he had in mind those seven men of those seven churches that lay there on the mainland while he was in exile out there on the Isle of Patmos) things which must shortly come to pass; (notice here what it say) and He sent and signified it by His angel unto His servant John.” We are going into this for a reason: so bear with me. We know John saw something. Further on he describes how he turned to see the voice that spoke to him; and he saw One like unto the Son of man. This man called John was an eye witness to everything that happened concerning the man called Jesus. This man called John had been at the river when the other John baptized the One he saw when he turned to see the voice behind him. He was one of the twelve chosen disciples of this man; but my point is leading to something I just mentioned. I hope you will follow me all the way through; because we want to get this whole thing straight. When we are talking about how God uses a man’s image, keep in mind, either it is a vision or an angelic being anointed with the Spirit of God to act in the person of the one whose image who is being expressed. We must understand this if we are ever to get a true revelation of how God does certain things. If Jesus the man, the Son of God who rose from the dead 2000 years ago, and ascended into heaven where He has been seated on the right hand of the father, is ever seen by anyone still living here on earth, that is the way He is seen. We do not necessarily want to say He has been sitting in that position 2000 years. That is not the point. One saw Him seated at the right hand of the Father and another saw Him standing at the right hand of the Father: so His standing or sitting position is not what we are concerned with. Whenever there is something taking place on earth, that His image should be seen, you rest assured just as Philip saw Him standing on the right hand of the Father, and John was taken up and saw Him sitting on the Father’s throne the point is, He is High Priest: He has been High Priest for almost 2000 years. He has not been personally running around all over the world: here one minute and somewhere else the next. When Jesus was taken from this earth 2000 years ago, that physical, glorified, immortal body has never physically been back here since then. When you hear someone say, Jesus stood by my bedside and said, Thus and so, just know that He was not physically there. I have no reason to doubt the vision: but be assured, that this is exactly what it was: a vision. Remember what the two angels said to those disciples that stood that day watching Jesus as He ascended into heaven? (Acts 1:11) “Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? this same Jesus, which is taken up from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him go into heaven.” Those angels were absolutely referring to His coming in Revelation 19, and not any other time scattered through the dispensation of time. As we read this, we will begin to understand that in the spirit world, there are angelic beings projecting various visions to people on earth. The apostle Paul writes a very descriptive picture of them in the Hebrews epistle. He speaks of these angels as ministering spirits sent forth to be ministers to them that shall be heirs of salvation. That means within the domain, within the realm of God’s divine omnipresent Spirit, God has chosen and delegated for His spirit, His purpose, His thought, His plan, to be communicated to humanity on earth. That is the delegated position of angels in the overall plan of God. At least we know that is one of their functions: to commune with humanity on the behalf of the Creator. That is why so many Trinitarians and Bible scholars go back to Genesis and see where God spoke and said, Let us, and they refer to that as proof that God is three persons. They do not even realize God was speaking to His angelic helpers instead of two other persons within the Godhead. He had to be speaking in conjunction with the angelic family: or a lot of other scriptures would make no sense whatsoever. When we follow the record of angelic beings down through time, never did God do anything without an angelic being conveying His presence, and His purpose to the earthly person He was dealing with. Having said this, let us now look at those things John saw and wrote about in what I usually refer to as God’s love letter to the bride Church.


THE APOSTLE JOHN ON ISLE OF PATMOS


Like I said, the first thing we find here is John’s introduction before he really goes into the dynamics of what he saw and heard. He is plainly telling you first how the Lord sent His angel to testify of these things unto His servant John. (1:1) “The Revelation of Jesus Christ, which God gave unto Him, to shew unto His servants things which must shortly come to pass; and He sent and signified it by His angel unto His servant John: Who bare record of the word of God, and of the testimony of Jesus Christ, and of all things that he saw. Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this prophecy, (Now this is not an epistle that touches doctrine, nor the plan of salvation in any way. This is every bit prophecy.)and keep those things which are written therein: for the time is at hand.” (From here on John begins to explain and bring forth the overall picture. We pick up with verse 4.) “John to the seven churches which are in Asia: Grace be unto you, and peace, from Him which is, and which was, and which is to come; and from the seven Spirits which are before His throne; (5) And from Jesus Christ, who is the faithful witness, and the first begotten of the dead, and the Prince of the kings of the earth. Unto Him that loved us, and washed us from our sins in his own blood, (6) And hath made us kings and priests unto God and His Father; to Him be glory and dominion for ever and ever. Amen. (7) Behold, He cometh with clouds; and every eye shall see Him, and they also which pierced Him: and all kindreds of the earth shall wail because of Him. Even so, Amen.” When that verse is fulfilled, I want you to know humanity will not be looking at an angel. They will be looking at the immortal glorified risen Christ Jesus, coming to earth riding a white horse. It will not be an angel coming. It is the Lord Jesus Himself. (8) “I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the ending, saith the Lord, which is, and which was, and which is to come, the Almighty. (9) I John, who also am your brother, and companion in tribulation, and in the kingdom and patience of Jesus Christ, was in the isle that is called Patmos, for the word of God, and for the testimony of Jesus Christ.” In other words he has been arrested and put there in exile as a penalty for having preached about this man Jesus. (10) “I was in the Spirit on the Lord’s day, and heard behind me a great voice, as of a trumpet, (John was out there all by himself. Little did he realize what was about to take place. I can see that old man sitting out there somewhere, looking up into the sky. He no doubt just began to meditate and communicate with the Lord when all of a sudden an anointing came upon him like he had never experienced in all his prior days. It started something strange, something unusual. It did not last for just 15 or 20 minutes: It lasted no doubt for many hours as he was caught up in the Spirit.) Saying, I am Alpha and Omega, the first and the last: and, What thou seest, write in a book, and send it unto the seven churches which are in Asia; unto Ephesus, and unto Smyrna, and unto Pergamos, and unto Thyatira, and unto Sardis, and unto Philadelphia, and unto Laodicea.” All of what John has written up to this point is concerning what he saw from this point on. He heard this voice behind him, so let us go on. (verse 12) “And I turned to see the voice that spake with me. And being turned, I saw seven golden candlesticks.” Notice now, he saw seven golden candlesticks. We know what they signified at that time. They represented those seven churches which existed in Asia Minor. I would like for us to realize there are some things God shows one man in the Spirit that are a confirmation. It is just the way God deals with that particular man. It is how God gets inside of him, gives him a picture of what he is looking at, and establishes relativity to the time he is living in. If you and I took all these things and tried to apply them to ourselves, rather than opening our hearts to God and say, Lord lead me the way you want to, I am open: we would not necessarily be receiving what we need for our day and hour. We need to keep our heart’s open to the Spirit of God so He can deal with us according to what is to be, rather than what has already been. You could never convince me that John was sitting out there on that island with certain things fixed in his mind as though to say, If God has something for me, it is going to come the way I see so and so. That is the wrong way to approach God. What He has for you does not have to come any certain way. He has His own way He wants to talk to you. I am a part of a generation of older ones that can look back to the years of WW2 and remember when the Jews were slaughtered by the scores in Europe. We never thought much about it at the time it was going on; but years later we realize what it all adds up to. What Hitler did then, actually began to set the world in a trend that will eventually lead right up to the coming of the Lord. That which we read in the fifth seal was written 1900 years before it was fulfilled. I can say this also, God surely has a lot of things in His category that He wants to deal with mankind on; but it will be only at the proper time; and it will be only those who have a proper understanding of His plan and purpose in the redemption of lost mankind. How He chooses to lead the person as an individual, is strictly up to Him. I know just as sure as you are sitting here listening to me, the overall realm of religious people in the world have their ideas as to what God is doing, and what God is going to do; but I am looking at something that causes me to know, We have not come close to seeing yet what God is going to do among the Bride of Jesus Christ as the Age comes to a close. We have a profile here, and we have a plan laid out in His book; but none of that tells us exactly what He will do inside of you and me before this race is over. No sir. His Spirit, I enjoy it. I rejoice in it. It is eternal life to me. I would know nothing if not for the grace of God, and for His Spirit in me. The question is, How does He purpose to lead you and me in these last days? Do not try to plan it by the way God is doing something else. What He does for the bride, no one else will be able to copy it and commercialize it on TV. In fact, when God gets through dealing with His Bride Church the way He is going to deal with it, they will not even want your testimony on TV; because they will say you are crazy for sure. Well let me get back to what John described here. As he turned to see these seven golden candlesticks, keep in mind, John was not the one who established these seven churches. It was Paul, the star messenger too the first Age, that had established them. However Paul had been dead thirty years and John was the last old apostle of the original twelve still alive. God is using him. God has a reason for using him. Sure God could have got a younger man; so why is He using this man? Let us read. He turned and saw one like unto the Son of man. You should notice that he did not say, I saw the Son of man. He saw one like unto the Son of man. That is the part we want to catch: and really emphasize: He saw one like unto the Son of man. First we have to realize he knew what the Son of man looked like in His earthly image. That is what he is looking at. We can say that this is where that angelic being came in. That is why he wrote, who had sent His angel to testify of these things in the church. We know it was a spirit being, anointed of the Spirit of God, and we are going to see in this, in no less than four different places through the book of Revelation, how this angel escorted John. Even to the point where one time John fell at his feet to worship him. (Rev. 19:10) “And I fell at his feet to worship him. And he said unto me, See thou do it not: I am thy fellow servant, and of thy brethren that have the testimony of Jesus: worship God: for the testimony of Jesus is the spirit of prophecy.” You will notice that the angel would not accept his worship: He said, Don’t do that! Worship God! Every true child of God is going to enjoy the way the Creator deals with the Bride Church after she is completely freed from all of the shambles of religion she has been called to rise above. Let me read these next verses in chapter 1. (13) “And in the midst of the seven candlesticks one like unto the Son of man, clothed with a garment down to the foot, and girt about the paps with a golden girdle.” This was an angelic being portraying Jesus Christ in His priestly role. That is what you are looking at in verse 13: you are not seeing Jesus in person. John was on the Isle of Patmos. This whole experience took place there. It was on the Isle of Patmos he saw the seven golden candlesticks. He saw all of that there: he did not see that in heaven. Jesus the immortal one that rose from the dead was in heaven; and there, is where He has stayed. The Spirit of God can use an angelic being, and an angelic being can convey the image expression of whoever God, the eternal Spirit purposes for him to. Notice the description. (14) “His head and His hairs were white like wool, as white as snow; (All of this is portraying that as Jesus was taken up and positioned in that position of High Priest, then we will say that ancient authority that only belongs to God the creator, is now invested in Him. In other words, it is like a man being put on a judge’s bench. You have seen the pictures how the old judges, years ago, when they took the judge’s bench, they wore a white wig. Well I do not know whether if I was a natural judge I would like to wear a white wig, I would like to stay as young looking as possible, but keep in mind, the white wig is always symbolic of ancient authority delegated and handed down through the ages of time.) and His eyes were as a flame of fire; (15) And His feet like unto fine brass, as if they burned in a furnace; (He took our position, in other words He was judge. God judged our sins in Him and that is why He stands in our place, in that respect.) and His voice as the sound of many waters.” I have to keep emphasizing, this is not the literal embodied Christ talking. This is an angelic being conveying the image of Christ the High Priest, because it is on earth where it is taking place. It is not in heaven where Jesus resides. We will see more further on. (16) “And He had in His right hand seven stars: and out of His mouth went a sharp twoedged sword: and His countenance was as the sun shineth in his strength. (17) And when I saw Him, I fell at His feet as dead. And He laid His right hand upon me, saying unto me, (The angel speaks in the first person, he speaks as the person of Christ, not the second person, as the angel himself. When I say that, I realize how far people’s mind’s are from the real picture. When we get on over a little farther you will see.) Fear not; I am the First and the Last: (18) I am He that liveth, and was dead; and, behold, I am alive for evermore, Amen; and have the keys of hell and of death.” Those words absolutely portray the immortal Christ who really suffered and died and took our place. Yet keep in mind, it is an angel sent forth to convey the revelation of Jesus Christ, and not the person of Jesus Christ in the actual immortal body. It is important that we understand that: for I am using this very point of truth to scripturally establish another point. God can project the image of anyone He chooses to: for His own specific purpose in the overall plan of redemption and restoration.


THE WORD OF ANGELS-AND THE WORD OF THE SON OF GOD


Let us go to Revelation 19 where we will see something to go with what we have been talking about: if you will follow my thought. The reason I say this is because in the Old Testament when God spoke to Israel, He would speak through a prophet. It does not matter which one: the point is, He would speak through a prophet. Yet when we find the apostle Paul in Hebrews speaking in reference to how God spoke unto the fathers by the prophets, and in these last days He hath spoken unto us by His dear Son, went back and picked up that dispensation of the prophets and says it like this, (Heb. 2:2-3) “For if the word spoken by angels was stedfast, and every transgression and disobedience received a just recompence of reward; How shall we escape, if we neglect so great salvation; which at the first began to be spoken by the Lord, and was confirmed unto us by them that heard Him?” This brings it right over to our dispensation of time. If men were absolutely penalized and chastened because of failure to respect the word of angels that was delivered to them by the prophets, how much more should we take heed to the things we hear which are the words spoken directly from the throne of Grace. That is what Paul is talking about here in Hebrews. I want you to think about that as we go to Revelation 19:7. John sees the Bride in heaven. Since he sees the Bride in heaven, keep in mind, he sees her beyond this point of time where God is still preparing her for her flight to glory. He sees her in heaven while the week of Daniel is going on. That is what you have to be aware of as we read this. (Revelation 19:7-10) “Let us be glad and rejoice, and give honour to Him: for the marriage of the Lamb is come, and His wife hath made herself ready. (8) And to her was granted that she should be arrayed in fine linen, clean and white: for the fine linen is the righteousness of saints. (9) And he saith unto me, Write, Blessed are they which are called unto the marriage supper of the Lamb. And he saith unto me, These are the true sayings of God. (10) And I fell at his feet to worship him. And he said unto me, See thou do it not: I am thy fellow-servant, and of thy brethren that have the testimony of Jesus: worship God: for the testimony of Jesus is the Spirit of prophecy.” We have something here that sounds like a riddle. Shortly after Bro. Branham was taken off the scene, every time somebody would read that, do you know what they would say? “That is William Branham!” I have had many individual’s say, Don’t you think that is William Branham? I would say, No sir. Well Bro. Jackson, don’t you believe he was the seventh angel, and messenger to this age? Absolutely. Well don’t you believe that was the Lord’s way of sending His theophany to show John these things that was going to be in our day? I said that was an angelic being, that was not an angel Church Age messenger back there telling John these things. No sir, not at all. I hope you understand my point. That is why I am doing my best to go at this message in a way that will help people understand the difference between things that the natural mind might look at as the same thing. Right at this point John is now in heaven: because when he heard that same voice speak again he was taken up into heaven. Please notice his description of what he saw sitting on the throne. Notice, His face no longer looked like what he saw on earth. This is absolutely a picture of how Jesus looked in heaven in that High Priest’s role He has had for over 1900 years. His face was to look upon as a sardine stone. It just goes to show God has imparted to Him (Jesus) all the majestic honor and glory surrounding Himself. There in heaven, on the Father’s throne, is where Jesus the Christ has been throughout all the dispensation of the Grace Age. Any other time that image of Him has been seen anywhere else, it has been conveyed there by an angel. The spirit of God can use that means any time it suits His purpose. That is why it can be a universal thing. That is why in Revelation 10 we see this mighty angel come down to convey the image and presence of the Lord in His finished work as He is coming to collect together and get a Church ready to rise and meet the Lord in the air. When you and I see the immortal Christ for the first time, we will be seeing Him at the wedding supper. Let us take a better look at something else seen here in Revelation 19:10. John said, “And I fell at his feet to worship Him. And He said unto me, See thou do it not: I am thy fellow-servant.” Give me your attention now: That is what throws a lot of people because it says fellow-servant. However if you look at it properly it is not hard to understand at all. First of all, the angel is speaking in respects to his role in relationship to what he is anointed and ordained to do within the realm of God’s family on earth. We have to realize if Paul could say angels are ministering spirits sent forth by God to them that shall be heirs of salvation, then what do we think they do? They convey His anointing, and His presence. In most cases the angel is never seen, but the power of God is felt many times. You become very aware of the presence of God. It is because God allows the angel to activate that presence. This is why when we look back to the ministry of Jesus and really think of it, there was God’s own Son and God dwelling in Him in the fullness of all His Godhead attributes: yet when He was led into the wilderness where He fasted 40 days and nights, and was tempted by the devil, How come angels came to minister unto Him in His weakened condition? What kind of picture do we get from that? Sure, God was in Him; but keep in mind, God ordained it to be this way and you are not going to change it. He has a particular reason for everything He does. It is all part of a master plan. Just like what we said about Moses and Elijah being seen talking to Jesus about the things He would have to suffer. If there were to be things said to Jesus concerning what He would suffer as He faced Calvary’s cross, then why was it not an angel saying them? Why did He use the image of these two old prophets? God had a reason. He wanted the image of those men to stand out in that picture so it could be recorded. It is a sign that God is going to honor those men for who they were in their hour of time: that those anointings they held were the two greatest manifested anointings of God that had ever been vested upon mortal man. Here in the end time, just before Jesus comes again visibly, God will send that anointing on two Jewish men that will forerun the visible coming of the immortal, glorified Christ. That is when He will set up His rule and rein on earth. As we get back to this 10th verse, this angel is actually telling John, Don’t worship me! I am a ministering spirit of your fellow brethren. That is really what it means. Think of it: how many times this angel that was talking to John might have also ministered to patriarchs and prophets before his hour. That is why he said fellow-servant. That is what his role was, a ministering spirit, strictly to minister in that category of the ministry of prophets and this dispensation of apostles. The angel had to talk like that. Furthermore he was not implying that he was some angel messenger to an Age. This is absolutely that ministering spirit that has ministered over and over to holy men throughout the generations of time passed. That is why he could talk to John like that: because no angel ever demands to be worshipped himself. However if that angel has conveyed the image of deity he could receive worship: because the worshiper would not be worshipping the angel since he was being seen portraying the image of the person the worship was directed to. You have to see it that way in order for it to make sense. When we move to Revelation 22, the last chapter, and look at the 16th verse, we again see an angel speaking in the first person of the one that John’s attention is to be devoted to. First let me go back to the 6th verse though: where has been talking about the throne of God and the river of life and the tree of life, and all those things and says to John, “These sayings are faithful and true: and the Lord God of the holy prophets sent His angel to shew unto His servants the things which must shortly be done. (7) Behold, I come quickly: blessed is he that keepeth the sayings of the prophecy of this book.” Notice the wording there: “Behold I come quickly.” Those words were spoken in the person of Christ; but notice verses 8 and 9. “And I John saw these things, and heard them. And when I had heard and seen, I fell down to worship before the feet of the angel which shewed me these things. (9) Then saith he unto me, See thou do it not: for I am thy fellowservant, and of thy brethren the prophets, and of them which keep the sayings of this book: worship God.” He was not talking about the prophets that are yet to be. This angel was talking about the prophets that had already been: in the Old Testament. That is why we can say, A fellow-servant is a ministering spirit. That is what he does. This angel knew how, many times he had been dispatched to earth to convey God’s presence before a holy man through the dispensations of time: that had yielded himself as an instrument to be used in the plan of God. (10) “And He saith unto me, Seal not the sayings of the prophecy of this book: for the time is at hand. (11) He that is unjust, let him be unjust still: and he which is filthy, let him be filthy still: and he that is righteous, let him be righteous still: and he that is holy, let him be holy still.” (Now again the angel speaks in the first person) “And, behold, I come quickly; and my reward is with me, to give every man according as his work shall be. REV. 22:13 I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the end, the first and the last. REV. 22:14 Blessed {are} they that do his commandments, that they may have right to the tree of life, and may enter in through the gates into the city. (15) For without are dogs, and sorcerers, and whoremongers, and murderers, and idolaters, and whosoever loveth and maketh a lie.” Right here, terminology goes back to that of the first person: “I Jesus have sent mine angel to testify unto you these things in the churches. I am the root and the offspring of David, and the bright and morning star.” Brothers and sisters, we have been reading this for two thousand years and I wonder if very many people really know what they have been reading? The point is this, In front of us somewhere, when God gets you and me altogether where there is nothing the devil can use to divide us, I believe He will use the image of Bro. Branham to speak to the Bride. No. It will not be literally him: but his image conveyed by an angel. Remember, there is nothing in the thunders that is going to perfect you. No sir. There is not one thing in those thunders that is going to perfect anyone. Everything that pertains to perfection, getting ourselves cleaned up and ready to meet the Lord is all in the gospel Jesus and His apostles preached. That is why Bro. Branham was the star messenger to this age: He brought everything relative how we should understand the gospel message and the plan of redemption that will constitute God getting out of this world a Gentile people that He will be taking to glory. The question can be asked because many times people have different ideas, But Bro. Jackson, don’t you think those seven angels Bro. Branham saw have to fit in this? Keep in mind saints, When John went up into heaven time was literally still back in the first age. Did he not see seven lamps burning before the throne of God, speaking of the seven spirits of God? Yes, he saw all those things. How come we have not capitalized on those things God let him see in heaven? Why then should we capitalize on the fact that Bro. Branham saw seven angels appear to him out there in that canyon? That was God’s way of confirming something to him. I have to say, It has very little relativity to you and me, as to how God wants to lead us. When I say that, I realize some people want to climb a tree; but they will just have to climb it. This is how it is. God does not have to explain to everyone what He chooses to do for one individual. When John was on the Isle of Patmos, thirty years after Paul’s death, did God ask anyone if He could show him all of those things yet to be? No. Well look what He did. My point is this, John was anointed with a prophetic spirit, anointed with a prophetic spirit to write prophecy. The prophecy he wrote was not going to be fulfilled in his day; but rather in the far flung future. God gave it to him the way we read it. That is why the Church has carried it for centuries of time. Suppose someone in that day, when from the Isle of Patmos John finally got permission, or somehow finally managed to get it over to the seven churches of Asia; someone had been sitting there in those assemblies saying, Well now, I don’t know about all of that: You know that man is getting old? People have the idea that everyone gets senile when they get old. Sometimes old people do see things that are not there; but you simply cannot apply that to every case. I am more or less asking a question now to provoke your thinking, Suppose there had been some in those seven churches that had said, Well the last time I saw John I thought then he was slipping. Do you realize what I am saying? Anyhow I cannot picture those people acting like that. I rather see them rejoicing: Praise God! He has looked down upon us; and used His servant John. Keep in mind, in those words addressed to those seven churches, when they read them, I imagine it made them shake a little and begin to examine themselves. In other words, Oh God, Is that really going on in our fellowship. I don’t want to be part of anything like that. My point is this, God did something through John; but I ask you, Did that make him another messenger to that Age? Did that take anything away from the fact the apostle Paul was the Star Messenger to that Age? No. It was only a confirmation to the Church that God was still ruling; and that Jesus Christ is the head of the Church, His body. God can do anything He wants to do: without explaining it to everyone who might question or disapprove. He does not have to please peoples’ fantasies. A prophetic spirit fell on John and he wrote what was given him. It is just that simple. Looking back to the 10th verse of chapter 19, I want to show you something. Why would this angel say at this time, as John fell at his feet to worship him, “See thou do it not: I am thy fellow-servant, and of thy brethren (Notice the following words.) that have the testimony of Jesus: worship God: for the testimony of Jesus is the Spirit of prophecy?” All through the ages of Christianity every man, woman, boy or girl that has been saved, the only testimony they can carry is the testimony of Jesus Christ and His saving grace. That is why in the first chapter as the angel is introduced and is telling John to write all these things, it speaks of it just as a prophecy. However in the 19th chapter, we need to realize that the Bride is in heaven while the week of Daniel is going on, in order to be seen coming with Jesus at the end of the great tribulation. To me that shows that during the time she was making herself ready to meet the Bridegroom she was still completely subject to the entire plan of salvation. Right at the end of her preparation she moves into that prophetic development role: where God somehow informs her, and gives her the knowledge of something that is completely of a prophetic nature: that of how to look at the coming of the Bridegroom. The reason I say that is because the salvation side is over, the gospel side is over. It is all complete by then. It has already produced its purpose. As the church moves into that prophetic role, all knowing Bro. Branham was the star messenger to this age; and that he has been gone 30 some years, are we going to hinder God by saying, You cannot use his image to speak to us. On the other hand, Some have the idea that if God uses seven men here at the end, that would be taking recognition away from the star messenger. It would not. What God used John for, took nothing from what the apostle Paul was already credited with. Why would anyone think God could not do again what He did in 96 A.D.? Do not bother to say, Because it is not in the word; because I will just remind you that there was nothing written beforehand concerning what God would say to the Church through His servant John. It is easy to look back at something God has already done and say, I can accept that; but when it comes to something for the future, people can sure put up some resistance. There are a lot of things I do not understand either; but I have no intention of trying to force the Creator to do only what He has already done in the past: as He moves the bride Church toward her perfection. He is leading His people in a way you and I cannot even fathom at the present moment; so we need to keep open to the leading of His Spirit and allow Him to direct the whole thing. I am persuaded that He will do for the bride things that are not yet written; and I am just as certain that He will not do anything that goes contrary to the righteous principles written so clearly in the Bible we have studied for years. He can deal with the bride in the prophetic realm without violating any principle He has ever established for His people to be guided by. When He gets that last predestinated soul safely in the fold, and only He knows when that will be, Jesus can then step down from the mercy seat, from the place of intercession He has occupied for over 1900 years; and when He does, I want you to know, the Spirit of God in the earth is going to start working in a different way. We had better be ready to move and walk with Him. Just remember this, When John was on the Isle of Patmos, Gentile Christendom was only in the areas we now call Turkey, Greece and Macedonia. Yet look how God used that aged apostle. By now, the Church is moving to completeness and it is a universal picture today. That is why I say, That same anointing that fell on John is going to fall on these men chosen of God to minister to the Bride of Christ in her last hour of time in this present realm of life. God is going to lift that Bride up into the knowledge of something, that when she obtains that knowledge, it is going to take all the doubt away concerning the coming of the Lord and the rapture. The nominal Gentile church world will never see the rapture. It is no wonder, that many of them out there in the Charismatic realm are even now beginning to doubt that the rapture will take place before the tribulation hour. They have lost their way through the Bible.


PEACE PACT-OR FULFILLED PROPHECY


As we deal with this subject “Looking For Clues,” we are seeing things in the News every day that seem to speak contrary to what we see in the scriptures. Suppose Israel does come to some kind of peace agreement with the Palestinian Arabs: that Israel agrees to give up the Gaza Strip and parts of the area of Jericho to constitute a Palestinian state with limited self government. Of course that is all in the making; but you believe me, None of that is going to change prophecy of the scriptures one bit. It has certain conditions. Naturally we realize if such a thing is signed, we have to ask ourselves, How long will it last? Keep in mind that which is written in Zephaniah 2, as you meditate upon all of this. For the first time in 4000 years, Israel had been able to possess the Gaza Strip and actually call it her territory, because the Gaza Strip was the ancient area of the Philistines. During ancient Biblical times they never had been able to conquer the Philistines to the point of actually ruling over them in that area. We realize the Bible has many prophecies in relationship to the restoration of Israel back to her former estate in the last days; and there is no reason for any Bible believing child of God to think any different: regardless of what kind of peace agreement the concerned parties may sign. God says in Ezekiel that He would establish them according to their former estates. Therefore whatever we are now seeing in front of us, it is going to require close observation on the part of those who know the scriptures. I am convinced that the world is now standing at a crossroads: wondering what will actually take place. We cannot help but ask the question, How long will God allow this kind of thing to go on before He begins to bring about developments in the process of fulfilling prophecy that is going to startle the world? When that will start, I do not know; but I have to believe that somehow this peace process will break apart by some kind of tragedy. I just cannot see Israel signing an overall agreement and begin to give up territory: when the word of God says they actually are to possess more land than they now have. Instead of giving up land, they are to possess more land. That is why we have titled this subject, Looking For Clues. Meaning clues, or traces of evidence that would indicate to the bride Church that we are approaching a time factor that surely speaks of the nearness of the coming of Christ. We realize since the WW2 event, the world has been headed toward a climaxing point of all things. Sooner or later, Jesus Christ is going to come to rule and reign; and we do know it will have to be in this generation to stay in continuity with the written scriptures.


ANGELS CONVEYING PRESENCE OF DEITY


I want to finish what we were looking at concerning the ministry of angels. I made those statements concerning the angel in Revelation 19:10 and in chapter 22 as well as other places: that this was not the literal bodily form of Jesus standing there with John, but an angel conveying His image before John. I do not want anyone going away from here confused, saying, Bro. Jackson: I just do not understand this: when actually it is as simple as falling off a log. When you go into the Gospel’s, and find all the gospel writers, Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John, referring to actual words spoken by the man known as Jesus the Christ, that was actually the literal person, Christ Jesus, doing the speaking there; but after His ascension into heaven where He has fulfilled the role of intercessor on behalf of lost mankind for over 1900 years, He has never spoken to anyone on earth in person since then. An angel always stands in His place for such events; but the angel speaks as though it is Jesus in person doing the speaking. I hope this helps clear it up for you who have not understood the point being made up to this point in the message. Our purpose is to clear up many things that people have not understood, rather than to confuse you more. In the four Gospel’s, when you find the words of Jesus printed in red letters, they were spoken by Jesus when He walked on earth with those men; but those things in the book of Revelation which are clearly the words of Jesus, were not spoken directly to John from the mouth of Jesus: but from the mouth of the angel that was anointed to convey the presence of the man Jesus. Also, another thing that has caused many questions to be asked is the fact that Stephen, when he was being stoned to death, stated that he saw Jesus standing on the right hand of the Father. (Acts 7:56) “And said, Behold, I see the heavens opened, and the Son of man standing on the right hand of God.” Yet the apostle Paul referred to Him as seated on the right hand of God. Both positions are correct when we are looking at Jesus being High Priest, mediator between God and man on earth. He is called High Priest, mediator, and intercessor; and He is pictured in both positions: both standing and sitting; but that in itself should not be of any concern to us. It is what He is doing there on the Father’s throne that we benefit by. We will read a few scriptures that will allow you to put the picture together. When the apostle Peter was preaching after those first disciples received the Holy Ghost he referred to Jesus in this way: quoting something David had wrote. (Acts 2: 33-35) “Therefore being by the right hand of God exalted, and having received of the Father the Promise of the Holy Ghost, He hath shed forth this, which ye now see and hear. For David is not ascended into the heavens: but he saith himself, The Lord said unto my Lord, Sit thou on my right hand, Until I make thy foes thy footstool.” Then we find the apostle Paul making various references concerning His position; but the main reference should be that He (Jesus) is exalted to the right hand position of the Father. (Rom 8:34) “Who is he that condemneth? It is Christ that died, yea rather, that is risen again, who is even at the right hand of God, who also maketh intercession for us. (Eph 1:20) “Which He wrought in Christ, when He raised Him from the dead, and set Him at His own right hand in the heavenly places, (Col. 3:1) “If ye then be risen with Christ, seek those things which are above, where Christ sitteth on the right hand of God. (Heb 8:1) “Now of the things which we have spoken this is the sum: We have such an high priest, who is set on the right hand of the throne of the Majesty in the heavens. (Heb 10:11-12) “And every priest standeth daily (This shows the position of a priest: standing.) ministering and offering oftentimes the same sacrifices, which can never take away sins: But this man, (Jesus) after He had offered one sacrifice for sins for ever, sat down on the right hand of God.” The standing or seated positions merely reflect the functions being performed by Him who has conquered death, hell and destruction by offering His own life for the price required to bring about our reconciliation to the Creator; and then taking His life back again when He was raised from the grave, or brought out of that tomb. The point I am most interested in clarifying to you though, is that once Jesus ascended to the Father’s right hand to take up His intercessory work He has never been back on earth in person since then. Neither will He be until the end of the seventieth week of Daniel: when He comes back with His saints to judge wicked mankind and set up His 1000 year rule as King of kings.

 

 

UNDERSTANDING HOW GOD MANIFESTS CERTAIN IMAGES


The very fact that we are Gentiles causes us to have a mind that makes it hard for us to understand how the Spirit of God could, and would deal, especially in the Old Testament, by manifesting Himself in different image structures. That is why the Lord could appear to Abraham in various forms and speak to patriarchs down through the ages by different manifestations of His presence, meaning His spirit. God the eternal Spirit, has used many forms to make contact with His instruments on earth; but He has never remained in any of those forms to the point that they become His eternal abode. However when His only begotten Son presented Himself to John the Baptist for baptism, when He came up out of the water that great sovereign Spirit descended upon Him, spoke words approving what He had just done, and then took up abode in that Son. All of those other images were only types projecting something God would do in and through the person of His Son the Lord Jesus Christ. Some years after that approved Son was taken to glory, we see the book of Revelation come into being in a most unusual way. Let us look at it this way, Paul died or was beheaded in 66 A.D. We know he was the star messenger to the age of Ephesus, to the Gentiles; and that he wrote most of the New Testament Epistles; but God was not through dealing with the Gentile Church just because Paul was no longer on the scene: He still had much more to say to her. In 96 A.D., which was 30 years after the death of Paul, this man by the name of John, who was not a star messenger, but a Jewish apostle, had an experience unequalled by any other. We do know how old John was when the Roman government put him on the Isle of Patmos to get him out of their way, to put him out of commission and bring an end to his Christian influence. They thought if they could kill his influence, it would greatly effect the spread of Christianity. Nevertheless at that very time, God saw fit to speak to the Gentile church one more time, in a profound way. By that time Christendom was being attacked by a spirit of antichrist. God saw the seven churches in Asia, how each one to some degree was beginning to slip. The prevailing spirit of those assemblies was far from what it had been. Therefore by 96 A.D. God found it necessary to speak to them, the Gentile Church: to correct them. He spoke to seven certain churches, all in Asia Minor: yet what He had to say, when you put it all together, it collectively represented Christendom then, and throughout the whole dispensation of grace right down to this very hour. God manifested an anointing upon John, there on the Isle of Patmos, that had not been experienced by any other Jewish apostle. Not even John himself, when he wrote the gospel of St. John and the three little Epistles of John. My point is this, God was speaking to the Church in a prophetic way. Some of it was going to be understood by the immediate Christian people. The rest was not going to be understood at all until this very generation we are living in began to come close to the end of time. We are right here. (Pointing to the chart very close to the beginning of the seventieth week of Daniel) It is a prophecy unequaled by any other. Contained in it are certain types and symbols: all of which have to be looked at in relation to other prophecies of the Bible in order to get a revelation of what they point to. Thirty years after the death of Paul the star messenger, Christendom had no problem recognizing that God had spoken to them. It became written for all to read; and those that were to receive correction by those individual letters received them. The Lord Jesus did not have to come back in person to speak to them: He sent His angel. That is why I am putting so much emphasis on the fact that the Church will again be dealt with in a prophetic way; and that it would not be at all out of line for the Spirit of God to use the image of Bro. Branham somewhere in it all. It was not the literal person of the Lord Jesus standing behind John on the Isle of Patmos. The Lord Jesus in person, in that immortal, glorified state of being is in heaven: seated on the throne of God. We have to understand that. If you can catch the picture, it is simple. That is why I say we are living in an hour when we need to get our eyes open and our mind’s unclogged. They have been clogged too long with all these Gentile, religious ideas. In front of us somewhere very soon, there is no doubt that God is going to deal with His true Bride in a profound way: yet in a way that is simple; and it is going to clear out a lot of things she has been holding on to; and put in place of all of that a very positive picture of how to see herself in relationship to the end of Gentile time. When we look into the book of Revelation, we see John on the Isle of Patmos 1900 years ago; and except for the letters to the seven individual Churches, most of what he saw taking place in the spirit would not be manifested until the very generation we are living in. In the 19th chapter, he saw the Bride in glory. That is where the bride will be during the great tribulation here on earth. She will be taken out of the world somewhere around the time the seventieth week of Daniel starts. However she will not go before the antichrist is revealed; because the signing of that peace pact with many, is what puts the finger on him. The bride Church already knows what office the antichrist will be holding when his hour to stand out finally comes. He will be the Pope of the Roman Catholic Church. The Bible leaves no doubt about that. Daniel 9:26, lets us know where that prince shall come from. He will be the prince of the people that destroyed the city of Jerusalem and the Jewish sanctuary in 70 A.D. The people that did that were Roman’s. Their national origin is not what you look at. The army that brought about the destruction was made up of soldiers that may have been born in various other nations; but they were all under the command of a Roman General. That made them Romans: as far as looking at this scripture goes. “And after threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, (33 A.D.) but not for Himself: and the people of the prince that shall come (The antichrist is that prince that shall come.) shall destroy the city and the sanctuary; (That was done by the Roman Army in 70 A.D.) and the end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war desolations are determined.” When you put this verse with all the other scriptures we have to look at, you certainly have no problem in knowing what office the antichrist will come from. We have Daniel 7, 8, 9, 11 and 12 and Revelation 13 and 17, and 2nd Thessalonians 2: 1-4, just to name a few of the many scriptures that lead the true saints to the revelation they have, concerning the antichrist. To the natural mind, the terminology of the scriptures is so confusing; but to the spiritual mind that is subject to be lead by the Spirit of God, those same words put together a beautiful picture for the bride Church as she nears the time for her departure from this world.


THE SPIRIT OF PROPHECY


We spoke earlier of the scripture in Revelation 19:10, that speaks of how the testimony of Jesus is the spirit of prophecy. Well I just have to say, Nothing in the Bible is spoken amiss. Everything has to have a meaning. Yet in the introduction, you do not find that necessarily made clear. Let us go back to Revelation 1:1-2, and read those two verses. John was giving an introduction of himself and of what he was about to record; so notice how this is written. “The Revelation of Jesus Christ, which God gave unto Him, to shew unto His servants things which must shortly come to pass; and He sent and signified it by His angel unto His servant John: (2) Who bare record of the word of God, (John had been preaching that.) and of the testimony of Jesus Christ, and of all things that he saw.” From the beginning of Christianity, the Church, God has been taking out of the Gentiles a people that makes up His mystical body, all through the ages, even into this Laodicean age; and our testimony has got to be connected to the fact that it is through the gospel of the Lord Jesus Christ that we are saved. My salvation is based on my faith in the finished work of Jesus Christ at Calvary. No matter what all else you believe in relationship to doctrines and things, the conclusion of your testimony is that it is all in and through the Lord Jesus Christ, for there is no other name given under heaven among men whereby we must be saved, except the name Jesus the Christ. Again Paul says, There is no other foundation a man can lay than that which is laid, and that is Jesus Christ. That goes to show, all through the ages, as God has been dealing with mankind, He has been getting His church out of the world of unbelieving sinners, but only as they come to a saving knowledge of the Lord Jesus Christ. Therefore it constitutes the fact our testimony is in the saving grace of the Lord Jesus Christ. Why would anyone think it has changed, when we see in Revelation 19 where it says, “For the testimony of Jesus Christ is the spirit of prophecy,” and we know it has been the gospel all along? It lets me know there is definitely going to be a little era of time right here at the end, just before God closes the age of Grace and the week of Daniel sets in and the church is raptured, that God is again going to deal with the bride through the Spirit of prophecy. Not the church world in general, the bride exclusively. The true bride Church will be the only people on earth that will know beyond any shadow of doubt that they are of the bride of Christ. All the rest are just hoping: without anything whatsoever to base their hopes upon. Why do I say that? Simply because we know from the scriptures that those who still believe God is three persons do not really know Him at all. They are void of revelation; and the bride of Christ will be a revelated people. Furthermore the bride will know she is the bride because of the way the spirit communicates to her. It is the way the Lord makes Himself known through His word to her. With that, you have to realize she is going to enter into an era of time when she has passed from the effect of the preaching of the gospel of repentance and baptism, and moved on to perfection. Let us read what the apostle Paul wrote to the Hebrew assembly about this very thing. (Hebrews 5:12-6:3) “For when for the time ye ought to be teachers, ye have need that one teach you again which be the first principles of the oracles of God; and are become such as have need of milk, and not of strong meat. (13) For every one that useth milk is unskillful in the word of righteousness: for he is a babe. (14) But strong meat belongeth to them that are of full age, even those who by reason of use have their senses exercised to discern both good and evil. (Hebrews 6:1) Therefore leaving the principles of the doctrine of Christ, let us go on unto perfection; not laying again the foundation of repentance from dead works, and of faith toward God, (2) Of the doctrine of baptisms, and of laying on of hands, and of resurrection of the dead, and of eternal judgment. (3) And this will we do, if God permit.” That is the way some congregations are: always debating those basic doctrines they ought to already have settled in their mind. I would remind you though, those first Age Christians could not come to complete perfection: because they could not be made perfect without us. However God did require them to grow up. There was no excuse for anyone to remain spiritual babes in that hour of time: when the gospel and basic doctrines were preached and taught in their purity: before the spirit of antichrist began to pervert them. Finally we would have to say, Perfection of the bride has to definitely be with the last generation of people that God deals with. That is why there had to be a star messenger to this Age, a man who would absolutely have a message: not some other Bible, not some other man made teaching, but a message showing people where the Church had drifted from; and showing them how to get back in the overall revelation which constitutes the plan of salvation. For that reason I can say, Along about the year 1963, God did something very profound, something He had not done since the day John had his experience on the Isle of Patmos and sent letters to the seven churches in Asia. In 1963, because he was God’s star messenger, God took Bro. Branham out west and dealt with him in a way that vindicated His divine presence and purpose was to be worked through him. Yet somehow or other we have people today that are more interested in how many angels Bro. Branham saw, than they are in whether God is going to do anything more for the Bride of Christ? Let me tell you, He sure will; but those who have had no interest in what God has been doing for the last 28 years since Bro. Branham was killed will see nothing He does for the bride in these last days. He is going to play a trick on those people: that will cause some of them to say, I wish someone had told me what was going on a long time ago. It has been told; but they have not listened. God knew there would be a generation like this. That is why He willed that certain things be said by Bro. Branham that would cause that kind to jump the track, so to speak. When I say that, I do it knowing I can stand alone if need be; or I can stand with brothers who will agree with me. You can be sure of this one thing though, You are not going to preach William Branham, William Branham, William Branham, and expect to be raptured with the bride. You may expect it; but the Bible (a book some of you have laid aside for your Spoken Word Books) presents an altogether different picture. Someone in Norway was supposed to have said that I did not say anything about the prophet. At certain times I brought in the message just what I got through saying here, and said it just like this, but somehow or other some people have the idea that if you do not constantly say, Brother Branham said So and So, you are not preaching anything worth listening to. Well they may as well not listen to me at all: for I still preach out of the Bible. I give Bro. Branham credit for what he was: a man who loved God, and a man that knew how to give God His place; and for being God’s prophet messenger to the Age of Laodicea; but I find no reason whatsoever to worship him, nor to use his sermons instead of using my Bible. It is just that plain and simple. The spirit controlling a lot of people who claim to be following Bro. Branham’s teaching, makes them worse than being a Roman Catholic. The only difference between then is, they say, Bro. Branham, Bro. Branham, Bro. Branham, and the dyed in the wool Roman Catholic Person cannot talk without saying, The blessed holy father, The blessed holy father, The blessed holy father. They are both controlled by the same spirit, an antichrist spirit. We will look at what that kind of spirit is doing world wide in this hour of time.


ANTICHRIST SPIRIT HAS MANY FACES


We will go to Revelation 6:1 at this time; and I hope we can learn something from what we are going to look at. In 1963, when time had come for the seals to be dealt with, God did a spectacular thing: using His instrument, the star messenger to this Age. When that first seal was opened the sound of thunder was heard: one thunder. Thunders, in scripture, whether it was at the Sinai or whether it was when Jesus was on earth, always signified that God the eternal Spirit was speaking. It means there is something profound He wants His people to understand. In the gospel of St. John, Jesus stood one day before a multitude of people and there came the sound of a thunder. Some said, Did you hear that? All they heard was a thunder. But the eternal Spirit spoke to the Son. You can read that. One thunder in 1963, meant God was speaking to a people through a particular vessel; and that vessel was His star messenger to the Age; and what followed amazed those who witnessed the profound way God dealt with those seals. (Rev. 6:1) “And I saw when the Lamb opened one of the seals, and I heard, as it were the noise of thunder, one of the four beasts saying, Come and see.” God bypassed every school of theology and every theologian. He did not bother to ask them one thing. He reached down and took a little man whose own native dialect was supposed to be English; but in England, they make fun of the way we speak it. They accuse the Americans of butchering the English language. Well I grant you, we do; but I told Ewald Frank of Germany, (who was a man I could see was very proud that he could speak English so well, “The reason we Americans butcher the English language so badly is because our country is made up of practically every tongue speaking people of the whole earth. I can go to Louisville, Kentucky, go downtown into one store: There can be an Italian man speaking his broken English; but speaking it well enough to carry out his business. When I go in there, I learn to listen to his broken English and I do not stand there making fun of him. I can go out of that store and go down a block or two and go into another store where a man from Germany is speaking English well enough to carry out his business. He has learned enough English that he can speak to me in a broken English way; but it is sufficient for transacting our business. I have just learned to listen. Therefore in your mind we do butcher the English language; but we learn it well enough to understand each other without making a big fuss about it.” I said also, “Bro. Branham did not know enough proper English to wad a shot gun; but God knew how to use the Brother anyhow.” It makes some of these doctors of divinity really want to climb a wall when they hear someone say he was a prophet of God. They are so educated they could not even understand his terminology. What does he mean? You might hear them say. Well you have to know the man to know what he means. You have to know a hillbilly and why he talks like that, to really know what he means. I have said many times, I remember when I was a kid: We did not even know how to speak too proper. Nevertheless we got the job done. So will God get the job done: regardless of what others may think about His instruments. Yes brothers and sisters, in 1963 God dealt with that little man in a profound way. The point is this, Out of God’s dealing with him, God opened up to His Church an understanding of what was going on in heaven. Six seals were broken consecutively. Here in such a simple way came an understanding of what the first seal was, then the second, the third and fourth. I will never forget sitting, listening to the revelation of them being brought forth. Yes it caused the true believer to stop looking forward for those four horsemen to appear. We now look back through history and see how they have been riding all through the ages. When I heard those things revealed I said, Praise God! What a wonderful picture that is. Especially when you see that black horse, how it rode in the Dark Ages. No wonder they called it the Dark Ages. Europe was fed the bread of death. That is why they call it the Dark Ages. Then when he came to that gray horse and we were made to see that it was already in its stage of preparedness, what a revelation! Every since 1964 that gray horse has been riding this earth: gathering up through that false spirit all that could be deceived. Just think of all those men who are still pushing the four horsemen on out in front of where we are: not even realizing that the first three have already finished their ride; and that the fourth one is riding now; and will continue until the end. That is why the church world is groping in darkness: God let them run after their educated theologians until they have forsaken all the light their forefathers were privileged to walk in. Because they had no love for the truth, God sent them strong delusions just like His word says He would do. Is God unjust? No. Absolutely not. They every one had the same opportunity to hear and believe the truth that we had. They chose to believe Billy Graham and Jimmy Swaggart, rather than a simple little man anointed of God for this hour. Just like the song says, When the Lord gets ready, you have got to move.


THE FIFTH SEAL


When you come to the 5th seal, you find that it has a past and a future fulfillment. When we were privileged to see that the first part of the 5th seal was pointing to that great martyrdom of Jews back in WW2, it is easy to see how the little season points to the years between WW2 and the great tribulation. That little season of time cannot be one hundred years. It is going to be no longer than what God calls a generation of human beings in the last days. It is not how I look at a generation, but how God looks at a generation. That little season and a generation have to coincide and work in harmony with the plan of God. That all has to dove tail into the 6th chapter of Hosea where it says, “After two days (which means after two thousand years) will He (God) revive us: in the third day He (God) will raise us up, and we shall live in His sight.” When we begin to look at all the dispersion of the nation of Jews since 70 A.D., and how so many of them are finding their way back home after so long, we have to realize we must be getting close to that terminating point of those two days: which are one thousand years each. Therefore that little season between WW2 and the great tribulation when so many other Jews (their fellow- servants) will be killed like they were (by a madman, the antichrist) will finish out the two days Hosea wrote about; and then it will be time for God to raise them up and let them live in His sight (in the Millennium, the third day). We can read the scriptures pertaining to the 5th seal. (Rev. 6:9-11) “And when he had opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the word of God, and for the testimony which they held: (That was the Jews slaughtered by Hitler’s purge.) And they cried with a loud voice, saying, How long, O Lord, holy and true, dost thou not judge and avenge our blood on them that dwell on the earth? And white robes were given unto every one of them; and it was said unto them, that they should rest yet for a little season, until their fellow servants also and their brethren, that should be killed as they were, should be fulfilled.” Yes brothers and sisters, in that dark tribulation hour just ahead, there will be slaughtered the rest of those fellow brethren that are to be martyred as those were in Hitler’s holocaust; and that will finish out the fifth seal. Saints, I thank and praise God for the Spirit of revelation He gives to those that are foreknown of Him.


THE SIXTH SEAL


We can easily understand what the 6th seal is, because it is the revelation of Jesus Christ coming back to earth and the pouring out of God’s wrath as that week of Daniel is brought to a close. We will read those verses (Revelation 6:12-17) so you can get the picture. All of that is a description of what the earth will be like when the wrath of God is finally poured out upon the wicked that are left alive then. (12) “And I beheld when he had opened the sixth seal, and, lo, there was a great earthquake; and the sun became black as sackcloth of hair, and the moon became as blood; (13) And the stars of heaven fell unto the earth, even as a fig tree casteth her untimely figs, when she is shaken of a mighty wind. (14) And the heaven departed as a scroll when it is rolled together; and every mountain and island were moved out of their places. (15) And the kings of the earth, and the great men, and the rich men, and the chief captains, and the mighty men, and every bondman, and every free man, hid themselves in the dens and in the rocks of the mountains; (16) And said to the mountains and rocks, Fall on us, and hide us from the face of Him that sitteth on the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb: (17) For the great day of His wrath is come; and who shall be able to stand?” Saints just be thankful to God that He saw fit to spare us from all of that. Even the foolish virgins will not be involved in that; for they will be martyred before that event comes.


ABOUT THE SEVENTH SEAL


Regardless of what some say, the 7th seal was not broken. Thirty years have passed since the first six were opened and revealed and the question could be asked, Where is the seventh seal? Where does it fit into the picture? The seventh seal pertains to the coming of the Lord. It will be broken to the Gentile bride as time moves to the point where God is getting ready to turn His attention back to the Jews for the seventieth week of Daniel. Revelation 8:1 shows the breaking of the seventh seal and the half hour of silence in heaven; and the rest of chapter 8, deals with the seven trumpet angels in connection with the ministry of the two prophets in the first half of that week. In chapter 10, we see a glimpse of what takes place when the seventh seal is broken. A mighty angel comes down from heaven with a little scroll open in His hand. He sets one foot on land and the other foot on the sea, (which shows universal dominion) and cries out with a loud voice; and when He cries out seven thunders utter their voices. What are we looking at? What does such a picture portray? Again I say to you, This is an angel anointed to portray the image of the Lord Jesus Christ: when He leaves the mercy seat and comes to earth to claim all of those whose names are written in the little scroll He has open in His hand. All of those names written therein have been interceded for and it is time to take them to glory; but first those who are still alive, and of the bride Church, have to hear the prophecies of the seven thunders which will be ready to sound at that time. This is why I have said, The thunders spoken of in the 3rd verse will not sound their voices 10 or 15 years in advance of the week of Daniel starting. No, saints, when the seventh seal is opened and this mighty angel comes down from heaven and cries with a loud voice, it will be time for those seven thunders (anointed men) to begin to sound their voices to the bride Church: to give her final instructions pertaining to the coming of the Lord. When that takes place, it will be time for the Spirit of God to turn back to the Jews: to finish out Daniel’s prophecy; and the rapture of the Gentile bride will be close at hand. I have never been able to see a rapture of the Church taking place years before the seventieth week of Daniel starts; and then have time just dragging on waiting for God to go to the Jews. It will not be like that. There is always a linking, or we will say, a connecting point. We have to bring all these things together. Notice verses 5 and 6 of chapter 10. “And the angel which I saw stand upon the sea and upon the earth lifted up His hand to heaven, And sware by Him that liveth for ever and ever, who created heaven, and the things that therein are, and the earth, and the things that therein are, and the sea, and the things which are therein, that there should be time no longer.” That literally means, There will be delay no longer. The time of transition is at hand. The gospel goes to the Jews and the bride goes up: to be with the Lord at the marriage supper. Hallelujah! But everything will have to be in God’s order. We cannot rush it up, nor can we delay it. When the Lord gets ready, we have to move.


REEMPHASIZING CERTAIN IMPORTANT POINTS DISCUSSED


After looking at the various points of this message, I want to bring in this statement. In the 1st chapter of Revelation as God was speaking to John, remember, this was an angelic being acting in the person of Jesus the Christ. That is why it closes out in chapter 22, verse 16, “I Jesus have sent mine angel to testify unto you these things in the churches. I am the root and the offspring of David, and the bright and morning star.” Notice in the 1st chapter, verse 8, “I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the ending, saith the Lord, which is, and which was, and which is to come, the Almighty.” That all comes from the speech of deity, but it is an angel being anointed and used to come to John and do the speaking. I am not educated in English; but when I said earlier, The angel speaks in the first person, I hope all of you know what I meant. It literally means the angel is not speaking of himself. The spirit that has anointed the angel is causing him to say and speak forth the mind, the words of the one that is to be exemplified. You say, Bro. Jackson, I still do not get the thought. Think of it like this, When Jesus was here, and they looked at Him, He was a literal man. Right? They saw a literal person standing there. Yet when you would hear Him say this, I and the Father are one, or The words that I speak unto you are not mine, but they are His that sent me: you know He was representing another other than Himself. Over and over He said those things; because the Son was not seeking to draw attention to His person. The words spoken were to draw attention to the divine deity that was actually doing the speaking. That is why at the end of His ministry He could say He had given to them the words the Father gave Him. He has manifested Him, declared His name, and it was all done through a man. Yet you come to the experience John had and find that it was all done through the ministry of an angel. Through an angelic being anointed to declare and manifest the image of Jesus, the immortal Christ, who is in heaven. That is why when John turned, he saw one like unto the Son of man. That is what he was supposed to see; but keep in mind, it is how the anointing, the Holy Ghost had anointed the angel to portray the personage, or the image of Jesus Christ to the church. That is why everything in the second and third chapters of the book of Revelation is printed in red letters. It is speaking how Jesus is High Priest. His image is being preached and proclaimed through the Gentile Church. Every bit of it is in God’s plan, to mold you and me into the image and likeness of Jesus. Not the fleshly profile of the man, but the spiritual image of Him. You and I have to see the characteristics, the spiritual attitude and the motives and everything that caused Jesus to go about doing the things He did. He walked completely in obedience to the mind and will of the Father. When you leave the 3rd chapter and come to the 4th chapter, watch that. You do not see any more red letter words until you get to Revelation 22; but you do see an angel talking to John. I want you to notice, when we come to the 19th chapter. We have read it already; but the 10th verse shows us that John is being escorted by an angelic being. “And I fell at his feet to worship him. And he said unto me, See thou do it not: I am thy fellowservant, and of thy brethren that have the testimony of Jesus: worship God: for the testimony of Jesus is the spirit of prophecy.” To me, that says the day will come, after the Church begins to move toward an hour of complete perfection, being separated from all the religious mess she has passed through, and looking forward with a true picture and understanding of what God is doing in their respective lives, God will absolutely speak to her through the prophetic utterances of His anointed ministers. Keep in mind, these anointed men, not from one nation, but from all over the world, as God anoints them, they are not going to be preaching doctrine, baptism, repentance, and holiness and those things. That all belongs to the gospel that brought her to this hour. They are going to be used to bring forth a prophetic, informative picture of how people should see themselves in relationship to where they are; and of how to look toward the coming of Jesus Christ. By that time, the makings for this last week of Daniel will be laying on the political table of world politics. We will see things in the Middle East that will begin to stand out vividly. Israel, now ready to trade land for peace, will be maneuvered by the hand of God more and more into a place that will allow God to fulfill all these scriptural prophecies that somehow or other politicians, right now in Israel are willing to ignore. The Bible tells us that the day is coming that God will make the governors of Judah a terror to them round about. By the time Rabin, Peres and all of those get finished compromising, it will be hard to even guess what is going to take place next. Regardless of how things may go for a little while, we do not have another 25 or 30 years for playing around with the things that are presently pressing for attention. Everything is moving very close. When we see it start clicking, I want my heart to be in good shape with the Lord. Just remember, When the time comes for those thunders to sound, the Church will already be perfected: completely clothed in righteousness. She will just be waiting on the coming of the Bridegroom. When those thunders sound, I am convinced the Bride, all over this world, is going to be told things she has never known; and at this present time could not know. Right now, she is not in a mental shape to even grasp what God has in store for her, in a prophetic way. Why do I say that? There is still too much carnality present. She is still too deeply involved in the things of this world: planning for another thirty or forty years here. Some of you young people will never see the day you have to wear false teeth. That is just my way of saying, There is not that much time left. If the Bible is true, and I know it is, some of you will never see a gray hair. Why do I say that? Because I see a generation and a people that God is dealing with. Right now, to the religious world, you cannot see it; but if you will begin to listen how people are beginning to feel in their hearts, and how they suddenly see themselves in the word, this lets me know we do not have another fifteen years to listen to men throw this message in seven different ways. It is time we found out for sure, that there is a message to be followed; but also that there are a lot of other things injected into the message that are not part of the message. They are things God just allowed various one’s to tack on to it, to give carnal mind’s something to play with.


JOHN LOOKING AT THE THRONE


When you get to the 4th chapter of Revelation, you find that John is in heaven: standing right before the throne. There, is the immortal Christ invested with all the ancient authority of the Creator. That is why His face now looks like a sardine stone. Notice as John stood looking at that throne, and around about that throne was this rainbow, and around that throne was these 24 elders, and even around that was an innumerable company of angels. Listen carefully. The immortal one sitting in the throne is a silent figure. But John is being escorted by an angel. Even when it came to the seals, who was talking? Both an angel and an elder. Read it. It is all right in there. The immortal Christ sitting on the throne did not say a word. Even when John saw the Lamb, that Lamb came right out of the throne. That was the Spirit’s way of portraying that the one literally sitting there in an immortal body form was the Lamb of God that had been slain, buried, and then raised from the dead. As far as John was concerned, he saw a literal animal coming right out of the throne like that. You and I know, that such an animal having seven horns and seven eyes, would be a freak of nature. In the Law period on earth, could you have offered such an animal as that on the Jewish altar? Absolutely not. It would not have been accepted. Therefore you have to realize the animal was not literal. What John was seeing was only symbolic of the attributes and authority delegated to the person who was sitting there holding that little scroll. Authority was to be delegated unto Him by the Eternal Spirit; and this shows transition of authority. That is what it brings out; and the person sitting there is silent: saying nothing. It is the angel that is escorting John and one of the elders that do the talking. Having seen that, let us go directly to the 21st chapter. He is already in heaven. He has been moved from one scene to another. He saw many developments of things take place. In the 21st chapter, in the 9th verse, we find these words, “And there came unto me one of the seven angels which had the seven vials full of the seven last plagues, and talked with me, saying, Come hither.” This is one of the seven vial angels entering the picture here; and as we move to the 15th verse of that same chapter we find this, (It is not in red letters.) “And he that talked with me had a golden reed.” Who was talking to John? An angel. Do you catch the point? The person of the throne is not saying a word. It is an angel doing the talking. Go to the 22nd chapter now. “And he showed me a pure river.” Who did this? An angel did it. Go on down to the 6th verse. “And he said unto me.” It was not the person of Jesus doing the talking; but notice the 7th verse. The same one that said, “And he said unto me, These sayings are faithful and true: and the Lord God of the holy prophets sent His angel to show unto His servants the things which must shortly be done,” said all of this. But now we come to some red letter words again. “Behold, I come quickly.” That should tell you the angel speaks in the first person, because the angel is not saying, behold I come quickly for himself: but for the One he represents. The words are in the first person, pointing to the Lord Jesus Christ, behold He comes quickly. It is all carried out through an angelic being. It is things like this, that many years ago got some of the old oneness people all on the kick, that when Jesus went away His body was dissolved and went into gases, and the spirit of life that He was, went back and infused itself with the Father. Therefore they make it Jesus only and say He is not coming again in bodily form: He only comes in spirit form. That is as wrong as wrong can be. The reason I say these things, is because of the various ideas people have about the Godhead. You take in the Trinitarian church world for instance: they emphatically declare that they see three thrones in heaven. They may as well say that, when you look at what they teach. It makes no difference how you present the 4th and 5th chapters of Revelation to them, they still see three thrones in heaven. They refuse to see it any other way. There is no where in the entire Bible, New Testament or the Old, that you see three thrones in heaven. There is only one throne, and there is only one person seen sitting on that throne. That is the immortal Jesus Christ, the Son of God, who was taken up and invested with all the divine glory and majesty of the Father’s complete being. God manifested that in the person of His Son, and positioned Him in heaven delegating all authority to Him, that He should be the head over all things to the Church, which is His body. Since you and I do not know Jesus by having had contact with the flesh man, we have been taught by the apostle Paul: that we must know Him by the Spirit, and so it is the Spirit of God, because it is omnipotent, it is omniscient, and it is always omnipresent. He can take that Spirit that He is, and project an image to you and me; and convey to us through that image any thing He sees fit to. That is why with John here He was using the office of an angelic being to inform him, and make possible all these things we see written in the book of Revelation, which is a prophecy. Just a couple more verses, and we will conclude this. We come on down to the 9th verse, a verse we have already looked at, and find these words, “Then saith he unto me.” It is still the angel talking. It is not red letters in the red letter editions. Then we come on to the 12th verse, and notice there. The angelic figure is not speaking to draw identification to himself: However it is red letter words. Therefore the angel speaks in the first person. “And, behold, I come quickly; and my reward is with me, to give every man according as his work shall be. I am Alpha and Omega, (the same thing said in the first chapter) the beginning and the end, the first and the last.” It ends right there. It becomes black letter words again. Then in the 16th verse it says this, and notice how it is worded. “I Jesus (the first person) have sent mine angel (that is who John had been looking at; and that is who had been escorting John) to testify unto you these things in the churches. I am the root and the offspring of David, and the bright and morning star.” From there on it goes back to black letter words. It is how the angel communicates and leads and directs John. Now Bro. Jackson: Why did you bring all those things in? So we can have a better picture of how Revelation was written, and of how to understand it. Who was it actually doing the talking? Who did John really see? Not the literal person a lot of people think he saw. It was an angel doing all of the talking. That is why I say, Somewhere in front of us, I do not know when; but when that time does come, God is going to use seven men, just as simple as simple can be; and they are going to speak to the bride of Christ, those prophetic things He wants her to hear. That is why I believe He could use the image of Bro. Branham, the prophet messenger to this Age, to convey to them certain things. Because the age of Gentile Christendom has become like it is, I have no problem in seeing how God would use that image, for that purpose. These men can no doubt have a vision or a dream, seeing that man come to them and begin to speak to them of things relative to present tense world conditions and how to look at the coming of Jesus Christ for His Church. That is why I believed it was typed back there on the Mt. of Transfiguration: when Jesus took with Him three disciples; and allowed them to see the vision with Moses and Elijah talking to Him about what was facing Him. As I was telling a brother on the telephone yesterday, When Jesus took Peter, James, and John and went up on the Mt. of Transfiguration, there was given a prophetic type that before Jesus could come as He was seen all glorified in His Millennium appearance, He would be forerun by two prophets who were characterized there in the vision. I said also to the brother, Notice, in the vision the disciples did not hear these prophets talking to Jesus about the Millennium, which they were to forerun. They heard them talking to Jesus about the things He, the Son of God, was to soon suffer at Calvary. If it was important that Jesus, our Lord and Savior, who being the man He was, and already seen Himself in the Psalms, in Isaiah, and also Jeremiah, and knowing every one of those scriptures pertained to Him, to have those prophets of old speak to Him like that, why should it be so unthinkable that the prophet to this age do likewise for the Church that was brought out of Babylon by his ministry? Why was it necessary for Jesus to be spoken to like that? Keep in mind, He was told things that He would have to suffer. I have to say, These were things He did not see by reading scriptures pertaining to Himself. Do you catch my point of illustration? God could have sent an angel to Him; but it was the image of two prophets sent to Him. Just think about it: those three disciples were allowed to see that. That is why Matthew wrote about it in that manner. God used the images of two old prophets to vindicate something. That was the two greatest anointings that have ever rested on mortal man. Moses and Elijah were both mightily used of God. That is why they will appear in the Jewish sector as time goes into this week of Daniel. They will minister for a thousand, two hundred and threescore days. If God can do that for the Jewish people, then here is what I am looking at: In Revelation 10:7, where it says, (By this time the seven thunders have already sounded.) “But in the days of the voice of the seventh angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God should be finished, as he hath declared to his servants the prophets.” The word should is not an instantaneous expression. It is just like me saying, I hear you’re getting ready to build a new house. Yes sir. Do you have the plans? Yes sir. Do you have the contractor? Yes sir. When do you figure you will have it done? Well the contractor says if there is good weather we should have it done in three months. Do you see what the word should is applicable to? It pertains to a progressive period of time. You would not get a contractor to say, Well the way things are going right now, I would say ten years. You would not even want a man like that. You want a man that has the means and knows what he is doing. That is why in that verse, the mystery of God, meaning the calling out of the church, the body of Christ, should, it will definitely be completed. It is also why that angel cried in the 6th verse. When he cried, the seven thunders uttered; and he then sware by Him that liveth forever and ever that time should be no longer. Why then? Because both times the word should appears, it is pointing to the time that elapses after the thunders are sounded. Some will say, Bro. Jackson, I have a problem here. That is what gets me. That is why I brought this out like this. They have everything Bro. Branham ever said memorized to the core. They think everything God is going to do has to be exactly the way they have memorized all of that. That is why I say, Sure he saw seven angels; but what he saw in Arizona has nothing to do with these seven men. Well don’t you believe they have to be under those seven angels? What does that have to do with God’s plan? I believe there is more than seven angels in the whole family of God. Those seven angels are the seven spiritual angelic beings that walked with these various men through time. They can absolutely be all manifested in and through the ministry of that man, because that is pertaining to the gospel message; but this is something different than that. What kind of angel do you think he had? I have just read it to you: if you caught the picture. Sure there was an angel guiding Paul. Sure there was an angel guiding John. It did not have to be the same one either. If that were the case back here, then we have to look at something way back here. That is why I say, God is going to pull a trick on those who think they have everything figured out by something Bro. Branham said. It is not a game of hide and seek. It is not a game of riddles. It is how we understand the Spirit of God and how through time He has shown that He can work in conjunction with man, using angels, or even the image of a man, a prophet, in order to put forth His purpose. Since the Gentile church world is so bitterly against the name William Branham, I can see God using His image with the bride of Christ: to lift it up. That is vindication that He was God’s messenger to this age. May God bless you every one. Amen

1993-11-Looking-For-Clues-Part-2

Looking For Clues, Part 1 – 1993, October

Looking For Clues, Part 1 - 1993, October

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

Rev. Raymond M Jackson

WE ARE LIVING CLOSE TO THE END OF THIS GENTILE AGE OF GRACE: AND AMONG CHURCH-GOING PEOPLE YOU CAN HEAR ALL KINDS OF PREDICTIONS AND PROJECTIONS ABOUT THINGS THAT MUST TAKE PLACE BEFORE THE LORD JESUS COMES FOR HIS BRIDE CHURCH; BUT THE PITIFUL PART OF IT IS THAT VERY FEW OF THOSE PREDICTION ARE BASED UPON THE SCRIPTURES. THAT IS WHY I WANT TO TAKE A LITTLE TIME AND DEAL WITH SOME THINGS REVELATED PEOPLE ARE TO BE AWARE OF IN THE MIDST OF ALL OF THIS TALK ABOUT THE END TIME. I WILL TITLE THE MESSAGE, “LOOKING FOR CLUES,” BECAUSE THAT IS EXACTLY WHAT IT WILL BE ABOUT. GOD HAS GIVEN HIS TRUE CHILDREN MANY CLUES: THAT WHEN STUDIED PROPERLY WILL LET THEM KNOW WHERE THE CHURCH IS, SPIRITUALLY SPEAKING, AS HER DEPARTURE TIME DRAWS NIGH. I HAD ALREADY STARTED THIS MESSAGE BEFORE WE WENT TO NORWAY; BUT AFTER GOING THERE AND HEARING SOME OF THE THINGS THAT ARE BEING CIRCULATED AROUND, I FEEL AN EVEN STRONGER URGENCY TO CALL YOUR ATTENTION TO SOME SCRIPTURAL FACTS. THERE ARE THINGS WRITTEN EVER SO CLEARLY IN OUR BIBLE’S THAT ABSOLUTELY TAKE ALL OF THE GUESS WORK OUT OF OUR CONVERSATION CONCERNING THE COMING OF THE LORD AND WHAT MUST TAKE PLACE FIRST.


Some of the Norwegian church people expressed much interest in respects to what is going on in Jerusalem: about the ark of the covenant and also about the fact that among a certain element of the Jews there is a searching for the ancestral background of certain families within the Jewish Levite tribe. They are definitely beginning to become concerned that they could be getting close to the time there will be a temple built. If so, there has to be certain Jewish Levites that are capable by their background, by their genealogical heritage, as well as morally, to function within that priestly role. Then upon arriving home, I had two tapes here sent to be by a brother in Bloomington. The information, the literature itself comes directly from Jerusalem. There is definitely a movement among a certain element of Jews in Jerusalem now, and has been for a long time; but it seems that somehow or other those people have been suppressed by the news media and are not looked upon as being very important: But the movement is called “The temple mount and the rebuilding of the temple movement.” It tells how this particular man that is pressing hard for the re-establishment in the minds of Jewish people the importance of the temple being rebuilt, is a descendent from a rabbi that goes back many years ago: that immigrated into Israel. His interest at that time was to begin to spread throughout the land of Israel, among those Jews that really were found living there then, that the time was getting close when the Jewish people must take the responsibility of doing something about regathering the tribes from the ends of the earth. He had the ten tribes at heart at that time. Somehow or other that old rabbi was killed by Arabs: because they wanted to shut him up. They did not want this state of Israel to come into existence. To them, it would be a hindrance to the overall vision they felt the Islamic Arab world had. You have to realize, in and around the little land of Israel, when you look at all the Arab states, as well as many of the non Arab states, that are all under this Islamic religion, there is now a combining of political and religious philosophy. They cannot tolerate this statehood of Israel to be there in the midst of what they claim is their land. That is exactly why, from the political standpoint of Israel, they are reaching out to western leaders, especially the United States leadership, hoping to bring about negotiations for a peace settlement. It is being suggested that there be a certain portion of land within the confines of what is now Israel partitioned likewise to form another Arab state within the confines of the land of Israel. These particular Jews realize this is completely contrary to Bible prophecy. Let me just say this, We all know that for the last 50 years, since the close of WW2, the United States has pressed hard under every administration, for Jews from every nation to be allowed to immigrate back to the land of Palestine and settle there. Now just take for instance this thought, I saw a census not long ago of the Jewish population in the world. It runs into many millions. Now our leadership is saying to nations, you must for human rights sake, be willing to let the Jews go home. Then on the other hand, they press the leadership of Israel within the territory, you must be willing to give up land at the same time, in order for the Palestinians that are already living there to have a homeland. That is absolutely like putting one million beans in a quart jar. It is impossible. It is unreasonable to think you can crowd millions of one race of people in a small territory which does not cover the size of southern California, and at the same time slice out another part of it just to give the Palestinian Arabs that are there a statehood of their own. They may very well try it; but we know that scripturally it can never work like that. It looks like craziness on the part of our leadership to even devise such a plan. The Bible gives us a complete picture of what God has ordained for these last days if we will just lay aside our own carnal feelings of what we consider to be fair and just and let the Holy Spirit direct our thinking. Therefore I am just praying, Lord help me put this message together in a meaningful way. We need to realize, If we are living close to the time when Israel is going to be given an opportunity to build a temple, then it means that we, as a Gentile people, a Church, right here somewhere before that event occurs, are living now in a little short interval of time when we can expect God, by His Spirit, to finish among us, everything that is written scripturally pertaining to a Gentile Bride Church being prepared and made ready to be presented to the Lord Jesus Christ. I have a lot of things to say; and I do not know when I will get it all said. Nevertheless I am going to take my time and try to cover this message, “Looking For Clues:” from every angle. What are we looking for? We are looking for clues that will help us better understand how close we are getting to the coming of Jesus Christ. That is what it is all about. We realize Jesus said very plainly, no man knows the day nor hour of the coming of the Son of man: Not even the angels of heaven know the day or hour wherein the Son of Man cometh. He was talking about the coming of the Lord for His Church. It is a mystery. We know from the scriptures that when He does come visibly with the saints, with the armies of heaven, as is described in Revelation 19, that is not a mystery; but His coming for the catching away of the bride Church is a mystery. When He comes back with His armies from heaven, heaven will be opened and every eye will behold that great event. Every knee will bend, every head will bow. The wicked will flee to the mountains and cry for the rocks to fall upon them; but their efforts will all be in vain: because He is coming to judge them. That coming is not a mystery: it will be fulfilled at the end of the seventieth week of Daniel. He will not be coming then as a thief. He is only coming as a thief in the night, to take His little bride Church out of this world. When you talk about a rapture, this degenerate, perverted society we are living in wants to treat you as some kind of odd-ball character that must surely be in some kind of cult. Well the most highly recognized of all the denominational churches in the world is also the largest cult in the world. Their true followers are under bondage; and there is nothing about it that honors the Creator. You talk about something dangerous: that is it; but no, they want to pick on people who do truly have a revelation of the scriptures and are trying to live accordingly, and investigate them. I said a few weeks back, No doubt there will be more Waco Texas type groups rising upon the scene before the end; because scripturally that is one of the signs of the end time. At the same time though, there is going to be another element of people that are the real people of God; and they are going to have an understanding, a vision, and a picture in their mind’s of how to yield their lives to God and get ready to leave this world.

 

 

HAGGAI AND ZERUBBABEL-AND THE NAME OF JESUS


Let us go into the 2nd chapter of Haggai: for that is where our message begins: in a prophecy given over 500 years before the advent of Christ. We get the setting from this. We could even go back into the writings of Ezra and read the same thing we find here. In fact it gives a more overall picture of the dedication of the little temple we are going to read about. Around 520 or 519 two prophets arose on the scene. We do not even know from history where they came from, as to their background and former activitye. All we know is, Cyrus made a decree that all the Jews who out of a willing heart wanted to go back from Babylonian captivity, back to Jerusalem to help build the house to their God were free to do so. He even exhorted the political leaders and such that sums from the treasury should be given them for this cause. When you go to Ezra you can read how there was taken all those golden instruments, vessels and such, that King Nebuchadnezzar had carried away from the temple when he invaded their land and took them captive. All of those things were brought out and restored to the hands of the Jewish people: to be taken back to their home land and placed in the rebuilt temple. They were exhorted to start building their temple. That was their commission. Not a word was said about rebuilding the city of Jerusalem. Anyhow all of this fits into the 70 weeks of Daniel. We will be sticking to this from the prophetic picture, the types and things established here, and from it we will bring over certain prophetic fulfillment that is pointing to the hour you and I now live in. It is important that we see the picture from the standpoint of how it is applicable to our day and time, as we see the types portrayed. (Haggai 2:1-3) “In the seventh month, in the one and twentieth day of the month, came the word of the Lord by the prophet Haggai, saying, Speak now to Zerubbabel the son of Shealtiel, governor of Judah, and to Joshua the son of Josedech, the high priest, and to the residue of the people, saying, Who is left among you that saw this house in her first glory? and how do ye see it now? Is it not in your eyes in comparison of it as nothing?” This name, Zerubbabel, was an important name. We do not know much about the man, but he was a political and social leader that somehow or other had been appointed over this people to govern them in their social, domestic, and political affairs. There was also another man by the name of Joshua. He was of the Levite tribe. He was in the company; and was to be the priest that would function in this temple once it was built. Joshua, was the same name our Savior was called by, setting a perfect type. It would have been strange, if that temple had been rebuilt and they had chosen a Jewish Levite who had a name like Simeon, or Nathaniel, or something other than Joshua; but it was all a master plan of the great Creator, so his name was Joshua: the same name Jesus is derived from. Of course the very fact that I have said this makes it necessary for me to say certain other things along this line and put it in the message; because I have in my possession various literature that has been sent to me through the years from various groups of Gentile people who somehow or other keep wanting to insist that we all refer to God as Joshua or Yahweh, that being the Hebrew name of Jesus. They want to pronounce the name of Jesus that way: giving you the impression that when we say Jesus, (which is truly supposed to be the name) it is a pagan name; and that the letters in it have no value. They are trying to imply that we, as Gentiles, must come back to using Yahweh, or Yahshua, like the early Christian apostles did. Well saints, I am going to say certain things that will no doubt be offensive to people like that; but I feel that it is necessary: so bear with me. We are approaching the end. I know some of these people take me for a nut, simply because I am not an educated person according to their standards. I admit that I am not; but I do not rely on my education for what I teach: I rely on the ONE that knows all about everything. It is just the grace of God that has helped me through the years: to look at some things, at certain types and shadows and see what they pertain to. I will accept your information, how that in the first century, and no doubt for a period of time onward, those early Christians did use either Yahweh or Yahshua, rather than the term Jesus. I have no reason to disagree with that. However I am looking at the picture here in 1993: after many centuries of Christianity since the days they refer to have come and gone; and I find that from many of these groups that teach these things they also say that we have to come back to the Jewish Sabbath and observe it. They say that worshiping on the first day of the week, on Sunday like we do, is a pagan practice. Well I just preached a message on that very thing some months back. They cannot prove by early Christian history of the first and second century, that early Gentile Christians worshiped on the Jewish Sabbath. They accuse the Catholic Church of instituting the practice of worshiping on the first day of the week; but I ask you, Where did they get the idea to do that? They got it from the Bible; because the first century Christians did assemble on the first day of the week. Upon returning home from Norway I found other literature waiting for me showing these very same things. Listen! Saints: Every prophecy that is typed in the first chapters of Leviticus, coming up to chapter 23, every ceremony, every feast, every day festivity, every type it portrayed was literally fulfilled in and during the first advent of Christ. Therefore we are now looking to the next order of types: because when we go into the day of atonement, and the feast of trumpets, where all the Israelites gather and for seven days feast and fellowship, eating under booths made from limbs and leaves and things, keep in mind, all those types that are yet to be fulfilled and there is no doubt we Gentiles are typed in those things. Just remember, those types are not activated until the Jews have a spot on which their temple and altar is set in motion. Once that altar is set in motion and sacrifice is made active, then watch the types. Prophecies of the Bible are just like a stop watch. When it gets to a certain part of a second you push the trigger and the watch stops counting time. It matters not how much time goes on, it just sits right where it is stopped; but when there is a certain time factor that certain details are to go into motion, the stop watch is pressed again and it starts clicking again. That is exactly how we have to look at some of the things people are looking at in these types. I will now bring that right back to the usage of the name Yahweh, or Yahshua. I am just a dumb Gentile. If a Jewish person anywhere should ever get hold of this message, PLEASE, I want you to understand, I respect the language and the word, how it is portrayed in the Hebrew as to how you name your God, and also how Jesus, or Joshua, or Yahshua, is pronounced. I respect all of that. However I, as a Gentile believer in the same God, feel no responsibility to use your language in referring to HIM. When those apostles, who were Jews, came to the Gentiles almost 2000 years ago, I read in the book of Acts and see how they presented the gospel every place they went. I find that every one of those assemblies were started with Jewish converts. Therefore since they were preaching to Jewish people they naturally used a language understood by them; but I challenge anyone who tries to teach that God cannot be worshiped using our own Language. You make a mockery out of the whole concept of worship: when you confine it to your narrow minded interpretation of what God will accept. I have no doubt whatsoever that in the first century of Christianity those apostles of Christ did most of their preaching in languages that were native to those they were preaching to: for their first converts in every place they went were Jews; but do not try to push that language concept almost 2000 years beyond that time when the people you are dealing with have their own language; and the scriptures translated into those languages. It would be ridiculous for anyone to think we all have to learn Hebrew in order to worship God. I hope all of you understand what I am pointing out. I believe many of those Jewish families that were converted in the first century of Christianity, left children that continued on in the faith. Even those would leave children behind them that would continue on in the faith for a century or so; but after so long, when preeminence, which was primarily in the Middle East and the Asiatic areas began to change position, and time begins to move into the western world of Italy and Europe, by this time the Jewish presence is fading out of the presence of the Gentile church. It is true the Gentile church was also declining, revelatory wise, from many of the original things the apostles taught; but my point is, They would surely hold to a language structure that was easy for them to use in all their communication: regardless of where they were. Naturally I say this with godly respect to anyone that wants to hold to Yahweh, if the word fits into the language you normally speak; but do not try to convince me that I have to speak Hebrew in order to pray and speak of the God I serve. When you say everything else is heathen, then those that want to hold to Sabbath keeping, and say we are worshiping on a pagan day are justified by you. Where does this nonsense stop? It goes from that to circumcision and meat eating; and those who are deceived by such teachings are right back under bondage; and the gospel of Jesus Christ is of no benefit to them. My point is, I respect the Jewish language for those who speak it; and I have no quarrel with the pronunciation of those various words; but I maintain that those words belong to those who speak the language the words belong to. I do not speak Hebrew and see no need to. They will argue that this letter has no value, and that letter has no value; but as you have heard me say many times, In English my name is Raymond. In Spanish it is Ramon; but please do not say Ramon when you want me to answer you. I will not respond either. Now I ask you, Have I used a foolish explanation? I do not believe so. I think many times people want to use things that actually puts a price on a revelation. What they have is far more important than what you have. Well I am looking at something down here at the end of time: when there is a Gentile people God is dealing with. It is true they have been in paganism, (Gentile denominationalism) and have been guilty of yielding their lives to all kinds of traditional ideas; but that is all in the past: for those who have come to this marvelous light revealed to us in this age of Laodicea. There will be people going to church houses all over the land today: who will submit to some kind of ritual; but when they leave those places, they will be just as void of revelation of the plan of God as they were when they went in. They will hear a little sermon; but will that sermon cause them to know more about God and His plan and purpose for mankind? I seriously doubt it. Leaving those things as they are though, I say with respect to these things, As we get closer to the end, (and I can begin to see already) that somewhere there is an element of Jewish people that will begin to reach out toward a Gentile society, realizing that certain Gentiles have something they want, and then you can rest assured, there will be many opportunities for the proper pronunciation and usage of those words. It will all fall right in line, and there will be no confusion because of it. By that time the Gentile church will know that all this arguing about the Jewish Sabbath is hocus pocus, that the first day of the week was typed in the Levitical functions in prophecies; and that the name of our Savior is whatever proper translation into our language makes it. As for what day Gentiles are to worship, That is why Jesus rose on the first day of the week, and the Holy Ghost descended on the first day of the week. That established the point right there, that Jesus Christ is the beginning of a new creation. He is the beginning of the redeeming of the family of God. Therefore it points to a new day. The eighth day was characterized in it.


COMPLETING THE SECOND TEMPLE


Let me return to Haggai. In verse 3, the question was asked, “Who is left among you that saw this house in her first glory? and how do ye see it now? is it not in your eyes in comparison of it as nothing?” If you would take that and read over in Ezra where the house was actually dedicated, you would see there more details of the audience and type of people. We can say, This temple, as it was reaching a completed state and the hour of dedication had arrived, many of those older Jews which were children carried away 70 years ago, stood there in their older years looking at the size of this one and it was definitely not an expensive looking building. They were standing there, appreciative, yes, but there was a feeling of, It just don’t look like it did before. There is no doubt in their minds there was the thought, somehow or other we believe that when our Messiah comes to rule and reign, He is to rule in a magnificent temple, not in something that looks like this. You have to keep in mind, There was a lot of questions in their mind’s. That is why the spirit of the Lord, through the prophet, spoke like that to them. “Who is left among you that saw this house in her first glory?” That means Solomon’s temple. It was known in the days of Solomon, when that temple was erected and it finally reached completeness, (you could go back in the Old Testament and read about it) when they finally brought in the ark of the covenant, (which had been housed in a tabernacle, a tent of badger and goat skins) and placed it in the temple, in the Holy of Holies, the Shekinah glory came down and hovered over it, and the priests and people as they sang and worshipped God, the anointing was so great it reached a point when the priests could not even minister because of that anointing. They were all caught up in that anointing presence of God. That was Solomon’s temple. The ark was present then; but as we read here, and as you compare that with the corresponding chapters in Ezra’s writing, you see no ark of the covenant present. What is wrong? As I said in another message, It has to be understood that because time is getting closer to fulfillment of what the ark represented, it (the ark) had already fulfilled its purpose. It was an instrument projecting a type: not something that was to be eternally present. Right here, 500 years before the advent of Christ, we see a little house being dedicated; but the older people had many questions in their mind about it. God took that occasion to speak to them. Two prophets, while they are ministering to the needs, and the edification of those people who are caught up in the building of this little temple, these two men themselves set a precise type, pointing ahead to the hour you and I live in. Neither of them knew they were to set a type of something that would be manifested 2500 years later. That was not in their knowledge. But as God spoke through them, we see from the message they declare, that they did truly set a type. It is important. Why is it important? Because as you and I, a part of the Gentile church which will not be here to witness what takes place when that Jewish nation does go into the 70th week of Daniel, (because we will be taken up in the rapture before then) we have certain things to look at that will enable us to know when that hour of time is getting close at hand. Just remember, there are many things this side of the beginning of that week that we believe must begin to show themselves, things that must begin to materialize and begin to come on the scene. Through these things we begin to see God working, setting the stage, restoring, setting everything in order for that eventual hour of time when that week will be set in motion and that Millennial temple will be in the process of being built. Therefore is how we begin to see the Spirit of God using scriptures, along with world conditions, to begin to line up those scriptures to inform us of how close we are getting to the hour of time when we definitely will be caught up together with the Lord and taken out of this world, while the Jewish nation goes into the fullness of that week. Yes the question was asked, “Who is left among you that saw this house in her first glory? and how do you see it now? is it not in your eyes in comparison of it as nothing?” That was how God acknowledged to the people, I know all about the smallness of it, I know it is not as expensive looking, and as elaborately decorated. By that, He put their mind at ease. (verse 4) “Yet now be strong, O Zerubbabel, saith the Lord; and be strong, O Joshua, son of Josedech, the high priest; and be strong, all ye people of the land, saith the Lord, and work: for I am with you, saith the Lord of hosts: (5) According to the word that I covenanted with you when ye came out of Egypt, so my Spirit remaineth among you: fear ye not.” God used that occasion to launch a picture of something that was far off in the distance. These two verses I am reading, were definitely speaking to that generation of people. God dealt with their hearts. He comforted them and edified them. So now I want to bring that thought over to us Gentiles. For the past 30 years we can say there has been a message in the earth, a message God brought to first bring us out of our Babylonian confusion those denominational systems had us in. God is not going to unite us in Babylon. He will only unite us outside of Babylon. We have to come back to one strategic point and basis of unity. That is the word of God. Just as the nation of Israel must come back and be united, not in Italy, not in Russia, but only in the land of Israel, the land of Palestine, which is the land of their heritage, so does the bride Church have to come back to a certain place before God will unite them. There is a little spot of ground for the Jews; and there is a place in the word of God for you and me. When we look at ourselves, looking back through the years of confusion, and all the things the devil has thrown among us to try to disrupt the process, it sometimes causes discouragement, and even heart ache as we consider all the well meaning friends and loved ones that are still out there. Many times we have the feeling that it is impossible. We think, It just simply cannot work; but it will work. God is in control and He says it is going to work. Our perfection is sure: if we truly are one of His. His word cannot fail. If what God planned here for those natural people worked, it is going to work for you and me; but we all have to have the same picture put together in our mind’s. It takes more than just coming to church because our parents come: we each must have our own personal experience with the Savior. I do not come here just to fellowship flesh. If I had six blood brothers sitting here, I would not be coming just for fellowship with them: I am here to fellowship with God. Why? Because of truth. Because He has led me into truth. My brothers can do as they please, my sisters can do as they please, and mother and dad can do as they please. I am here because of Jesus Christ and truth God has revealed to me. We all have to be more interested in fellowship with Him than with each other, if we expect to receive anything further from Him. Notice how, in the 5th verse God spoke comfort to those Jews. “According to the word that I covenanted with you when ye came out of Egypt, so my Spirit remaineth among you; fear ye not.” Those words were all applicable right then to the Jewish people that stood there, as they looked, and was gathered around that little temple. No matter how small, God wanted them to know, I am with you. Today, as we look back through the centuries of time, observing how God has dealt with His people, and then look forward to a time when He will surely deal with us in the same way, it ought to cause us to be a little anxious for that time to arrive. As God was with the early church, and we read about it in the Bible and see how His power worked in their midst, it makes me very confident that He is going to be with a little nucleus of people here at the end time the same way. He is going to encourage and instruct them. He is going to be with them, even while the world despises them, talks about them and desires to be rid of them. Look at Israel today. Even in the nation of America there are people sitting in Gentile churches today that wish this Jewish state was done away with. They say it is a hindrance to progress. That goes to show that they do not know a thing about Bible prophecy. They are not even interested in prophecy. They are just interested in that club they belong to, which they call a church: because it is something they can hide behind. Christianity is not something you can hide behind. You can only hide behind the Lord Jesus Christ. If you truly hide behind Him, then He puts you in the Church. If you are not hid in the Lord Jesus Christ, recognizing that His shed blood is what gives us hope, you are not in His Church.


LOOKING TO THE END TIME


Now I want you to notice how the Spirit of God took that natural setting back then and began to look to the future. First, as we look to the future, we need to put our mind’s in the same frame of thinking, and realize how those Jews felt at that time. (verses 6-7) “For thus saith the Lord of hosts; Yet once, it is a little while, and I will shake the heavens, and the earth, and the sea, and the dry land; And I will shake all nations, and the desire of all nations shall come: and I will fill this house with glory, saith the Lord of hosts.” This prophecy was not pointing to the then present time that the little house was built. It was pointing to a future time. It began to have its first application in the first advent of Christ; but verse 7 goes beyond that to how God shakes things bringing us to the end time. “And I will shake all nations, and the desire of all nations shall come: and I will fill this house with glory, saith the Lord of hosts.” We see how political leaders today are traveling all over the earth, running here and there, straining, doing everything to pull out something, some magical philosophy to help stabilize touchy situations and bring about world peace. Everything they do is futile: so very fruitless. As I said last Sunday, When we hear our leaders stressing certain things, trying to put importance on working with the United Nations, if you just look back through the months this horrible situation in Yugoslavia has been on the News, can you honestly say the United Nations has done anything worth two cents? What have they done about that? Or if you please, What can they do? They have not done one thing that has given a thread of hope to those people. They have literally spent millions of dollars taking aid to one element of people, while at the same time the other people that are the opposite, are blowing up, and tearing those towns all to pieces. When that Communistic breakup came, those towns and cities were beautiful places. Look at them now. Burned out, ripped and torn to pieces. Who is going to build them back? Probably millions of dollars of aid will come right out of your national treasury, if and whenever the time comes the world decides to do something right. My point in saying that is, Whatever the world, political wise, has in mind, such as a United Nations or a New World Order, it will all play out as we get closer to the end of this Gentile era; because we can read the Bible and see a thing coming up in Revelation 13, that is not a New World Order. It is an old world order. It is an old system coming up in another century of time, just to have a short say so again. That is why it is referred to in the 17th chapter of Revelation, and the beast that was, and is not, and yet is. It will come out of the bottomless pit and go into perdition. That ought to tell people not to look for a New World Order. It was a beast before, ruling the lives of people without any concern for their well being. Therefore when it comes back into power again, it will not be gentle like a lamb. I want to read you something from the 17th chapter of Revelation: that will let you see what so many politicians are referring to as a new world order. God was showing the apostle John this very thing so many have their high hopes anchored in, so notice what it says. (Revelation 17:8) “The beast that thou sawest was, and is not; and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition: and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder, whose names were not written in the book of life from the foundation of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and is not, and yet is.” There, is your new world order. It is the same old beast that ruled Europe in the Dark Ages: the beast that received a deadly wound by the hands of the Reformers, but was healed; and is now ready to continue on a little short space of time. That is what all of this political maneuvering will eventually produce; and the pope of Rome will sit at the head of it all: just like he did throughout the Dark Ages. Therefore here in the endtime, that is why the shaking of all things must first be identified. When we look back to about 1989 when this began to take place, who would have thought, back in the middle of the 80’s, that the Communistic empire could crumble so fast, knowing that in the years since WW2 Russia had built every kind of weapon she could possible build? She did her very best trying to beat us to the moon. She stole our secrets, bought from spies and all such, getting what she needed to produce bombs and other instruments of warfare. She was determined she would bury the western world. Then what happened, as we got closer to time for God to start the shaking of all things? and for the removing of things that are shaken? All of the man made systems must be shaken and allowed to tumble, that the things that cannot be shaken may remain, and go on to complete fulfillment. Knowing what we know we can say, When it was time for that Russian, Communistic regime to fall, it did not take a war to do it. No. God somehow or other came down on the scene and put in the heart of a few politicians a certain outlook and way to go about it. Those men did not know they were fulfilling the word of God. What does it say in Revelation 17 concerning the ten horns? They have received no kingdom as yet. That is talking about the ten nations of western Europe, meaning of course that none of them have received a world empire: even though they fought for many years trying to gain one. However the Bible says they received power as kings one hour with the beast, meaning of course that allotted period of time. For God will put in their hearts to fulfill His word. No matter how they want to fuss about one currency and all this and that which is destined to take place, as we get closer to the time for that whole system to work and function just the way God’s word says it will: He just moves on the hearts of leaders, and puts in them certain ideas. When that happens everything will click and go together. Why? Because on the other hand He uses a shaking process. Everything that can be shaken will be shaken; and through that shaking process God will work His purpose. In other words, When the great plans of mortal mankind are shaken to pieces and they grab hold of whatever they can, trying to hold on, they have to use whatever is left; and that moves their thinking right into the way God has ordained it to be. Just look at the horrible picture over in Bosnia right now: I have to say, That has given us a good look as to what little good the United Nations is in this hour. It ought to present a picture to a lot of Christians that will let them know, Do not look for a New World Order. Keep your eyes on Rome and Western Europe. Right there, is the power that is going to start speaking one day soon. It will not be a new world order: it will be an old world order restored. The key to what is going on in world affairs is found in verse that we just read: “And I will shake all nations, and the desire of all nations shall come.” When God gets through shaking all nations in the fulfillment of this scripture man’s desires and plans will be changed. When the shaking has accomplished its purpose, the Jews will not only be back in all the land they are scripturally entitled to: they will also be in full possession of their temple mount area. That will bring time into the proper setting for the 70th week of Daniel to start; and for the temple to be built; and when construction begins on it, Isaiah 60, will fall right into place. Naturally we know it will take some kind of shaking among the Arab world very soon in order for Isaiah 60 to be fulfilled: because right now, there is no way any world leader involved in world affairs would dare say to any Moslem nation, How many of you are willing to contribute money to the Jewish nation for the rebuilding of their sacred temple? How many of those Arab states at this present time would be willing to contribute one thin dime? Not one! Not one right now. Why? They want to get rid of Israel instead of helping her build her temple. They want to get her out of that land. There are some Jewish political leaders in office right now that are willing to strike a compromise with the Arabs for the sake of peace; but we all know what the eventual outcome of any compromise will be: For God’s holy Bible lets us know the Jews will soon have to take more land: not give up land they already have. Somehow they are going to come into possession of their former boundaries that include their land on the Jordan side of the Jordan River. Look at your old Bible maps: you can see for yourselves what land they are soon going to come into possession of. You can say this, Not even leaders of our own nation (which is known as a Christian nation) realize the hour they are living in. Listen saints: There are many voices telling the Jews to give up their idea of reaching out farther and come to some kind of compromise for the sake of peace but I say, God has this whole thing planned precisely. When the time comes, just watch the necessary shaking take place. I cannot help but believe one of these days there is going to be a political, domestic, and military upheaval in the Middle East, and when you see it, things are going to start falling to pieces; and at the same time other things will start coming together: just the way prophecy has pictured it. It will not take God 15 or 20 years over a long period of time for Him to bring it about. In fact it is all going to come about in such a dramatic, miraculous way, people are going to be startled, really shaken by it. You may say, I cannot understand. It all looks impossible. Well, God is the worker of impossible things. When He brought Israel out of Egypt, He showed what He was capable of doing; and He has promised that in the last days He will do it again. God is just tolerating a lot of nonsense out of these Gentile political leaders while He is working, slowly, putting other things in place. He still has His eye on us. I have to say, He is wanting us to get the attention of His hand of guidance, and get ourselves lined out right. Then, as the people of the Gentile church begin to go forward in the right direction, and they are walking in unity, with a vision and understanding of why they are doing what they are doing, then watch what God begins to do in the Middle East. When you then see the hand of God working in the Middle East, you will know your day of redemption, and your departure from this life is getting close at hand. That will put a spark of enthusiasm and excitement in the heart of people. There will be a joy in your soul because you know beyond the shadow of a doubt, My Savior is coming very soon. There is not a devil in hell that can throw enough wrenches in the works to prevent it. The end result of the temple being rebuilt is that when the Millennium is set in motion, all nations will come to Zion once each year, to Jerusalem to worship the Lord of hosts. When I said awhile ago that something has to break in the Middle East and develop a certain way in order to set Isaiah 60 in motion, these last two verses will help you understand why. As God looked down on that little nucleus of people 500 years before the first advent of Christ, He knew many of them standing there were thinking, I wish this house were larger. I wish it looked as beautiful as the one I saw when I was a little boy, or girl, growing up. God wanted those old timers to know, that even though they knew why the house was so small, He wanted them to know everything was all right. He reassured them. He said this, “The silver is mine, and the gold is mine, saith the Lord of hosts.” That is God’s way of saying, if I had wanted this house to have been larger, it would have been, you would have had the money to pay for the more expensive rebuilding. In other words He said, I accept its purpose. God knew that Jesus the Christ, their Messiah who was literally the ark of the covenant in human flesh, would never sit in that house. He was ordained to sit in the one that was prophesied about in these two verses. (8) “The silver is mine, and the gold is mine, saith the Lord of hosts. (9) The glory of this latter house shall be greater than of the former, saith the Lord of hosts: and in this place will I give peace, saith the Lord of hosts.”


WHAT GOD WILL DO ON BEHALF OF THE GENTILE CHURCH


Let me now speak to us who are sitting here this morning. As I look at this assembly, a Gentile Church Assembly, and think of that last dream I had, I do not know to the fullest extent what all it involves yet; but I do know that from whatever time we are living in right now until the time it is fulfilled in its fullness, God, by His Spirit is going to move through this Gentile church world to bring a people into unity and put them together in the light of this truth we hold to be so precious. They are not going to be Methodists, they are not going to be Baptists, Presbyterians, Catholics, Episcopalians, Unitarians or anything else manmade when He gets through with them: they will just be Christians. However, they could have been in any of those organizations at one time. It is just that, as God puts His true Church together, they are going to become Christians like they see in the Bible, in the book of Acts. As I say that, we have to realize this Gentile church is going to come back together by the workings of the Spirit of God. It looks like God has tolerated nonsense, confusion, and people have been allowed to run rampant doing anything they desire to do and get by with it; but God is not going to tolerate this nonsense very much longer. We are entering an interval of time now, when God is going to start correcting, eliminating and purifying until He has the kind of Church we read about in the book of Acts. We are going to get a brighter picture of ourselves, of each other, and of how we are supposed to walk and live for Him. As we do, it has to be understood that it is through an anointing of God. It will not be through some intellectual feat we can accomplish ourselves. If in former times God told that people, It is not by might, nor by power, but by my Spirit saith the Lord, we certainly have no reason to believe a thing like we are talking about will be accomplished any other way in this hour, except by an anointing of the Spirit of God. How much Hebrew and Greek we know will have nothing at all to do with this last day work of God in our lives. Only God Himself can give us a detailed picture of the things that are absolutely essential in order for us to become one in the body of the Lord Jesus Christ in every spiritual fiber of our total makeup. We will begin to see clearly, how we are to function and live in that respect. As we do, I am certain it will be as I saw it in the second phase of my dream: as people came together, coming with that little bottle of anointing oil, and finally, when the great assembly was all gathered and I saw Bro. Branham standing before them, he began to speak on things in relationship to the coming of the Bridegroom. As he did, I could hear these words being spoken throughout that great gathering, Isn’t this wonderful? Oh this is glorious! The one thing I heard them saying above all else was, This is so simple. Whatever the thunders are going to bring out here in front of us, there is no reason for us to think it will be so far-fetched it will be like reaching for the moon. I have every reason to believe, that when the thunders are sounded to the people who are to make up the Bride of Christ, what they speak will be things that will have such a sweetness, and give such a natural capability of understanding that it will make everything look so simple for us. It will not be like it has been in prior times, like when we were in school trying to understand mathematics, or scientific formulas and all such as that. What those thunders speak to the bride of Christ are going to be things that will drop down in the heart’s of the people and will let them see something so beautiful, that no matter what our educative capabilities are, each one is going to say, This is glorious! This is wonderful! I never dreamed it would be so simple. Saints: I certainly do not want to miss it. Do you? I said to the people in Norway, “If you were to say to the Denominational church world today, I had a dream last night of William Branham. He came to me and said certain things: I know what their natural reaction would be: They would say, I don’t believe in that kind of stuff. That is spiritualism, they would say.” Well I admit there are many people involved in spiritualism in this hour of time; but the true people of God know the difference between that and what we are talking about. God has often used the image of a deceased person in a vision He would give someone; but that is not in the same category as the cases where people actually feel that they are communicating with the dead. I will remind you of something you have read in the 17th chapter of Matthew: Let us ask those skeptics this question, How come, that Jesus one day stood before a multitude of Jews after a great miracle had been done: when four thousand men plus women and children had been fed with seven little loaves of bread and a few little fish and said to them, “The Son of man shall come in the glory of His Father with His angels; and then He shall reward every man according to his works. Verily I say unto you, There be some standing here, which shall not taste of death, till they see the Son of man coming in His kingdom?” Was His statement correct? Did some of those standing there that day see such a thing? I assure you they did: even though that was more than 1900 years ago and the literal fulfillment of that event is yet to be. Let me read you a few verses from that 17th chapter of Matthew. “And after six days Jesus taketh Peter, James, and John his brother, and bringeth them up into an high mountain apart, And was transfigured before them: and His face did shine as the sun, and His raiment was white as the light. And, behold, there appeared unto them Moses and Elias talking with Him.(9) And as they came down from the mountain, Jesus charged them, saying, Tell the vision to no man, until the Son of man be risen again from the dead.” It was a vision they saw; but God used it to fulfill the statement Jesus made; and also to speak to Jesus concerning His death which would be accomplished at Jerusalem. Did Peter, James and John actually see the Moses and Elijah of old standing there talking to Jesus? God gave them a vision in which they saw exactly that; and Luke even told what they were talking about: His death at Jerusalem. Would any true believer dare say that even though God used the image’s of those two old prophets to represent something in that instance, He would never do such a thing again? Do not try to limit God like that: He will not cooperate with your projections. He will use any means to convey to His true people what He wants them to receive: just as long as it does not contradict what He has spoken previously in His written word. Those three disciples saw two prophets, Moses and Elijah. Moses had been dead a long time. Elijah had been raptured; but they saw both these figures standing there talking to Jesus. The point is this, and I want all of you to listen carefully: That was not those prophets in literal bodily form. You say, Well Bro. Jackson, I always thought it was. Read your Bible. Go back to the 17th chapter of Matthew and read the whole thing. It plainly tells you in verse 9, that it was a vision. “See that you tell the VISION to no man.” Does that not tell you something? Sure it does. The point is this, The Spirit of God is everywhere. He can manifest any image He chooses to at any time that suits His purpose. Since God is a Spirit that does not have a physical form of His own to dwell in, but is capable of manifesting whatever form He may choose to contact mortal mankind through, we need to be very careful about careless remarks concerning things we are not familiar with. He certainly does not want us to grab hold of everything that is presented to us out here in the world; because the devil uses all sorts of things to deceive those who can be deceived. However when God presents something to us through a vindicated source, what we need to do is consider the content and just wait upon the Lord for His purpose to come to light. He never expects His true people to do anything radical; and certainly nothing that would go contrary to His word; but we do need to be sensitive to the leading of His Spirit and leave room for Him to do for us things that may be different than what He has done on our behalf in the past. For the past almost 2000 years, God has been living in the person of His only begotten Son the Lord Jesus Christ, who is the glorified immortal one, positioned in heaven on the throne of His Father. Since Jesus was taken up 2000 years ago, He has never been back on earth in person since then. Yet that omnipresent Spirit of God can move upon a thousand people at the same time, all over this planet; and each one see Jesus standing right in front of them, even talking to them. That is because it is the Holy Spirit, the Spirit of God that does this sort of thing. When He does, it is because He wants you to see that image of Jesus for a specific reason. It is not a necessary element of our salvation experience. We only need to see Him in the pages of God’s written word in order to lay hold on the benefits of Calvary. Therefore when you hear someone say, Jesus stood by my bedside and said to me so and so, just keep in mind the fact that the actual embodied, glorified, immortal Jesus the Christ, who is now High Priest, is not actually there. It is only the image being conveyed by the power of the Holy Ghost. That is why we have to realize God uses angelic beings to characterize this sort of thing. When the three disciples with Jesus on the Mount of Transfiguration saw Moses and Elijah talking to Jesus, they did not see the literal Moses and Elijah of old. They saw the image of who they were. The image of who they were is to stand out vividly, for God is going to use that same anointing He used to speak to the Old Testament Jewish people, to speak to the Jewish people again in the first half of the seventieth week of Daniel. All of those Jews alive in the days of Jesus’ ministry on earth knew how God had worked with His people of old, and it was God’s way, through the Lord Jesus Christ, of telling those Jewish disciples, that before Jesus Himself will come in literal bodily form, (as we see Him in Revelation 19 sitting on a white horse, when that is literally Him) it will be preceded by the coming of these two prophets. Not the literal Moses and Elijah of old, but two other Jews with that same anointing those men in the Old Testament were moved by. That anointing brought about the specific results God sent it forth for in the past; and it will do so each time it is sent forth. Bro. Branham’s ministry was under the anointing the Elijah of old carried. It has always been a God identifying anointing; and you will certainly have to agree that much of Bro. Branham’s ministry was that of identifying the ONE true and living which is Spirit, and in repudiating the idea that God is three persons. This three person God is a pagan concoction that has no place in the lives of end time Christians. Those two anointings of Moses and Elijah will absolutely forerun the coming of Christ for His Millennial reign. We can say this then, That there will definitely be two prophets, Moses and Elijah, in their type fulfillment which was characterized in Haggai and Zechariah when the second temple was being built, on the scene in Israel when the Millennial Temple is being built. That is the order of God; so I will now return to the thought I was dealing with. It is absolutely evident, that in the plan of God this Gentile world is definitely being cut off. I have to believe the door of revelation as to how a man and woman gets into the church of the living God is ready to be closed any moment. In the mind of God Gentiles have had their chance. As I am made aware of how God deals with people down here, it lets me know He does not start ten years before the closing of the door, to do the things He is doing. He will start that and by the time that door is closed you can rest assured there is nobody else going to be interested in getting into what you and I believe and understand. Therefore if God could show three disciples the images of two prophets that was to forerun the coming of Christ, and could show them by the Spirit in that fashion, then I have to say He could use the image of William Branham in this day and hour when his name has become such a sour taste in the mouth of a lot of religious people. No wonder religious leaders want to pounce on it: Look what a following he has. They do not see people like you and me: they see all this other crazy stuff running to and fro claiming to be in the message of William Branham. If there is something in you and me that God wants this religious world to see: that we are a people that can say Yes Sir, I know who this man was, I sat under his teaching, I have read his sermons, I have a picture in my heart because of it, then He is going to open up the way for such a thing to come about. We have to say, That man was definitely sent to get us out of all this religious mess of confusion that God Had already spewed out of His mouth. God is going to wash us, scrub us down, and pull us through the washing machine of His word until He gets all of that denominational, antichrist junk out of us. Therefore do not think for one minute that we are going to sit here fussing and stewing and chewing gum like a bunch of Methodists, Baptists or any of the others, when He gets through with us. We are going to be thankful to God for what we believe; and do whatever it takes to uphold it. We are going to come to church because we are thankful for truth; and thankful for the privilege of being able to come. If God can speak to certain men by letting them see the image’s of two prophets of old, to show and forecast something in the future for the Jewish people, then what is wrong with Him using the image of a Gentile prophet who was definitely sent to this Gentile age and was rejected by most, because they claimed he was head of a cult: to help get our thinking pointed in the right direction? There are still some in the midst of the people God is working with: that need to receive a revelation that this man truly was sent from God to this generation as the messenger to this age. No one is going out of here in the rapture while still having questions in their mind about the office and calling of Bro. Branham. You cannot reject the one God sends and still retain favor with God. Every individual of the bride of Christ will have in their knowledge a revelation of who he was, why he was sent, and the truth he brought to this age. The devil will not be able to push off a lot of nonsense on them because they will know the truth. Even though there are those who would like to eradicate his name from the face of the earth, there is going to be an element of people in the end time that will walk right out of here with a knowledge and revelation in their heart’s, that if it had not been for that man, we would not be where we are today. That makes Revelation 10:7 line right up: “But in the days of the voice of the seventh angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God (meaning the Church, the body of Christ that is brought out of Babylon) should be finished, as He hath declared to His servants the prophets.” It all started with the fact that his message is the thing that set it in motion. God is going to finish it right here. That is why I believe, when I saw Bro. Branham standing before the audience in my dream, it is not that we are to think he is coming back from the dead: but that somehow the anointing of God, using the man’s image to convey something to, when it is made known, the little Bride of Christ is going to know something that is going to help her get out of this world. Hallelujah!


THE BUILDING OF THE JEWISH TEMPLE


I have something about the building of the temple. I was sent two tapes which came direct from Jerusalem. I have not listened to them yet; but I want to read a paragraph from what I am holding. The man’s name is Gershon Solomon. He fought in the war of 58 and was run over by a Syrian tank. They were about to shoot him when all of a sudden the Syrian troops began to run everywhere. The same Syrian troops told him later that when they were about to shoot him, all of a sudden there were angels all about him and they could not shoot him. I am looking at that paragraph right here. He is the descendant of this old rabbi who back in 1811 set about the beginning process of the rebirth of Israel. Now, at this time, here is what this man is doing. He is definitely trying to educate an element of the Jewish society, and has created a movement; so here is what he says. “To publicly proclaim the message of the temple mount and land of Israel movement in newspapers, wires, posters, newsletters, radio and television, to demonstrate publicly, to raise awareness of Israel to the issue of the third temple, the temple mount, and the land of Israel. To buy a house in the old city, Biblical Jerusalem, (that is the old walled part) near the temple mount, to establish a spiritual and educational center to be used by everyone. The four ton cornerstone will be stored and exhibited on this site. This first stone of the third temple will soon be laid. To organize consciousness for the study of the issues dealing with the temple mount and the third temple.” Reading that, it sounds like they are ready to lay the corner stone; but that is not what he is saying. They are just going to display the stone in this building they were wanting to purchase. That is only to put it on display, because he feels the time is close at hand when they will have the temple mount back in their possession and the cornerstone which will be on display for people to look at in the meantime, is the first stone that will be laid when the time does come. That should be enough to cause Gentile Christians to realize where we are in time. In other words, when you begin to get things like this out into society, you begin to see that if in the heart of Jewish people there is this fervent feeling that they know they are living just before the coming of the Messiah, then we as Gentile people ought to begin to realize God has given us enough in His word to awaken us and make us aware that we must be getting close to the coming of Jesus Christ, our Bridegroom: The ONE who is coming for us as a thief in the night, to take us to glory.


REVIEW OF SOME POINTS ALREADY MADE


I want to go back to Haggai and reread two verses as we continue to look for clues concerning the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ to take us out of here. What kind of clue are we looking for? Things in the scriptures that will help us better understand how close we are getting to the coming of Jesus Christ. We will either do that or we will just build a fantasy in our mind that has no substantial basis of truth by which we can build our hopes upon. I prefer to have my anticipations built upon something vindicated by the holy scriptures. Whatever we believe that is going to be of any benefit to our spiritual stature has to have some scriptural basis. Somewhere there are clues in the Bible pointing to everything God has determined to do. Many times the Bible is read and looked upon from the standpoint, Yes it is the sacred word of God; and it is the divine truth and infallible; but there is no interest in learning the formula for understanding its contents. Without that we are just really reading words that have very little reality. That is what is wrong with the religious world today. When I say that, we want to look for a clue, something that will point and help you and me to look at our present hour of time. Are we really getting close to the coming of Jesus? Is there Bible facts that establish that? Can we really base it on something in the Bible, or are we just groping for something hanging on a thread? We have been looking at the scriptures in Haggai 2, dealing with the word of the Lord spoken through Haggai concerning the people that had returned from captivity with a commission to rebuild the house of God at Jerusalem, and concerning the way God Himself looked upon them and their efforts. We are using this chart with various scriptures and dates that will help you grasp the actual setting better than just listening to me read and speak of them. To that element of people, clearing that pile of rubbish from the temple mound and preparing the spot so they could start building, was a task that seemed so great when they stood looking at that mountain of stone and rubbish. They needed a word from the Lord to encourage them; and God spoke that through the prophets Haggai and Zechariah. Looking at that mountain of stone and rubbish, their task looked almost impossible to them. All of that rubbish had been lying there for 70 long years, and probably had a lot of brush growing up through all of it, so where would they begin their work of clearing away all of that and actually start putting together something they felt would constitute the beginning of a new spiritual relationship between them and their God? We see that more clearly as we read Ezra or Nehemiah; but here in Haggai and Zechariah, we find two men we do not know much about: even though they prophesied not only to that element of people, but also pointed to the hour you and I live in. They both said specific things that is important for you and I to grasp and actually see where they fit into the overall picture. We find clues in all of these prophesies: but for now I want to move on to our present hour of time before we look at these others. We have a line on our little chart representing the time when we had a Gentile prophet messenger in our midst: the Malachi 4:5-6 prophet with the Elijah anointing. Beyond that we have something Zechariah prophesied about in the 4th chapter of his prophecy: which is the two olive trees of Revelation 11:3 that shall come on the scene in Israel in the first half of Daniel’s seventieth week to reveal the Messial to spiritual Israel and demonstrate the power of God as did Moses and Elijah of old. They will fulfill Zechariah 4:3, and also 4:14 which says, “Then said he, These are the two anointed ones, that stand by the Lord of the whole earth.” Therefore if we are looking at ourselves as a Gentile Bride people, then we have to begin to understand that we are really getting close to the coming of Christ in the rapture. You either believe that, or you are looking at the whole thing as some far flung event to take place that we know nothing at all about. Do we know when He is coming? Not the day and hour, but we do know we are in the season. We absolutely have Biblical facts to show He is not coming to His bride as a thief in the night. As far as the make-believing church world is concerned He is coming as a thief in the night; but to the true believers it will not be as a thief in the night.


LOOKING TO THE END TIME TRUE TO LIFE REALITY


We are children of the day, we are not the children of the night, meaning spiritually asleep. I have said this many times, It is a good thing you and I do not know the day and hour for the coming of the Lord: We would wind up in a mess. As long as we remain in this mortal flesh, our flesh has a tendency to become very excited when we know certain things are about to happen. Even some of you sitting here right now, if you planned to start on a trip to California tomorrow morning, you probably will have already spent half of the week getting things packs and you would go home tonight and stay awake all night planning in your mind every little detail. The old adrenalin really starts to flow at a time like that. You get so excited you can hardly wait for daylight to come: so you can get the old car going, heading for California. Just think about it saints: if a trip like that will create such a reaction in your fleshly makeup what do you think it would do to a Christian if he was to know the day or hour the Lord is coming for him? If I knew the Lord was coming Tuesday morning at exactly 10 o’clock, do you think I would go to work Monday and Tuesday? I have my doubts that I would even go to bed tomorrow night: because I would be so excited I would stay up the rest of the night talking about it. That is the natural human reaction. According to the words of Jesus, when He does come for those people that are His, somewhere in the earth it is going to be dark: while in other parts of the world it will be daytime. Two will be lying in bed, sound asleep. One is ready, the other is not. Two are grinding at the mill, (That speaks of the industry of our day. Today, one would be standing there doing all the things the industrial systems have people doing, whether it is tightening bolts, putting electrical wires in a car, or whatever, you do not know what day or hour He is coming, but you are standing there putting everything together as you would any other day and all of a sudden you are gone.) The one next to you didn’t go. Two will be grinding at the mill, one will be taken and the other left. Then two shall be in the field working. There is the agriculture picture. That goes to show, if you really knew the day and hour He is coming, me being a farmer, do you think I would plow corn? Do you think I would cut hay? I would say, Let the next guy do that. With that thought in mind, we have to realize that somewhere as Jesus said certain things, we can know within a season something that is so close it makes you live each day constantly aware He can come any moment for you and me, and you do not have to know the day nor hour, but you can know there is a season you are entering into, and you begin to get ready for the event and allow the Lord to have His way in your life. Now if we are truly looking for a rapture to take place, I want to show you something. Let us just say I am going to put this line right here. (on the chart) That represents 1963 when God used Bro. Branham, and a revelation of some seals was brought forth. Actually if we will look at his teachings of other things through the years leading up to 1963, by the time 1963 had come and the revelation of those seals had dropped down and been put in the structure of his teachings, there lay together collectively, a voice, through which God has said something to this age of Laodicea: to a people who have understanding of those things, and through them have been drawn out of the systems of religion. We can say for sure, that since 1963 there has been a voice of the seventh angel messenger here in the earth, echoing back and forth from one end of this earth to the other, and there is now all over this earth, a people whose lives have been affected by that voice. At the same time we realize we are getting closer to something else that must take place. That puts us right at this point, (pointing to chart right in front of the seventieth week of Daniel designation) and this represents that 70th week of Daniel that is to be set in motion here by the signing of a covenant of peace which will have the antichrist man watching over it. We are looking basically at the nation of Israel first, because that is the pendulum around which time evolves. Naturally we do not know when God’s clock will start ticking off that week of years; but we can say for sure, It is getting close. It has to come in this generation. God cannot allow time to pass out of the generation that saw the nation of Israel restored. That would mess up the scriptures. Jesus said this generation would not pass away until all things this side of the Millennium are fulfilled. That is what He meant by what He said. That is why I want us to go back to the Bible and begin to see if there are scriptural things now in place that do definitely let us know we could be getting very close to that hour of time. I want to go back and read verses 6 and 7 of the 2nd chapter of Haggai again: to base another thought on that will bring us right to this present hour of time. “For thus saith the Lord of hosts; Yet once, it is a little while, and I will shake the heavens, and the earth, and the sea, and the dry land; And I will shake all nations, and the desire of all nations shall come: and I will fill this house with glory, (That is the presence of the Messiah, the Lord Jesus Christ) saith the Lord of hosts.” Paul used that in Hebrews 12:26-27: where he referred to the ministry of Jesus, how it had its first advent application. After saying, I will fill this house with glory, the Spirit of God went right to something that was troubling those people living in that hour. I want us to take another look at it, because right there, is a clue. You say, Bro. Jackson, how is that a clue? Just listen how God responded to their thoughts. (2:8) “The silver is mine, and the gold is mine, saith the Lord of hosts.” Those people in that hour did not have much silver and gold to build the little temple they were so concerned about and it troubled them. God knew the temple they were building was not going to be the one the Messiah would sit in during the Millennium: yet it was going to serve the purpose for the immediate time at hand, the time leading to the first advent of Christ. But then this prophecy is launched and it is pointing right to the hour we are living in. If it is pointing to our time, and we being Gentiles we have to ask, How am I to look at it? For too long now many people have taken this nonchalant attitude that the temple does not have to be built in order for Jesus to come. As far as I am concerned you just as well leave here and try to sow a lettuce bed on the moon as to think He would come back to earth before His house is built. Gentiles have always been guilty of that kind of attitude. The entire Bible proves beyond the shadow of a doubt that when this week is starting, somehow or other the Jews will have already obtained not only possession of the temple mount, but they will be in the process of rebuilding the temple. There is nothing in the Bible giving you the picture that Jesus will be standing over on the Mt. of Olives with His arms crossed: waiting while the construction crews on Mt. Zion build a temple for Him to rule from. That is foolish. That is playing with ideas, rather than with scriptural clues. I am not going to project what; but prior to the time for the last week of Daniel to go into fulfillment, something will take place causing Israel to take possession of the temple mount; and when they do it will be under such circumstances that the Mosque of Omar will no longer be standing there as a sacred thing for the Islamic world to be looking to. I am going to say some things; and I realize we are Gentiles; but we have a responsibility laid upon us: to look at the Bible. Keep this in mind, Every prophecy in the Old Testament written concerning how and what was to take place in the first advent of Christ, was written in such a way no rabbi, no doctor of divinity could take any of them, lift them out of there, write them on paper, drop them in a basket, shake it up, then reach in and pull out one and say, That can be fulfilled right now. Even though they are all there in the same book, in the mind of God, He has a precise order for their fulfillment, a time in which each prophecy drops into the present day affairs of mankind in perfect order. Only in its ordained time does God set in motion events and circumstances leading up to the fulfillment of these individual prophecies. There is an order and sequence to the fulfillment of prophecies of the scriptures. Everything comes out exactly right. That is why from the very first prophecy concerning the Messiah, you will find no place where it says at what time He will appear. It plainly tells you where He would be born, out of what tribe He was to come, and what would happen to Him, but not when He would come upon the scene. When the time came, He was born. He fulfilled what He was ordained to fulfill and ascended into glory where He has been ever since; and when we come to the book of Acts, what do we find Peter preaching? In his second sermon he plainly states that all those scriptures (I will use the word relative, to the things that have already been fulfilled) concerning Christ, how He must be crucified and buried and rise again, God hath fulfilled. That meant they were all in the past. God fulfilled them in precise order. There is not one laying there that was not touched, whether they are minor or major, they all fit in. Therefore with that much established, let us try to look at our present hour. We have Gentile doctors divinity specializing in prophecy: out here in the charismatic circles today. They will just throw out a hypothetical picture before the people who listen to them. We have two schools of thought from their realm. We have one bunch out there that are saying the rapture is not going to be prior to the tribulation. They see the church going through the great tribulation: simply because they do not have a revelation of Revelation 7:9-17 (which you can read later). On the other hand you have those who picture the great, glorious rapture of the Gentile Bride; but they do not have the rest of it as it has to be. They somehow or other have the thought that Jesus can come for His Bride at just any moment of time: not even taking into consideration those prophecies that still have to be fulfilled first. As I have said many times, He can come for me tonight. He may come for you tonight; but there is a divine order and sequence involved concerning the time when He comes for His church. He will not come one minute early or one minute late. He is going to be right on time according to the foreordained order the Father purposed before the foundation of the world. What did the apostle Paul say as he wrote his second letter to the Thessalonians? He said to the brethren, concerning the coming of our Lord and our gathering together unto Him, that that day shall not come except there come a falling away first. The end of that was that the man of sin must be revealed to the world first. That means somewhere in the very near future this world’s antichrist must begin to be introduced into the political affairs of human government. Many people today have very high hopes concerning this new world order that is being talked about; but people who know their Bible cannot get excited about it except for the fact that it brings Gentile time very close to the hour for the bride’s departure. We know what the beast was in the Dark Ages. We know what it did in the Dark Ages. We also know the system of it was wounded with what looked like a deadly wound; and it was the Reformation that inflicted the wound; but the head was healed and the beast stands ready to continue on for a short period of time. Whether they know it or not, that is what so many people are building their hopes for the future on; but I want you to know, My hopes for the future are built upon nothing but the word of God; and I am longing for 1st Thessalonians 4:15-17 to be fulfilled. Let us read it. “For this we say unto you by the word of the Lord, that we which are alive and remain unto the coming of the Lord shall not prevent them which are asleep. For the Lord Himself shall descend from heaven with a shout, with the voice of the archangel, and with the trump of God: and the dead in Christ shall rise first: Then we which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air: and so shall we ever be with the Lord.” If you want to get excited about something, do as the apostle Paul admonished those saints at Thessalonica: (18) “Wherefore comfort one another with these words.” That would be the words we just read. No matter how bad, or how good things may look, this is what the true people of God are looking forward to: the time when we can get out of here. Therefore as Gentile Christians living here in the endtime and knowing that we are among the generation that will literally be the living element of people that will see the rest of these prophecies of the scriptures fulfilled, we need to be able to recognize where we are in time and what is about to take place as we so rapidly approach the ending of Gentile time. Paul plainly teaches in the Thessalonian letter, that the world’s great hopes for peace are anchored in a man whose coming is after the working of Satan. When the pope stood in Denver Colorado and said all the things he did as he made all of those speeches, just think of the thousands of people that stood listening to him and of all the tears of joy that were shed. I want you to realize something, That was one of many appearances, if you look at it right, that fit the term: “whose coming, (whose public introduction) is after the workings of Satan, with all power, (Satanic power, through politics, through religion, through economics) and signs, and lying wonders.” Within the Catholic realm, what are we hearing now? The virgin Mary is popping up on every street corner. Even the pope has seen her. You have Protestant, Gentiles today believing every bit of that. You have political leaders looking at it and it causes them to look at the pope and say that he is the one to look to. I cannot remember the particular title they give him; but the great mass out there look at him like he is the only real spiritual man on the face of the earth. But remember saints, “Whose coming is after the workings of Satan.” There is not another world leader on this planet that has that much influence in the present day affairs of human government. Let that pope stand where the world sees him, and they absolutely sit there with awe. But remember, “Whose coming is after the workings of Satan, with all power, (It is Satanic power.) and signs and lying wonders.” Lying wonders is none other than big flowery speeches, with big promises of love and peace that paint such a beautiful picture in the eyes and minds of gullible people; but in reality it is none other than lies of the devil. That is the way we have to look at what is going on out there. God has given us the privilege to know the truth about what is going on: so we would not be deceived by all of that. Through that man, through his office and the way he talks, the devil is pulling the wool over people’s eyes around the world today. As we look at that and realize what is taking place we still do not know how close we are to the seventieth week of Daniel being ushered in: we just have to keep our eyes open and be ready. We need to keep looking toward Israel; and at how things develop in the Middle East. At any rate the shaking now is on. In that shaking God is rearranging, shuffling certain world leaders, certain political programs and things of that sort; and eventually it will even start disturbing the economics of the world. That is what will cause Europe to eventually stop their arguing about one world currency and just come right out with it: because God will pressure them to do so. He is able to put it in the heart’s of politicians to do what it takes to fulfill His purpose. That is why Isaiah 60 stands out like it does: we know the great Creator is able to bring it all to pass. When the Lord told those Jews in the days of Haggai and Zerubbabel, The silver is mind, and the gold is mine, What do you think His purpose was for saying that? Sure, those people building the second temple heard those words; but those words were not applicable to those people: for them to believe that particular house they just got through dedicating was going to be rededicated or refurbished and re-beautified. These verses are for the hour you and I live in. Therefore let us not look at them with our eyes closed and think we are going to be ready to be raptured out of here one of these days. Very soon now all of these things will begin to click, click, click, and set in motion the very things we have been talking about. I am convinced, that if we get all these scriptures lined up properly, we are going to see that the Gentile Bride, in whatever time she has left to be here before the week of Daniel starts, is going to be dealt with by her heavenly Father and lifted up to such a spiritual plateau she will know exactly how to walk with Him while she waits for the appearing of the Bridegroom to take her away from here. At the same time we are going to see things really begin to develop with Israel getting the stage set for this week to be introduced. When you read Revelation, chapter 11: how John was given a reed, a measuring instrument, what was he told to do? Go measure the altar and the temple and them that worship therein, but the court without, leave out, for it and the holy city are given to the Gentiles to be trodden under foot for forty and two months. That lets us know that the two prophets which were typed in Zechariah’s prophecy are yet to appear; and the ministry of both these men will literally be fulfilled over in Revelation 11. Those two prophets of that hour will be prophesy will be prophesying to the nation of Israel while the temple is being built. The Jews will have the altar already in service and sacrifice will be offered upon it according to the Law. Everything in the law will be set in motion concerning how God will bring about the fulfillment of all those prophecies in Leviticus that are related to the second advent of Christ. Therefore let us ask ourselves, Since God said, (Haggai 2:8) “The silver is mine, and the gold is mine, saith the Lord of hosts,” Where is it? We all know it is generally reported, that the Gentile world is bankrupt. We are living in an inflationary era of time. Never have the economies of the nations been so inflated as they are right now. There seems to be no way there can be a regrouping, or restructuring of anything. Therefore right now, as you look at the world, if God was to say to the Jewish nation today, Start building your temple: I ask you a simple question, Where would they go, to get the necessary means to do so? Oh Bro. Jackson, there are Jews on Wall Street with more than enough. I know all about the Jews on Wall Street; but no prophecy of the scriptures mentions anything about the Jews on Wall Street. Prophecy shows it coming from other sources. Well if it is coming from other sources, how is that going to be possible, when we can see there are conditions in the world that would not even permit it to be so as they exist right now? That is why there is a shaking going on: God is in the process of changing that outlook. As we get closer to the time for that temple to be built and the Gentile Church really begins to be dealt with by God to lift her up, we are going to see conditions in the world about us suddenly begin to develop some conditions that will result in a completely different picture than what we see right now; and in some instances it will take place in one day of time.


ISAIAH’S PROPHECY OF THE END TIME


Let us look at Isaiah 60 for a few verses. Just think how long this prophecy has been lying there: right on through the centuries; and many times, or most of the time people have read it with such a nonchalant attitude thinking, Well the church will be gone when that takes place: so we do not have to worry about that. Well saints, I believe that if we will look at it in the true light of the revelation God has given us in this age, we will see it altogether different than that. This prophecy in Isaiah 60 is a prophecy that portrays what God is going to do and how He is going to work exclusively with the Jewish people in their nation in the building of their temple, and in the way the rest of the world will look at the city of Jerusalem and at what is going on there: especially in the old walled part of it. Keep in mind, the old walled city part right now is still inhabited by 3/4 Arabs. Much of that old walled city part is in a very desolate and run down condition. That renders the old city almost unprepared for the fulfillment of Biblical prophecy that is related to making it ready for the Jewish Messiah. When you see Ezekiel’s description of Jerusalem for that hour, you see a magnificently beautiful city spread out across the horizon of Mt. Zion; so let us look at this prophecy and see what happens. I am 69 years old. I do not know when the Lord is coming for me. As I said in Norway, that is the least of my worries. There are people sitting in assemblies around the world today: that are going to be alive when the rapture takes place. There are people here in this very congregation that will see this prophecy fulfilled before their very eyes, whether I am one of them or not. The unbelieving Gentile world around you will become startled when things start falling into place; but before it is all over they will recognize the hand of God is working on behalf of the nation of Israel. Not to bless the unbelieving, rebellious element: but to fulfill all of what was promised to Abraham and his seed. Yet today all that we have talked about looks virtually impossible in the light of present developments. With God nothing is impossible. Everything is going to fall exactly in place. When it does, the little Gentile Church is going to move forward with God so eagerly and so enthusiastically: because she will know her time of departure is rapidly approaching. As God begins to lift the Jewish nation up, and all those things are fulfilled there, the Gentile Bride is being dealt with in her last moments of time: getting her ready to meet the Lord. There are yet some things to be revealed to her through the thunders of Revelation 10. Let us now take a look at Isaiah’s prophecy and look at it in a simple way. It is not supposed to be complicated. It starts out, “Arise, shine; for thy light is come, and the glory of the Lord is risen upon thee.” That is talking about Zion, Israel, for the last days after it has been reconstructed as a state and the people are there. “For, behold, the darkness shall cover the earth, (That does not mean the sun will stop shining, it just means God’s spiritual grace is going to stop shining on this Gentile world. You will have to agree with me: that it looks like it has already happened. As you explore our cities and society, especially in America, it absolutely looks like there is a dark cloud hanging between this nation and the divine glory of God that prohibits the light of reality to even shine and reflect on our miserable society. No wonder the perverts act like they do. Darkness covers the earth.) and gross darkness the people: (You can sure see that darkness covering America today.) but the Lord shall arise upon thee, (He is talking about Israel.) and His glory shall be seen upon thee.” You are not in the Millennium yet. You are in an interval of time that sets the city and the temple and everything in proper perspective for the week of Daniel. (3) “And the Gentiles shall come to thy light, and kings to the brightness of thy rising.” As God begins to lift up Jerusalem and Mt. Zion for that particular hour of time, for the rehabilitation and reconstruction of it, getting it ready for the Messiah that is to rule from there in the Millennium that verse will stand out. (4) “Lift up thine eyes round about, and see: all they gather themselves together, they come to thee: thy sons shall come from far, and thy daughters shall be nursed at thy side. (5) Then thou shalt see, and flow together, (He is talking about the society of Jews.) and thine heart shall fear, and be enlarged; because the abundance of the sea shall be converted unto thee, the forces of the Gentiles shall come unto thee.” He is not talking about spiritual conversion here in this verse. He is talking about material substances that God is going to begin to lay His hand on, we will say of certain wealth, money and material things; because He is going to use it for the restructuring and rebuilding of Jerusalem and the hastening of the rebirth of Mt. Zion. As I talk and say this, if you have never been in the old city, if you have never seen the old Jerusalem city, then you have to realize that according to the Bible, that old city is not going to be populated by 3/4 Arabs when that time comes. All you have to do is go to the 49th chapter and you will see that. It is true Israel has much land today, but make no mistake about it: there is more land she has to take. She will eventually take the land beyond the Jordan River that she formerly possessed when the land was divided among the twelve tribes. In other words, she is literally going to take all the land that is now called Jordan proper. There never was in ancient times a nation called Jordan. It was called the land of the Edomites, the land of the Moabites and the land of the Amonites. All the rest beyond Jordan belonged to certain tribes of Israel that had taken possession of it. That is why we can say they are going to get that land back. They will get that land back, and that is going to coincide with their opportunity to start building the temple. Having said that, let us continue on here in Isaiah. (6) “The multitude of camels shall cover thee, (where are they coming from?) the dromedaries of Midian and Ephah; (Look on the old Biblical maps, that will point you right down into the region of Saudi Arabia. Let any one ask the question today, Who, in Saudi Arabia today, is ready to contribute such a thing to the Jewish nation? Nobody. Why? Because it is all under that spell of Islam. Actuality this whole Mideast problem is the fact you have millions of Arabs or Islamic people all under that religion and they are uniting and combining their power, and their belief that somehow or other they have to expel, even destroy every evidence of this Jewish state. They fear, that if they do not do something to change their prophetic outlook those Jews will always give them trouble. Well we do know prophecy is going to be fulfilled the way the Jews see it: Not the way the Arabs see it. Now notice how it talks about the camels, the dromedaries) all they from Sheba shall come: (That is also from Saudi Arabia) they shall bring gold and incense; (We all know Saudi Arabia is one of the wealthiest oil producing nations in the Middle East. You will have to agree with that.) and they shall shew forth the praises of the Lord.” Ask Saudi Arabia today, to come to Mt. Zion and glorify God as the Jews do. They will laugh in your face. Am I telling the truth? You know I am. “(7) All the flocks of Kedar (This was one of the sons of Abraham by Keturah, the woman he married after Sarah’s death. Where is he? He is off over in the region which we call Jordan today.) shall be gathered together unto thee, the rams of Nebaioth (That is another of his sons from that same region.) shall minister unto thee: they shall come up with acceptance on mine altar, (Do not tell me He is talking about the Millennium, He is not. He is talking about a time right here at the very beginning of that week.) and I will glorify the house of my glory.” Saints: when you read these verses you should begin to realize that if this temple is to be built, (as we read in various other scriptures) please do not think you just take this prophecy and place it over here somewhere in the Millennium. That is not the vision the Jews have today. The Jews’ vision today, is when and if they do start building this house, they are building it for their Messiah. It is going to go together just exactly the way they expect their Messiah to see it when He does come and His feet touch the Mt. of Olives. As you read those verses, please remember that the Arabs, under that Islamic spell, believe that through Ishmael, Abraham’s promise is going to be fulfilled: not through Isaac. That is where the conflict lies. The Arab’s are locked up under the revelation of Islam; but the Jews are going back there with a belief in their heart, that they are going there to get ready for the fulfillment of those scriptures pertaining to the coming of their Messiah. Therefore we have to realize, No matter what politicians in the world believe, and no matter what the Arabs believe, there will be a temple built on the temple mound where the Mosque of Omar stands today. That means that wherever we are in time, between now and the time for that last week to start, the shaking of all things is going to suddenly and literally create conditions in the Middle East that will without a doubt bring about a war between Israel and some of those Arab states. As it says in Numbers 24, when Balaam had to prophesy, and said how Israel would do valiantly in that day, when she will possess the land of Moab and so forth, just remember this, The same God is still in control of all of this. In front of you and me, before that week of Daniel starts, we are going to see something take place in the Middle East that is going to cause people to say, “My, what a miracle! What a phenomena! I never would have thought such a thing was possible: That had to be a work of God.” Even though much of this looks impossible in the light of present day developments, just think back how we looked at Russia five years ago. After 70 long years of them putting that empire together, in less than three years that thing is a total shambles. God can do more in three weeks, three months, and three years, than man and an empire can do in a hundred years. When we begin to realize that this prophecy in Haggai concerning the shaking of all things is in the earth today, then we ought not be surprised when other prophecies begin to be fulfilled. This shaking of all things is no surprise to me. What makes you say that Bro. Jackson? Get my tract and read it: I had the dream of it. Oh, you had the dream about the shaking of all things? I sure did. It is back there on the rack with the Contenders: you can have it if you want it. When Jim Bakker was having his problems, and when Oral Roberts was money hunting, that is when I had this dream. Not too long after that Jimmy Swaggart had his problems brought out into the light. Then bingo, down comes the Russian Empire, falling to pieces. The shaking of all things is absolutely God’s way of reaching down into the affairs of men and shuffling, shaking, removing, taking things out of the way that are standing in the way of the fulfillment of His plan and purpose. Therefore be assured that in the realm of religion there will be more shakings in many places. In the political, military, economic affairs of the world there will be much more shaking in many more places. At the same time God is removing things that stand in the way of what He intends to accomplish, He is moving other things into place. I say we have a clue here in the things we have been looking at: because we recognize the shaking that is taking place; and this shaking will continue on until finally there is a temple built in Israel. Then time will put Israel in the week of Daniel and the church in glory. Between now and then though, we are going to see Israel do some outstanding and marvelous things militarily, in the Middle East: that will no doubt make the Gulf War look very small in respects to the type of miracles God will perform for them in their achievements; and the hour will be when you will see that Islamic religion that has those Arab states all locked up fail to do what it has been doing: oppress Israel. You are going to live to see the hour when those Arab states are going to say, Now we support Israel. You may say, I don’t believe that! Well I say, Stick around. Oh but it looks impossible. I know it looks impossible; but there is another prophecy that feeds into that. When you go to Zephaniah 2, where it tells how Israel in the last days, will possess the land of the Philistines, what do you think was achieved in the six day war when they took the Gaza Strip? The Gaza Strip is none other than the area of the old Philistines. The ancient cities of the Philistines, the ruins, are still there today. That accounts for much of the squabble over there right now. Each is saying to Israel, give up the Gaza Strip. The Palestinian Arabs in the land of Israel say, Give up the Gaza Strip. But keep in mind that Zephaniah 2 says they will possess them of the sea coast. Then the prophecy goes on, in return they also possess the land of the Moabites and the Edomites and the Amonites, all in that same scope of prophecy. God says in the continuation of that prophecy, I will destroy, or I will vanquish all the gods of the earth in that day. Some of these things seem so small and insignificant when you read them, they do not appear to be anything very important. A lot of people will read that and say, Oh Bro. Jackson, God will do this over here, and God will do this over here. They will all be dead by the time that time comes. When his wrath is poured out, He is pouring it out to get rid of sinful and wicked men. There is no god going to stand in His way. Right now there is a religion in the Middle East that is standing in His way. If God is going to get camels, if God is going to get goats, and if He is going to get sheep and gold and incense out of that Arabian, Islamic country, you can rest assured He is going to do something first to change their attitude. Do not worry though: He knows how to do it. In 1968 when we went to Israel, on the plane between New York and Israel, we had the privilege of talking to a Jewish general. He was the commander of one of the armored divisions of the Israeli army that went through the Sinai and ran the Egyptians back across the Red Sea. He said, After the war was over we realized there were many miracles that occurred on the field of battle. At the same time he was also the president of a bank in the city of Safad. He said some time after the war was over, one morning a Syrian business man from Damascus walked into the bank. These were his words, “Gentlemen, I am a Syrian, but I know that your God is working on your side. The war has proved to me that He is with your people. Because of that I want to deposit so much money, (and it was an enormous amount of money). I want to deposit it in your bank because I want to put it where I feel God can use it for His glory.” Now that is just one incident. If God can speak to a wealthy man all because of the outcome of one war, (in which his own nation was licked) that would make him put his wealth in a Jewish bank, what do you think it will be like when God causes Israel to really do valiantly on the field of battle? When the week of Daniel starts, Israel’s wars are over. You will read no place where Israel is fighting wars in the week of Daniel. It is the opposite. Her wars, whatever she is to fight, is to be between now and the time that week starts. That is why I say these prophecies are clues, indicators that can help you and me look at time, and how we are to relate ourself to time. If we are getting close to the time this is to be, then this lets me know we are getting close and God is going to do something for you and me, the Gentile church. After almost thirty years since Bro. Branham’s death, only the Lord knows how confused the picture has become and the shame that has followed. Really the spiritual death that has followed. Few people can really see a positive picture of how to see themselves in relationship to time and the coming of the Lord. I told one group of people which were trying to say, but Bro. Branham said this, the prophet said this: He said nothing about a six day war. He said nothing about a 1973 war. He said nothing about a 1982 war. If the western leaders had kept their nose out of that war in 1982, Israel would not be having the problems on the Lebanese border today: she would have put that whole Palestinian problem to rest. But no, it goes to show every time our leaders stick their nose into international affairs, especially in the Middle East, it always fails to produce anything that is positive. It only leads to further chaos and anarchy, with more human suffering. Therefore I have to say, Stick around, we are going to see something unfold before our eyes and we are going to see those things written in this book start clicking just like a stop watch: both for the Gentile church and things in respects to Israel.


ZECHARIAH’S PROPHECY OF A CANDLESTICK


Let us go to Zechariah, chapter 4. Zechariah was a contemporary prophet along with Haggai, in the same period of time. Actually Haggai prophesied over a longer period and his prophecy reached out and pulled in greater pictures of things to take place in the last days; but here in this 4th chapter we can see a picture of something. Zechariah is looking and is asked a question by this angel, so notice, (Zec 4:1-2)”And the angel that talked with me came again, and waked me, as a man that is wakened out of his sleep. And said unto me, What seest thou? And I said, I have looked, And behold a candlestick all of gold, with a bowl upon the top of it, and his seven lamps thereon, and seven pipes to the seven lamps, which are upon the top thereof.” Think about that for a minute. Zechariah is telling the angel, I see a candlestick. Actually he was looking at the Jewish Menorah, the seven golden candlesticks that stood before the temple. That is what he was looking at. However there was a phenomena, something mysterious about it. In the 3rd verse he wrote this, “And two olive trees by it, one upon the right side of the bowl, and the other upon the left side thereof.” The bowl is in the center. This is where the oil is poured. Little pipes running from this center bowl out through the arm of each candelabra that holds the candle which gives the light. There are seven pipes through these arms that allow the oil to flow, one to each one of these candelabra; but it all comes from this central bowl. What Zechariah saw was two olive trees: one placed on each side of this bowl. (4) “So I answered and spake to the angel that talked with me, saying, What are these, my lord?” I am not going to read every verse; but you can notice there when Zechariah asked the angel that question, What are these? the angel really just communicated a completely opposite thought back to him. Here is where he prophesied to Zerubabel, who was the governor at that time, a type of the Holy Spirit in our day, how it was not by might, nor by power, but by my spirit, saith the Lord. He was prophesying concerning all the things that had to be removed and cleaned away. If you and I could have seen that great mountain of stone rubbish laying there, which was the ruins of the old temple, and those stones were huge. They did not have the instruments to remove them like we do today. Those people, I can hear them say, Well I am not going to do it all by myself, what is John going to do? Well I don’t see George. Where is he? You know how human beings are: Always looking for excuses to keep from doing their part. As long as the people were looking at the obstacle, they were discouraged. Actually they felt it was an impossibility. In other words they felt, We are back here to do something, but only God knows when and how. Well saints, I can bring it right to our day. For thirty long years since Bro. Branham’s death, all over this world it has been said, God sent a messenger to turn us back to the faith of our fathers, and get us out of Babylon. That is the truth; but for a long time it looked almost impossible for there to ever be an element of people on this earth that has enough sense to know what it is to come together and work in harmony and really see the same picture. Nevertheless God has a plan; and He has a way. When the Spirit of God is directing it, we cannot help but give ourselves to it. That is exactly what happened here. When the Spirit of God came down and really anointed the people, then it was no longer Pete looking at George, or George looking at Jim: It was everyone looking at the task with a feeling of urgency: Let’s go to work and get the job done. When people began to look at their situation like that, they stop looking at all the confusion and began to look to God. When you have an objective and look to God for enablement, there comes an anointing that begins to remove the obstacles and everything can begin to go together the way God wants it to be. Coming back to Zechariah’s prophecy and the way the angel answered him when he asked, What are these my lord? None of what the angel said concerning Zerubabbel kept Zechariah from being determined to find out about the two olive trees: one on each side of the golden candlestick. (Zec. 4:11) “Then answered I, and said unto him, What are these two olive trees upon the right side of the candlestick and upon the left side thereof?” He was really persistent. Notice verse 12. “And I answered again, and said unto him, What be these two olive branches which through the two golden pipes empty the golden oil out of themselves?” The angel finally answered his question; but the answer was one that the Jewish nation even yet today still does not know the meaning of. (13) “And he answered me and said, Knowest thou not what these be? And I said, No, my lord. (14) Then said he, These are the two anointed ones, that stand by the Lord of the whole earth.” It is like the apostle Paul said, They have been spiritually blinded: that the Gentiles might have access to this gospel; but the Gentile opportunity has just about run its course and the Spirit of God will again deal with the Jews. As I have already said, We gentiles look to God through a different covenant relationship than what the Jews have ever known. We have not had to depend upon the keeping of the Law of Moses and the offering up of those burnt offerings: but rather look to that which was accomplished on behalf of all who would believe: when our blessed Savior offered Himself as the one sacrifice sufficient for the sins of all of us. Thanks be unto God: we know what these two olive trees are. Do we, Bro. Jackson? Yes. Because when you go to Revelation 11, and verse 3, right there in our prophetic letter which was given to the Gentile Church we are told in advance that these are the two anointed ones that stand by the God of the whole earth. In other words, it is the two great anointings that will rest on those two witnesses of Rev. 11; and we know they will be men which are no longer just symbols: but that which the symbols in the Old Testament pointed to. They will prophesy the first half of that week. Why would God be concerned to give to the Gentile Church in 96 A.D. almost 20 years after the destruction of Jerusalem that which He commissioned the apostle John to write? Here in chapter 11, he has been given a reed, a stick, and told, Go measure the temple: when there was no temple there at that time. That proves it was for a future time. Then he sees these two olive trees, and is told these are the two anointed ones that stand by the God of the whole earth: And He (God) will give power unto His two witnesses. That leaves the mystical types and goes directly to two men who are to be prophets; and their prophetic ministries are going to be like that of Moses and Elijah of old. The Gentile church sees that and can understand it; but no orthodox Jew ever has. Why do I read it like that? Simply because when we come to Revelation 10, and see the seven thunders expressed there, the Gentile world in general, especially the denominational world, knows nothing at all about in and cares even less. To them that is just another verse of scripture laying there that they could not care less about what it means. Well it means a lot to a few people on this earth: the true Gentile bride Church. It is called thunders; and we know thunders speak of the voice of God: so we have much to look forward to. I looked back at the movement and realized all the pros and cons that have been shuffled back and forth; but if you will look at the structure of what is said in that 3rd verse of chapter 10, and as soon as that angel cried like a lion, seven thunders uttered their voices. Their is a plural pronoun word, that is never used in the Bible in a symbolic language. Every time the word their is used in the Bible to convey a thought, it is speaking in conjunction with either men or angels. Study the Bible and you will discover for yourself what I mean. That is why I have said all along, those thunders are going to be men in the Gentile Church: scattered over the face of this earth, men who God will deal with in that precise hour when He is lifting His Church up, getting her ready for her departure to glory. Why do I say that? If God will talk about two olive trees in Zechariah 4, which basically is for the Jews to understand in their hour: when God again begins to deal with them, certainly He will talk about seven thunders that are ordained to minister to the Gentile Bride Church in the final stage of her preparation to leave here. Seven thunders will utter their voices; and they will be heard to ends of the earth (so to speak). You can rest assured, a thunder in that respect is just as important to the Church as the two olive trees will be to the Jews. John was forbidden to write what those thunders said; but likewise, when you read Revelation 11, do you find what those two prophets are going to prophesy in the hour of their ministry? Those thunders are going to be used of God to lift the bride up into a prophetic relationship with the Lord Himself; and from that same plateau He will move right over to the Jews through the ministry of those two olive trees (prophets). It will be thunders on the Gentile side and olive trees on the Jewish side; but the prophetic words will all come from the same source: the Spirit of God. Just remember, “THEIR VOICES” cannot apply to just one man; and neither can it apply to symbolism. Check it out.


A DREAM GIVEN TO PASTOR JACKSON


I had a dream shortly before we left for Norway back in the Summer; so I may as well relate it to you and get it off of my chest.


“In the dream I saw myself come into possession of certain words. Today I do not even know what they were. In the dream I did, because I saw myself writing them down. I immediately said to myself, This is going to lead to something. Suddenly I was in possession of certain numbers. I saw them, I even wrote them down. I do not know whether they were dates, numbers referring to some other subject, or what. I immediately wrote this all down and began to say to my wife, Honey, this is going to lead to something. The scene changed and I could see myself speaking to my people in Faith Assembly: saying, Set these words down and do not forget them. This is all going to come together and form a great picture of understanding, something about the coming of our Lord. Then the scene changed again and I saw a large gathering of people taking place. They were coming from all over the world. I saw all those people assembling and talking about the great feeling they had inside their hearts about the coming of Jesus. At this time I noticed that there was one thing about everyone who was coming to this great assembly. Each person had in their hand, not in their pocket, a small bottle of holy anointing oil. See Exodus 30:22-31. This bottle was no larger than a person’s own thumb. One thing was very noticeable though, each person had received their bottle of oil directly from God: not from man. No one was allowed into this great assembly unless they had their bottle of holy anointing oil. However, there was no one standing at the door of entrance into this great assembly to make sure everyone had the oil. Again I saw myself saying to people, Remember these words, do not forget them. We are about to learn something. Then the scene changed again. At this time Bro. William Branham came into the scene. He stood in front of the assembly and began to speak. I heard him say things that was lifting the hearts of the people into a great feeling of expectancy. My own heart was thrilled with what was being said. I heard myself saying in a low voice to those standing close by, What did I tell you? Did I not tell you we are going to learn something? Do you remember those words I told you I had received? The atmosphere at this time was thrilling and the aroma coming from all those little bottles of holy anointing oil was so sweet. Then the scene changed and I saw myself speak out to the people and say, I want to tell you of a dream I had concerning this great event. I began to speak to them the same words I am now telling you: of what I saw in this dream, and what I had heard. It was while telling them of the dream within a dream, that I woke up at exactly 5:01 AM, Wednesday, July 14, 1993. When I awakened I could no longer remember the words that I had received, nor the numbers, nor what Bro. Branham had said; and the reason I could not remember was because I know it is yet in the future.” That is the dream,and I know some people will say, Does that mean Bro. Branham is coming back from the dead? No. How could it have such a meaning? God is getting ready to play a trick on some people whose love is not for the truth; and it is going to be so simple, it will almost be unbelievable. Let me now take you to Matthew 17: right back to that dramatic scene in which Jesus took three disciples up on a mountain to give them a preview of what was to transpire here at the end of time. On the Mount of Transfiguration Jesus was caught up in the glory of God; and a vision broke forth upon those disciples He took with Him. They saw two men talking to Jesus and they knew they were Moses and Elijah. Remember this, To those three disciples, that scene looked as real as anything they had ever seen; but actually, as Jesus pointed out in His words to them, it was only a vision. A vision in which He showed them a preview of the two olive trees mentioned in Zechariah 4: that will appear on the scene over here in the first half of the seventieth week of Daniel: the two anointings that will precede His glorious appearing, which we read about in Revelation 19. What words did those disciples hear those prophets speaking to Jesus? They heard them speaking to Him concerning the things He was about to suffer. Let me ask you a simple question. There is no doubt those disciples heard the two prophets, in the vision, speak words to Him that are not even written in the Old Testament. How could they speak words to Him concerning how to prepare Himself for that hour of physical suffering He was soon to face, except by prophetic utterance? That is exactly what it was. Why did God use the image of two Old Testament prophets for that? Remember, when Jesus was in the wilderness of temptation tempted by the devil, and how after He rebuked the devil for the last time the devil left Him for a season and angels came and ministered unto Him? That lets you know the presence of angels under the divine anointing of God ministered to the psychological makeup of the man Jesus. Therefore knowing angels were present my point is this, Why did God use the image’s of those two prophets to convey words to Jesus of what He was going to suffer? Why did He not use an angel for that? If you are following my line of thought, this proves beyond the shadow of a doubt, that if somewhere in time a man has stood out in the plan of God as being something greatly anointed, and God has used that man, He wants to establish that man’s influence. He will use his image to bear on the conscience and mind of people in a way to respect the man’s person; but certainly not to give anyone any reason to make a god out of the man. Having said that, let me say also, I have felt for a long time, that because denominational religion despised the name William Branham so much: mainly because they are looking at a following that has literally defamed him, and brought reproach upon all who follow the truth He was used to restore to the Church, that God would do something before time runs out: to respect the man for what he truly was: a prophet messenger to this age. It almost looks like there is hardly anyone left on this earth that has a sensible heart to really understand what God’s true purpose was. That is why I say, If God can send two prophets to set a type, to speak to His only begotten Son of things He was soon to suffer, then do not tell me that God cannot by the same token, use the image of William Branham to convey something to the Gentile Church? Not that He is going to bring him back from the dead for anything, but that He can use his image to appear to certain men, and say certain things of a prophetic nature that will be so real and so positive, it will help put a picture together in the minds of a lot of people. They will know things not even written in the book. I realize a lot of people might say Jackson has gone crazy; but I still say, Stick around. One of these days there will be an element of people in this earth that has a true picture in their heart’s and God is going to be talking to them. The thunders on this side will be voices speaking to a Gentile Bride; but on this other side there is going to be two olive trees (prophets) speaking to an element of Jewish people who will have ears to hear what the Spirit is saying. Right now, it is symbols on both sides; but it will be a beautiful sight to see how God connects the two together as He closes everything out. Hallelujah!

1993-10-Looking-For-Clues-Part-1